JP6583454B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game.

  In a gaming machine that uses a game ball such as a pachinko machine or an arrangement ball machine, the game ball is paid out as the game progresses. For example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a ball entrance provided on the game board surface, the game ball is paid out as a prize ball. The game ball is normally paid out from the payout device through the payout passage to the front side of the gaming machine and stored in a tray provided on the front side.

  Here, when the tray is filled with game balls, if the game balls are paid out in this state, there is a risk that the game balls will be jammed in the payout passage and the gaming machine will break down. For example, in a pachinko machine, when a so-called big hit state occurs, a large number of prize balls may be paid out in a short time. In such a case, the saucer is likely to be full. There is a possibility that inconveniences such as the ball becoming stuck and the game cannot be continued or the pachinko machine itself breaks down. Therefore, a technique for avoiding such inconvenience is provided by providing a detection mechanism for detecting a full state in the payout passage, and stopping the payout when detecting a full state of the tray (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  However, in recent years, other devices mounted on gaming machines tend to be complicated or large in size, and there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration of the devices relating to paying out game balls.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably configuring an apparatus relating to payout of game balls.

In order to solve at least a part of the problems described above, the gaming machine of the present invention employs the following configuration. That is,
A gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game,
A payout device for paying out game balls;
A first storage unit for storing game balls paid out from the payout device;
A second storage section for storing game balls paid out from the payout device when the first storage section is filled with game balls;
A first passage portion for allowing a game ball to flow down between the payout device and the first storage portion;
Branched in a direction different from the first passage portion, provided between the payout device and the second storage portion, and paid out from the payout device in a situation where game balls are stacked in the first passage portion A second passage portion for flowing down the played game ball,
Detecting means for detecting a predetermined full state formed by a game ball flowing down the second passage portion;
Stop control means for stopping the payout of the game ball from the payout device based on the detection result of the detection means;
A portion that partitions the second passage portion and the first passage portion, and intersects the vertical direction with the game ball paid out from the payout device in a situation where game balls are stacked in the first passage portion. A guiding part that leads to
A recoil portion provided in a traveling direction of the game ball guided by the guide portion and rebounding the game ball;
A displacement member that is provided on the lower side with respect to the recoil portion, and is displaced by the game ball when the game ball stays in the second passage portion ,
Said detecting means is arranged at a position higher than the first reservoir, the gaming machine characterized that you detect the predetermined fully state by detecting the displacement of the displacement member.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to provide the gaming machine which can comprise suitably the apparatus regarding payout of a game ball.

It is a front view of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which showed the structure of the game board 20 with which the ball ball game machine 10 of the present Example was equipped. It is explanatory drawing which showed a mode that the game ball switches easily and the state where it is hard to enter a ball by driving the electrically-driven accessory 41 to a 2nd operation port. It is explanatory drawing which showed the detailed structure of the segment type display apparatus 70 with which the ball game machine 10 of the present Example was equipped. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view showing a configuration on the back side of the ball game machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated a mode that the effect image is displayed in the effect display apparatus 30. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control device of the ball game machine 10. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a counter area 141. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed notionally the mode that the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a was updated, referring the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b. It is explanatory drawing which showed the jackpot lottery table referred when performing the success / failure determination of jackpot lottery using the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the distribution table referred when determining the type of jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which showed notionally the structure of the pending | holding storage area. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the process of the "main loop process" performed with the bullet ball game machine 10 of a present Example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the symbol game process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display preparation process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display start process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display start process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the stop mode setting process for jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the stop mode table. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the stop mode setting process for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the stop mode table for special removal, and the stop mode table for normal removal. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the change display time setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display continuation process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the fluctuation | variation display end process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the game state transfer process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the big entrance opening / closing process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the big entrance opening / closing process. It is explanatory drawing which showed the flow of the condition counter setting process at the time of open | release. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the condition counter setting process at the time of closure. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing mode. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing mode. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory control process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory control process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the electric accessory opening / closing process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of timer interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation | movement entrance ball entering process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the information acquisition process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the through operation entrance ball entering process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the remaining time process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation opening ball command setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the operation opening ball command setting process. It is explanatory drawing which showed the holding | maintenance classification table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the data structure of the operation entrance ball command. 5 is a flowchart showing a flow of command response processing executed by a sub-control device 200. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the action opening ball command response processing. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the pending | holding shift notification command response process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the general command corresponding | compatible process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the general command corresponding | compatible process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the content of the hold display effect of a present Example. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the content of the hold display effect of a present Example. It is explanatory drawing which showed the detailed structure of the dispensing mechanism of a present Example. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where game balls discharged from a nozzle channel 422 flow down in a lower channel 440. FIG. 48 is an explanatory view showing a state in which game balls flow down to a second flow path 450 due to game balls piled up in a first flow path 448; It is explanatory drawing which showed the detailed structure of the lower plate full detection mechanism 500. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed a mode that the lower plate 16 full state was detected by the lower plate full detection mechanism 500. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed a mode that the collision of the game ball with the lever member 510 can be avoided by providing the recoil board 600. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which game balls are stored in a space upstream of the lever member 510 when the lower plate 16 is full. 3 is a block diagram showing a relationship between a payout control device 410 and devices electrically connected to the payout control device 410. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a flow of a “payout control main process” executed by the payout control apparatus 410. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the process of "command interruption process." 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of a “timer interrupt process” executed by the payout control device 410. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "lower plate full tank check process". It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "lower plate full tank check process". It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "lower plate full tank check process". It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payout state setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of a prize ball setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of a prize ball setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the ball rental setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payout number setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the payout control processing. It is explanatory drawing which showed the flow of "prize ball permission signal setting process". It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination of the payout speed (the number of payout per unit time) and the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time about the modification which switches a lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time by low speed mode and normal mode. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "bottom plate full tank check process" of the 4th modification which makes payout speed of a game ball low, and stops payout of a game ball. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "bottom plate full tank check process" of the 4th modification which makes payout speed of a game ball low, and stops payout of a game ball. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the "bottom plate full tank check process" of the 4th modification which makes payout speed of a game ball low, and stops payout of a game ball. It is the flowchart which showed the “prize ball permission signal setting processing” of the modification which sets the prize ball permission signal based on the lower plate full tank low speed flag.

Hereinafter, in order to clarify the contents of the present invention described above, examples will be described in the following order.
A. Configuration of the ball game machine:
A-1. Front side configuration:
A-2. Game board configuration:
A-3. Back side configuration:
B. Overview of the game:
C. Control unit configuration:
C-1. Main controller configuration:
C-2. Peripheral device configuration:
D. Main control unit contents:
D-1. Main loop processing:
D-2. Timer interrupt processing:
D-3. Remaining time processing:
E. Control contents of sub-control unit:
F. Hold display effect:
G. Composition of the payout mechanism:
H. Control contents of the dispensing control device:
H-1. Device configuration around the payout control device:
H-2. Discharge control device processing:
H-2-1. Discharge control main process:
H-2-2. Command interrupt processing:
H-2-3. Timer interrupt processing:
I. Modified example:
I-1. First modification:
I-2. Second modification:
I-3. Third modification:
I-4. Fourth modification:

A. Configuration of the ball game machine:
A-1. Front side configuration:
FIG. 1 is a front view of a ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the front side of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a resin front panel 15 constituting the front surface of the ball game machine 10 or a board surface portion provided at the center of the front panel 15. 12 and an upper plate 13 provided slightly below the front panel 15. A glass plate is fitted into the board surface portion 12 from the back side of the front panel 15, and it is possible to visually recognize the game board installed on the back side of the front panel 15 through the glass plate. In FIG. 1, the detailed configuration of the game board is not shown.

The upper plate 13 is composed of a concave portion formed in a dish shape and a wall surface surrounding the concave portion.
It is possible to hold a game ball inside 3. The upper plate 13 is connected to a launch unit provided inside the ball game machine 10, and the game ball can be supplied to the launch unit by inserting the game ball into the upper plate 13. A lower plate 16 is provided below the upper plate 13. By operating a lever provided in the vicinity of the upper plate 13, the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 can be communicated with each other. . As will be described later, since the game balls may be paid out to the upper plate 13 with the game, the game balls may not fit in the upper plate 13, but the lower plate 16 is provided in this way. By making the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 communicate with each other, it is possible to discharge to the lower plate 16 game balls that can no longer fit in the upper plate 13.

  At the lower right of the upper plate 13, a launching handle 11 for launching a game ball onto the game board is provided. The launch handle 11 is connected to the launch unit described above, and the game ball can be launched onto the game board by operating the launch handle 11 with the game ball supplied from the upper plate 13 to the launch unit. is there. The launch handle 11 is provided with a sensor 11s (not shown), and it is possible to detect whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 11 with the sensor 11s. Then, by controlling the launch from the launch unit in accordance with the detection result of the sensor 11s, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being launched without the player touching the launch handle 11. .

  Above the front panel 15, two speakers 14 are provided on the left and right, and it is possible to output effect sounds, melody and other effect sounds in accordance with the game played in the ball game machine 10. These speakers 14 are attached from the back side to the front side of the front panel 15, and it is possible to efficiently deliver the production sound to the player who plays the game toward the front panel 15.

  Further, a key portion 17 that can be locked and unlocked using a cylinder lock is provided at the end of the front panel 15 (the right end in FIG. 1). The panel 15 can be fixed to the main body of the ball game machine 10. Moreover, if the key part 17 is unlocked, the front panel 15 can be separated from the main body of the ball game machine 10, and in this way, various devices provided on the back surface of the front panel 15, It is possible to access the device on the main body side. The front panel 15 is pivotally supported by the main body of the ball game machine 10, and the front panel 15 can be separated from the main body by rotating the front panel 15 with respect to the main body of the ball game machine 10. Is possible.

  A ball ball machine 4 is provided next to the ball ball game machine 10, and a player of the ball ball game machine 10 lends by inserting a bill or a prepaid card into the ball ball machine 4 when playing the game. A game ball can be borrowed from the ball machine 4. A nozzle 52 is provided between the rental ball machine 4 and the upper plate 13, and a game ball lent from the rental ball machine 4 can be thrown into the upper plate 13 through the nozzle 52. As described above, when a game ball is thrown into the upper plate 13, the game ball is supplied to the launch unit. Therefore, the player borrows the game ball from the rental ball machine 4 and operates the launch handle 11 to thereby play the game board. It becomes possible to play a game by launching a game ball to 20.

A-2. Game board configuration:
FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of the game board 20 provided in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As described above, such a game board 20 is attached to the board surface portion 12 (see FIG. 1) of the front panel 15 from the back side of the glass plate. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is provided with a rail 21 provided substantially perpendicular to the base plate 29 in the vicinity of the outer edge of the base plate 29 serving as a base. A game area 28 to which the nail 22, the windmill 23, etc. are attached is formed inside. The game ball launched by the launch unit is guided to the game area 28 by the rail 21 and flows down in the game area 28 while changing the traveling direction by the nail 22 or the windmill 23. The game area 28 is provided with entrances (entrance entrances) through which game balls such as the through operation opening 24, the operation opening 25, and the small prize opening 26 can enter, and the game balls that flow down are provided with these operation openings and small entrances. When a player enters a winning opening, the winning ball is paid out, or a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is performed.

  Among these entrances, the through operation port 24 is a gate-type operation port through which the entered game ball can pass, and the game ball that enters the through operation port 24 is discharged from the game area 28. Without passing through the through operation port 24, the game board 20 continues to flow down. The through operation port 24 is provided with a sensor 24s for detecting a ball entry, and the control device of the ball game machine 10 reads the detection state of the sensor 24s so that the ball enters the through operation port 24. It is possible to grasp that. When there is a ball entering the through operation port 24, the control device of the ball game machine 10 pays out a prize ball for entering the through operation port 24 to the upper plate 13 or enters the through operation port 24. Various processes such as performing a lottery are executed at the opportunity. The prize ball payout process and the lottery process will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, the small winning opening 26 is a type of winning opening that takes in the game ball that has entered the game ball and discharges it to the back side of the game board 20. The small winning opening 26 is also provided with a sensor 26s as in the case of the through operation opening 24 described above, and the control device reads out the detection state of the sensor 26s to detect a ball entering the small winning opening 26, thereby reducing the small winning opening 26. It is possible to pay out a prize ball for the entry into the prize opening 26.

  In addition, the operation port 25 (first operation port 25a and second operation port 25b) of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is similar to the small winning port 26, and the entered game ball is placed on the back side of the game board 20. It is a type of operating port that discharges into These operating ports 25 are also provided with sensors (25as, 25bs), and by reading the detection state of the sensors, it is possible to detect balls entering the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b, respectively. . An electric accessory 41 is provided in the vicinity of the second operating port 25b. By driving the electric accessory 41, a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second operating port 25b, It is possible to switch to a state where it is difficult to sphere. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game ball is switched between a state where it is easy to enter the second operation port and a state where it is difficult to enter the game by driving the electric accessory 41 provided in the vicinity of the second operation port. It is explanatory drawing. As shown in FIG. 3 (a), the electric accessory 41 is assembled to the operating port unit 40 having the first operating port 25 a provided at the upper portion, and the second Two working ports 25b are provided. The electric accessory 41 is connected to a drive mechanism provided in the working port unit 40, and the electric accessory 41 can be driven by the drive mechanism.

  FIG. 3B shows a state in which the electric accessory 41 is driven to increase the interval between the electric accessory 41 and the electric accessory 41. As shown in the figure, when the electric combination 41 is driven, the space between the left and right electric combinations 41 is greatly expanded. In this state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 41 is inclined toward the second working port 25b. Therefore, as shown by an arrow in the drawing, the game ball received on the upper surface of the electric accessory 41 Can be guided in the direction of the second working port 25b. In this way, it is possible to realize a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second operating port 25b as compared to a state in which the space between the left and right electric actors 41 is not widely opened (see FIG. 3A). Can do. In addition, if the electric combination 41 is driven and the left and right electric combinations 41 are returned to their original positions (see FIG. 3A), the game ball can be made difficult to enter again. In this way, by driving the electric accessory 41, it is possible to easily switch between a state in which a game ball easily enters the second operating port 25b and a state in which it is difficult to enter.

In the present embodiment, the interval between the electric accessories 41 is widened so that a game ball can easily enter (FIG. 3 (
b)) is referred to as the open state of the electric accessory 41, and the state where the interval between the electric actors 41 is narrow and the game balls are difficult to enter (see FIG. 3A) is the closed state of the electric accessory 41. Shall be called. Here, from the viewpoint of changing the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by driving the electric accessory 41, the closed state of the electric accessory 41 makes it impossible to enter a game ball. It is not always necessary that the second working port 25b is closed, and it is sufficient that the entry is more difficult than the open state of the electric accessory 41.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment pays out a prize ball or performs a “hit lottery” described later, Various operations are performed according to the result. The award ball payout process performed in response to the entry of such a game ball and various operations performed according to the result of the jackpot lottery will be described in detail later.

  A large entrance 60, which is a large entrance, is provided below the operation unit 40 on the game board 20, as shown in FIG. The large entrance 60 is provided with a drive mechanism, and the board member provided in front of the opening is tilted forward of the game board 20 so that the opening is closed and entry is impossible. Therefore, it is possible to switch to an open state in which the opening is open and can enter the ball. In the open state of the large entrance 60, a large number of game balls can easily enter because the opening is wide, so it is difficult for the player to open the large entrance 60. It is possible to create an advantageous gaming state. In the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, “15” prize balls are paid out for entering the large entrance 60.

  At the lowermost part of the game area 28, an out port 50 is provided for collecting game balls that have not entered any of the small winning port 26, the operating port 25, the large ball port 60, and the like. The game ball that has entered the out-port is discharged from the game board 20 and collected by a ball collection device provided in the bullet ball game machine 10. In addition, a prize ball is not paid out for a game ball that has reached the out port 50. Since the out port 50 is provided below the other operation ports and the winning ball port, the player can enter any of the operating ports or the winning port before the game ball reaches the out port 50. Play as you wish. This makes it possible to attract the player's consciousness to the game.

  A segment type display device 70 capable of displaying a predetermined symbol is provided on the right end of the right side of the game board 20. A plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) are provided in the segment type display device 70, and the symbols can be displayed by causing the LEDs to emit light. In addition, the plurality of LEDs can individually emit light. For this reason, as shown in the following FIG. 4, various characters and numbers can be displayed by appropriately combining the LEDs to emit light. Is possible.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a detailed configuration of the segment type display device 70 provided in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4A, the segment type display device 70 of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment has three display units, a left display unit 72, a central display unit 74, and a right display unit 76. Each display unit has seven LEDs arranged in the shape of the numeral “8” (LEDs 72a to 72g in the left display unit 72) and dot-shaped LEDs arranged in the lower right (left display) The unit is composed of LEDs 72p). As described above, these LEDs can be individually turned on or off, and characters or numbers can be expressed by combining LEDs that are turned on or off. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4B, the number “2” is displayed on the left display unit by turning on the hatched LED of the left display unit 72.

Moreover, not only numbers but also characters can be displayed. For example, in the example of FIG. 4B, the letter “H” of the alphabet is displayed on the central display portion 74, and the letter “L” is displayed on the right display portion 76. By combining LEDs that are turned on or off in this way, it is possible to display letters and numbers. Of course, displayable characters and numbers are not limited to the example of FIG. 4B, and various characters and numbers, and symbols such as “−” can be displayed. In the example of FIG. 4B, numbers are displayed on the left display unit 72, and characters are displayed on the central display unit 74 and the right display unit 76. In contrast to this example, the central display unit It is also possible to display numbers on 74 and the right display section 76, and it is also possible to display alphabets on the left display section 72.

  In addition, it is also possible to light each LED of the segment type display device 70 in a combination that does not form letters or numbers. For example, if the LED 72a and the LED 72e are turned on, it is possible to perform display in a mode that cannot be called numbers or letters. If such a display that cannot be called letters or numbers is performed, it is difficult for the player to immediately understand the meaning of the display. For this reason, the player has the expectation that a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as “big hit gaming state” and “probability change state” described later, has occurred, or an advantageous gaming state has occurred. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by improving the player's feeling of uplift when notifying the player of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state by avoiding being easily detected by the player. is there.

  Each LED of the segment type display device 70 is connected to a main control device 100 which will be described later. The main control device 100 turns on or off each LED of the segment type display device 70, thereby various characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. can be displayed. In addition, by switching the LEDs to be lit one after another, it is also possible to display the characters and numbers on the segment type display device 70 while fluctuating one after another (variable display of symbols). In the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such a variation display of the symbol is started when the ball enters the operation port 25 as an opportunity. This point will be described in detail later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a segment type display device 80 for through is provided below the segment type display device 70. Similarly to the segment display device 70, the through-segment display device 80 includes a plurality of LEDs, and each LED can be individually turned on or off. Moreover, it is also possible to perform a variable display of the symbols by switching the LEDs to be lit one after another. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such a variation display of the symbols on the through segment type display device 80 is performed in response to the ball entering the through operation port 24. This point will also be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an effect display device 30 including a liquid crystal display device is provided in the center of the game area 28, and various effect images are displayed on the effect display device 30 according to the progress of the game. By displaying, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game of the ball game machine 10. The effect display device 30 is controlled by a display control device 300 provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10, and the ball game machine 10 transmits a predetermined command to the display control device 300 according to the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to display various effect images according to the progress of the game.

  Above the effect display device 30, an effect accessory 35 is provided. The stage actor 35 is provided with a light source therein and can emit light, and can be rotated by a driving device provided on the back side of the game board 20. And, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by emitting light while rotating in conjunction with the effect image displayed on the effect display device 30, or by emitting light suddenly or rotating independently of the effect image. It is possible. Although detailed illustration is omitted, various lamps are provided on the game board 20 and the front panel 15 in addition to the director role 35, and each lamp is turned on as the game progresses, thereby playing the game. It can be raised. The effect display device 30, the effect actor 35, and various lamps are also controlled by a device group provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10.

A-3. Back side configuration:
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the back side of the ball game machine 10 provided with a device for controlling the game performed on the game board 20 described above. As shown in the figure, on the back side of the ball game machine 10, there are a main control device 100 for controlling the game, a sub control device 200 for controlling various effects accompanying the game, and commands from the sub control device 200. Accordingly, a display control device 300 for displaying various images on the liquid crystal display device of the effect display device 30 is provided. The main control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102 including a RAM 140, a ROM 110, and the like, and the MPU 102, the RAM 140, the ROM 110, and the like cooperate to control a game. The sub control device 200 is also provided with an MPU like the main control device 100, and controls the effects accompanying the game while the MPU and the RAM and ROM in the MPU cooperate. The configurations of the main control device 100, the sub control device 200, and the display control device 300 will be described in detail later.

  The main control device 100 and the sub control device 200 are mounted on the back side of the ball game machine 10 in a state of being housed in a transparent plastic case. The plastic case has a structure in which two case members surround the electronic circuit of the main control device 100 from both sides, and the case members are coupled to each other. The plastic case is removed to access the electronic circuit. For this purpose, it is necessary to destroy the joint portion of the case member and the case member itself. In general, gaming machines installed in gaming halls are crafted on gaming machines to operate the gaming machines to pay out prize balls, or misoperate gaming machines to win prize balls illegally, etc. However, if the main control device is covered with the plastic case in this way, when the main control device 100 is crafted, the joint portion of the case member may be broken, It can be found that the work itself has been done by destroying the member itself. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of damage in advance even if an illegal act is received.

  On the back side of the ball game machine 10, there is a directing agent driving device 350 for driving the directing agent 35, a payout control device 410, which will be described later, the main control device 100, and the sub control device 200. A power supply device 240 for supplying power is also provided. The power supply device 240 is provided with a power switch 242. When the power switch 242 is turned on, power is supplied from the power supply device 240 to each device.

  In addition, a game ball storage tank 400 that receives supply of game balls from an island facility provided in the game hall is provided at the upper part on the back side. An upper game ball passage 402 is connected to the game ball storage tank 400, and a payout device 420 for paying out payout balls is connected to the upper game ball passage 402. The payout device 420 has a built-in payout motor 426 including a stepping motor. When the payout motor 426 is rotated, a cam in the payout device 420 is rotated so that the game balls are directed toward the lower flow path 440 one by one. It is possible to flow down. The game balls that have flowed down to the lower flow path 440 are paid out to the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 through the lower flow path 440. In such a configuration, since the number of game balls to be paid out is determined according to the rotation amount of the cam, the number of game balls to be paid out can be controlled by controlling the rotation amount of the payout motor 426. . Further, by controlling the rotational speed of the payout motor 426, it is possible to control the payout speed of the game balls (the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time).

The payout device 420 is connected to a payout control device 410 having a CPU, RAM, and ROM. The payout control device 410 drives out the payout device 420 in cooperation with the main control device 100, thereby paying out game balls as the game progresses. In addition, the payout control device 410 is connected to sensors provided in the game ball storage tank 400 and the lower flow path 440, and detects abnormal states such as ball breakage and ball clogging based on signals from the sensors. Is possible. The configuration of the lower flow path 440 and the sensor, and the contents of processing performed by the CPU of the payout control device 410 will be described in detail later.

  Further, an external output terminal 910 to which a cable can be connected is provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. In general, a gaming hall is equipped with a computer (hall computer) for collecting information on each gaming machine installed in the hall. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, a cable from such a hall computer is connected to the outside. By connecting to the output terminal 910, it is possible to transmit various types of information related to games played in the ball game machine 10 to the hall computer. For example, a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired from the launch unit, a signal indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the out port 50, a signal indicating that a prize ball has been paid out, or a prize ball that has been paid out It is possible to transmit information indicating the number of By collecting this information, the hall computer can grasp the number of game balls thrown into the bullet ball gaming machine 10 of this embodiment by the player and the number of game balls acquired by the player. Yes, by extension, it becomes possible to grasp the profit status of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  The external output terminal 910 outputs a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the through operation port 24 or the operation port 25 described above, or the segment type display device 70 described above (see FIG. 4). It is also possible to output a signal indicating that the variation display of the symbol has started, a signal indicating that the variation display is being performed, or a signal indicating that the variation display has ended.

  The ball game machine 10 is attached to a frame plate attached to the island of the game hall via a hinge. By rotating the ball game machine 10 in the front direction around the hinge, such a back surface is provided. It is possible to access each device on the side.

B. Overview of the game:
In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the progress of the game is controlled using each of the above-described configurations. Before explaining the details of such control, an outline of the game performed in the ball game machine 10 will be described. Keep it.

  First, when a player inserts a game ball into the upper plate 13 and operates the launch handle 11, the game balls supplied from the upper plate 13 to the launch unit are launched into the game area 28 of the game board 20 one by one. . The launch unit is configured such that the speed at which the game ball is fired changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 11, so that the player can adjust the rotation angle of the launch handle 11 to release the game ball. It is possible to aim at the position to be done.

  The game ball launched into the game area 28 flows down on the board surface of the game board 20 while the traveling direction is changed by the nail 22 or the windmill 23 or the like. At this time, the game ball flows down over time while being blocked by the nail 22 or the windmill 23, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball by following the movement of the game ball, It is possible to enjoy the entertainment of the game by watching the game ball while expecting the game ball to enter the operation opening 25, the small prize opening 26, or the like.

  When the game ball flowing down on the board surface of the game board 20 enters the through operation port 24, the variable display of symbols is started on the above-described through-segment display device 80 (see FIG. 2). Such variable display of symbols is continued until a predetermined time (variable display time) has elapsed since the start of variable display, and when the variable display time has elapsed, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state. When a predetermined winning symbol is displayed during the stop display of the symbol, the winning symbol is won.

  In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the through symbol is hit, the electric accessory 41 of the operating port unit 40 described above is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (FIG. 3). (See (b)). As described above, since the game ball can easily enter the second operation port 25b in the opened state of the electric accessory 41, the player enters the game ball into the second operation port 25b for this predetermined time. It is an advantageous state that is easy to make. If the player is given an advantageous state due to the ball entering the through operation port 24 in this way, the player sets the launch position of the game ball with the aim of entering the game ball into the through operation port 24. Since the movement of the game ball is followed while expecting that the adjusted or launched game ball enters the through operation port 24, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In this embodiment, when a winning of the through symbol occurs, the ball entering the second operating port 25b is supported by the electric accessory 41 in this way, so that the winning of the through symbol is called “support winning”. Shall.

  As described above, in the through-segment display device 80, the symbol variation display continues for a predetermined time. For this reason, another game ball may enter the through operation port 24 while the symbol variation display is being performed. In this case, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball is stored as a hold (holding of the through operation port), and after the symbol change display is finished, the change of the hold is stored. Display. Further, the number of holds that can be stored is not limited to one, and a plurality of holds can be stored. In addition, in the ball ball game machine 10 of a present Example, it demonstrates as what can accumulate | store four reservations at maximum.

  In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to check the number of holding of the through operation port by a display lamp 82 (see FIG. 2) provided on the game board 20. As shown in FIG. 2, four display lamps 82 are provided below the effect display device 30, and the number of the lit display lamps 82 among the four display lamps 82 is the through operation port. Corresponds to the number of holds. For example, when there is no hold, none of the display lamps 82 is lit. When one hold is stored, one of the display lamps 82 is lit, and when two holds are stored, two display lamps 82 are lit. Similarly, three display lamps 82 are lit in a state where three holds are stored, and four display lamps 82 are lit in a state where four holds are stored. Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display lamp 82 is lit in order from the leftmost display lamp 82 as the number of holds increases, and the display lamp 82 is used as the hold is consumed. Goes off from the right. This makes it possible for the player to intuitively understand how the on-hold is increased or decreased, and the player can enjoy the game more easily by reducing the labor for grasping the game situation.

  When a game ball flowing down the game board 20 enters the operation port 25 (the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b), the change display of the symbol is displayed on the segment type display device 70 (see FIG. 4). Be started. Similar to the above-described symbol variation display on the through-segment display device 80, the symbol variation display on the segment type display device 70 is continued for a predetermined time, and then the symbol is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, when the symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined winning symbol, it becomes a “hit” and the ball game machine 10 shifts to the “hit game state”. In the “hit game state”, the large entrance 60 provided in the game board 20 is opened, and the player easily enters the launched entrance into the large entrance 60 and obtains a large number of prize balls. It becomes possible to do. Thus, since the jackpot gaming state is a very advantageous state for the player, the player usually plays the game aiming at the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.

Whether or not the symbol of the segment type display device 70 stops at the winning symbol (whether or not the big hit gaming state occurs) is determined by the big hit lottery performed in the main control device 100 of the ball game machine 10. . The jackpot lottery will be described in detail later. Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, a series of games from a symbol change display to a stop display is performed, and thus this series of games can be regarded as one unit of the game. For this reason, in this embodiment, a series of games from entering the operation port to displaying a symbol stop will be referred to as “one game round”.

  When the big hit gaming state is started and the large entrance 60 is opened, the large entrance 60 is used until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60. Will remain open. When the predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60, the large entrance 60 returns to the closed state. The game from the opening to closing of the big entrance 60 is called “round game” or simply “round”. In the jackpot gaming state, such a round is repeated a predetermined number of times, and then the jackpot gaming state is ended.

  The large entrance 60 is provided with a sensor 60s, which can detect the entrance of game balls one by one. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls can be obtained by counting the number of detected game balls. It is possible to detect that has entered the large entrance 60. Here, depending on the position of the sensor 60s and the detection timing, even if the large entrance 60 is closed at a timing when a predetermined number of balls are detected, more game balls have already entered at that timing. There may be. In such a case, the player can win more prize balls than usual. Therefore, if the detection timing of the sensor 60s and the position of the sensor 60s are adjusted so that occasional occurrence of more game balls than the predetermined number occurs in this way (for example, the position of the sensor 60s is determined as the game board). The player is placed a few game balls away from the surface of the game 20), and the player wishes to enter as many game balls as possible, and enters the ball until the big entrance 60 closes. Attention will be paid to the trend of the mouth 60. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's interest more strongly by a round game. In addition, when the large entrance 60 is closed after the sensor 60s detects that a predetermined number of game balls have entered, the large entrance 60 opens before the predetermined number of game balls enter. Since it is not closed, it is preferable that the player does not have a complaint that the large entrance 60 has been closed even though only a few game balls have entered.

  On the other hand, when closing the large entrance 60 after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player tries to enter more game balls into the large entrance 60 before the large entrance 60 closes. The shooting handle 11 is operated to aim at the game ball toward the large entrance 60. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched at a target location. Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the large entrance 60 is provided inside the game board 20 rather than the windmill 23 (see FIG. 2), so that the path of the game ball is the windmill 23. When it is directed inward, it becomes easy to enter the large entrance 60. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting the course of the game ball to be directed inward by the windmill 23, and as a result, attracts the player's attention to the windmill 23 and improves the interest of the windmill 23. Can do.

  Also, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of “big hit gaming states” with different numbers of rounds and the like can be generated. Transition to gaming state. Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the following description, these various types of jackpot gaming states will be described.

  The “2R jackpot gaming state (or simply 2R jackpot)” is a jackpot gaming state in which the above-described round is repeated twice. In this jackpot gaming state, when the round is repeated twice, the jackpot gaming state is terminated, so that the jackpot gaming state can be quickly terminated. In the ball and ball game machine 10, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the game state one after another, but in this way, the game state changes quickly, and thus the interest of the game is effectively enhanced. It is possible. In addition, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game progresses at a good tempo, and to improve the exhilaration of the game.

  In the bullet ball gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible to change the occurrence probability of the jackpot after the jackpot gaming state has occurred. In this embodiment, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is changed to a high probability (a state in which a jackpot is likely to be won) is referred to as a “probability variation state” or a “probability variation state”, and a state that has not been changed to a high probability is referred to as “non- It shall be called “probability variation state” or “non-probability variation state”. Also, jackpots with a transition to a probabilistic state are called “probable jackpots”, and other jackpots are called “normal jackpots”.

  Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot gaming state (or simply explicit probability variation 2R jackpot)” and “implicit probability variation 2R jackpot gaming state (or simply explicit probability variation 2R jackpot)”. Two types of 2R jackpot gaming states can be executed. Each of these jackpot game states is a jackpot with a transition to the probability change state while the round is repeated twice, but whether or not the player can easily recognize the transition to the probability change state is different. As will be described in detail later, for example, when an “explicit probability change 2R jackpot gaming state” occurs, the electric accessory 41 (see FIG. 3) has been opened and closed at a low frequency until then. By starting to open and close frequently, the player can recognize that the probability change state has occurred. On the other hand, in the “implicit probability change 2R jackpot game state”, such a change does not occur in the operation of the electric player 41, and therefore it is difficult for the player to easily recognize that the probability change state has occurred. It has become. For this reason, in the “implicit probability change 2R jackpot game state”, it is possible to generate a probability change state without noticing the player, and as a result, the player is surprised that the probability change state has occurred. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation that the probability change state may have occurred.

  The “15R jackpot gaming state (or simply 15R jackpot)” is a jackpot gaming state in which the round described above is repeated 15 times. In this state, the player can play many round games, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained. For this reason, the player has a tendency to desire a 15R jackpot gaming state to be generated. Therefore, by allowing the ball game machine 10 to generate the 15R jackpot gaming state, the player has an expectation for the 15R jackpot gaming state. It is possible to attract the player's interest to the ball game machine 10.

  In addition, the 15R jackpot gaming state may have a plurality of modes of 15R jackpot gaming state as in the 2R jackpot gaming state. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as such 15R jackpots, there are two types of jackpots: “normal 15R jackpot gaming state (or simply normal 15R jackpot)” and “probability variation 15R jackpot gaming state (or simply probability variation 15R jackpot)”. The gaming state is executable. Among these, in the “probability change 15R jackpot”, the jackpot occurrence probability is changed to a high probability at a predetermined timing after the jackpot gaming state occurs (for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends). In this way, when the “probability change 15R jackpot” occurs, it becomes easy to win a jackpot after the jackpot game, which is very advantageous for the player. Also, since the probability of jackpot occurrence is high, it is possible to win a jackpot by lottery lottery with a smaller number of times than usual. Therefore, by allowing the probability variation 15R jackpot to be generated, the player is expected to be able to acquire a large number of game balls in a short time by generating a plurality of jackpot gaming states in a short period of time, It is possible to attract the player strongly to the game. In addition, when the probability change 15R jackpot actually occurs, the player's feeling of achievement is greatly enhanced, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the “normal 15R jackpot gaming state”, the transition to the probability change state is not performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, when the 15R big hit gaming state is in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is shifted to the non-probability variation state. In this way, even if the probability variation state advantageous to the player is ended by changing from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state, it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disappointed by the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. it can. Thereby, it becomes possible to shift from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state without greatly impairing the player's interest. Details of the processing for switching between the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state and the details of the processing for executing the various jackpot game states described above will be described in detail later.

  As described above, when these jackpot gaming states occur, the large entrance 60 is opened and a game ball can enter, and the manner of opening and closing the large entrance 60 at this time is described above. It may be different depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in the case of an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the large entrance 60 may be opened for a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). In this way, even if the big entrance 60 is opened and closed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the big entrance 60 has been opened and closed. The risk of recognition can be reduced. Therefore, as described above, if the probability change state is changed after the occurrence of the implicit probability change 2R jackpot, the player can be surely given a surprise that the probability change state has been reached. Alternatively, a plurality of opening / closing modes can be executed for one jackpot type. For example, in the case of a big 15R jackpot, it is determined by lottery whether to execute a round with a short opening time 15 times or a mode in which a round with a longer opening time is repeated 15 times. Also good. In such a case, the player waits for the start of the jackpot gaming state while paying attention to the manner in which the big entrance 60 starts to open and close, so that the player can feel secure about the game by winning the jackpot. Can be avoided.

  Also, in the case of the explicit probability change 2R jackpot, the large entrance 60 may be opened for a short time as in the case of the unspecified probability change 2R jackpot. Then, in the case of the explicit probability change 2R big hit, after the large entrance 60 performs an opening / closing operation, the electric accessory 41 may transition to a gaming state in which the opening / closing operation is frequently performed. In this way, the occurrence of the probability variation state is not noticed by opening / closing the large entrance 60, but the player can be noticed by the operation of the electric accessory 41. As described above, since the electric accessory 41 may be opened and closed due to the entry into the through operation port 24, the player can remove the electric combination 41 due to the entry into the through operation port 24. It is difficult to immediately identify whether the electric accessory 41 has been opened or closed due to the occurrence of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that an explicit probability change 2R jackpot has occurred, and to attract the player's interest to the electric player 41. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Become.

  On the other hand, in the case of a normal 15R jackpot or a probability variation 15R jackpot, the large entrance 60 may be opened over a longer time than the 2R jackpot (for example, about several seconds to 30 seconds). In this way, the player can fully recognize that the big entrance 60 has been opened, and visually recognize that the game ball enters the big entrance 60, so that the uplifting feeling caused by the occurrence of the big hit Can be enjoyed more. In addition, since the state where the game ball enters the large entrance 60 can be visually confirmed, it is possible to further enjoy the game in which the shooting handle 11 is operated so that the game ball enters the large entrance 60. It becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the operation state (game state) in which the large entrance 60 repeatedly opens and closes is referred to as “open / close mode”. Further, the above-described mode in which the large entrance 60 is opened only for a short time is called “low-frequency entry mode” because the game ball is difficult to enter, and the large entrance 60 is longer than the low-frequency entry mode. The above-described mode that opens over time is referred to as “high-frequency entry mode” because game balls are easier to enter than in the low-frequency entry mode.

The operation state (game state) in which the electric accessory 41 repeatedly opens and closes is a state that prompts the player to enter the second operating port 25b, and is therefore referred to as “support mode”. Further, similarly to the large entrance 60, the electric accessory 41 is less likely to enter the game ball if the time during which the electric accessory 41 is open is shortened. Conversely, the time during which the electric accessory 41 is open. If the length is made longer, it becomes easier for game balls to enter. Therefore, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by changing the opening time of the electric accessory 41. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of support modes with different opening times of the electric accessory 41 can be executed, and the electric accessory 41 is in an open state among the two types of support modes. The support mode in which the time for maintaining the power (opening time) is shorter than the other support mode is called “low support mode”, and the support mode in which the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is longer than the other support mode is “high support mode” Shall be called. Details of the processing for realizing such a support mode will be described in detail later.

  In such a support mode, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second operating port 25b by changing the number of times the electric accessory 41 is released per unit time. For this reason, when a plurality of types of support modes are provided, the number of times of opening / closing the electric accessory 41 per unit time may be varied between the support modes. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of times of opening / closing the electric accessory 41 per unit time is higher in the high support mode than in the low support mode. It is easier to enter the operation port 25b than in the low support mode. This point will also be described in detail later.

  Further, when the support mode is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the type of support mode to be started may be made different according to the type of jackpot. Alternatively, depending on the type of jackpot, the support mode may not be started. In some cases, a jackpot is won during the execution of the support mode. In such a case, the type of the support mode may be changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. By so doing, it is possible to cause a change in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 due to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. In the case of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of “normal 15R jackpot”, “probability 15R jackpot”, or “explicit probability 2R jackpot”, the high support mode is started (during the low support mode) If these jackpots are won, the support mode is switched to the high support mode), and if “implicit probability variable 2R jackpot”, the high support mode is not started (implicit probability variable 2R during the low support mode). In the case of winning the jackpot, the low support mode is continued without switching the support mode to the high support mode). Details of the processing for controlling the support mode will be described later in detail.

  As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, the segment type display device 70 performs the change display and stop display of the symbol, and the symbol is a predetermined hit symbol. If it is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the jackpot gaming state. At the time of the variable display and stop display of the symbols, various images and symbols are displayed not only on the segment type display device 70 but also on the liquid crystal display device of the effect display device 30.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating a state in which the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 30. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the character design 32 with numbers is displayed on the effect display device 30. The character symbol 32 is divided into three stages in the vertical direction of the effect display device 30 (refer to the respective stages indicated as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in the figure) and are arranged in a row in each stage. A sub-symbol 34 is drawn between the character symbol 32 and the character symbol 32 at each stage. When the variable display of symbols is performed on the segment type display device 70, the character symbols 32 and the sub symbols 34 at each stage move in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 30 while maintaining the state of being arranged in a horizontal row. The state is displayed.

As described above, in the segment type display device 70, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed after the symbol variation display is started, the symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, also in the effect display device 30, the character symbol 32 and the sub symbol 34 that have moved in the horizontal direction are stopped, and the character symbol 32 and the sub symbol 34 are stopped and displayed. Here, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the character symbol 32 and the sub-symbol 34 can be made to correspond to the stop display mode of the symbol on the segment type display device 70. Yes. For example, when a symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the segment type display device 70, the character display 32 with the same number is arranged in a line in the effect display device 30 in correspondence with this. Is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which the character symbols 32 with the same numerals are stopped and displayed in a line in the vertical direction. As shown in the figure, the character symbol 32 with the numeral “3” is displayed side by side on the line indicated as “L1” in the figure. If the character symbols 32 with the same numbers are displayed side by side in this way, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a jackpot has occurred.

  Further, when the character symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the upper, middle, and lower stages may be stopped simultaneously, but the respective stages may be stopped at different timings. For example, the upper and lower stages are stopped and displayed first, and the middle stage is finally stopped and displayed. At this time, if the same character design 32 is stopped in the upper row and the lower row in a row, the player can expect that the same character design 32 stops in the middle row and a jackpot state is generated. It is possible to increase the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, the display mode in which the symbols of the two stages are aligned and stopped and displayed in this way is called reach display, and the effect using the reach display is called reach effect.

  Further, in FIG. 6B, an example in which the same character design 32 is arranged on the line indicated as “L1” is illustrated, but the manner in which the character design 32 is arranged in a line is not limited to this mode, and various modes are available. Is possible. That is, in the effect display device 30 of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same character design is placed on any one of the five lines “L1” to “L5” shown in FIG. 32 can be stopped and displayed side by side. In this way, the player expects that the same symbol will be lined up on any one of the many lines if it corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state in any of the multiple lines. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by further improving the player's expectation.

  Further, when the character symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the character symbol 32 may be stopped and displayed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in a jackpot (probability jackpot) that shifts to a probability change state such as a probability change 15R jackpot, the character symbols 32 to which odd numbers such as “1” and “3” are attached are stopped and displayed in a line, and a normal 15R jackpot etc. In the jackpot that shifts to the non-probable change state, the character symbols 32 with even numbers such as “2” and “4” may be displayed in a line and stopped. In this way, the player can be made to recognize by the effect display device 30 that the jackpot is to shift to the probability change state or the jackpot to be changed to the non-probability change state.

  On the contrary, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the character symbols 32 may not be aligned in a line. This avoids the possibility that the player will know that the jackpot has been generated by the effect display device 30, and the surprise that the jackpot gaming state has occurred or the surprise that the player has shifted to the probable state at any one time. Can be given more reliably.

The effect display device 30 is provided near the center of the game board 20 and is large in size, so that it is easily caught by the player. For this reason, it is normal for a player to play a game while looking at the effect display device 30. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce an effect by using the effect display device 30. In addition, since the effect display device 30 has a large area and can display a fine image by increasing the number of pixels of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to display a high-quality image. If such a high-quality image is displayed, the effect of the production can be further enhanced.

  Further, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, not only the effect display on the effect display device 30 and the variable display of the symbols on the segment type display device 70, but also a prize ball may be paid out. In this way, when a game ball enters the operation port 25, not only does the change display of the symbol start and the possibility of shifting to the big hit state occurs, but also a prize ball can be obtained, so the player enters the operation port 25. The game is played with a strong desire to play a ball. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not a game ball enters the operation port 25, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player can play the game for as long as the awarded ball, the player can be attracted to the game for a longer time. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, “3” prize balls are paid out for entering the first operating port 25a, and “4” for entering the second operating port 25b. "The prize ball" shall be paid out. The details of the process for paying out such prize balls will also be described in detail later.

  When a game ball enters the operating port 25 while the effect display device 30 or the segment type display device 70 displays the variation of the symbol, the game ball enters as in the case of the through operation port 24. Is stored as hold (holding of the operating port), and after the variable display of the symbol is finished, the variable display for the hold is performed. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of the first working port 25a can be confirmed by the display lamp 83a (see FIG. 2) provided on the game board 20, and similarly, the display lamp 83b It is possible to confirm the number of holdings of the two operation ports 25b. As shown in FIG. 2, four display lamps 83a and four display lamps 83b are provided, and the number of the display lamps that are lit corresponds to the number of holdings of the respective operation ports. is doing. That is, when there is no hold, all the display lamps are turned off, and when there is one hold, one of the display lamps is turned on. Similarly, when there are two holds, two display lamps are lit, three display lamps are present when three holds are present, and four display lamps are present when four holds are present, Each is lit.

  Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display lamps are turned on in order from the leftmost display lamp as the number of holdings increases, and the display lamps are sequentially displayed from the right side as the holdings are digested. Turns off. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand how the hold increases or decreases. Since the number of lottery wins increases as the number of holds increases, players tend to desire a state with a large number of holds. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable to the player with the increase and decrease of the game.

  In addition, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is also possible to display such a reserved number on the effect display device 30. That is, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), by displaying the design symbol in a part of the effect display device 30 (the first working port holding display area and the second working port holding display area), The number of holds can be displayed using the effect display device 30. Here, the “first operation port hold display area” in the figure is an area for displaying the number of hold of the first operation port 25a, and as shown, the first area a1 and the second area a2. , A third area a3, and a fourth area a4. Then, by displaying the same number of design symbols as the number of reserved first operating ports 25a in order from the left of the display area, the number of reserved first operating ports 25a can be displayed.

For example, if the number of reserves of the first operating port 25a is “2”, the design symbol is displayed in two areas (first area a1 and second area a2) from the left of the first operating port holding display area correspondingly. Is displayed, it is possible to display that the number of reservations of the first operating port 25a is “2”. Similarly, the second working port hold display area is composed of four display areas of the first area b1, the second area b2, the third area b3, and the fourth area b4. By displaying the corresponding number of design symbols in the display area, it is possible to display the number of reserves in the second working port 25b. Note that such processing for displaying the number of holds on the effect display device 30 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is also provided with a small prize opening 26. When a game ball enters the small winning opening 26, the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 13 as a prize ball. In this way, if the winning ball is paid out along with entering the small winning opening 26, even if the big winning lottery is not performed at the time of entering the small winning opening 26, the player can play the gaming ball into the small winning opening 26. There is a tendency to play games while expecting to enter. Therefore, by providing the small winning opening 26, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the game and increase the interest of the game without increasing the number of jackpot lotteries.

  In addition, if the small winning opening 26 is provided below the game board 20 with respect to the operation opening 25, there is a possibility that even if a game ball does not enter the operation opening 25, the small winning opening 26 may enter the small winning opening 26. Therefore, it can be avoided that the player's interest is distracted by the fact that the game ball has not entered the operation port 25. This makes it possible to attract the player more strongly to the game.

  On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter any of the entrances such as the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, the game ball is collected at the out port 50 provided at the lower part of the game board 20. It is discharged out of the game board 20. In this case, the player cannot obtain a prize ball. As described above, in the ball game machine 10, a game is performed in which a player launches a game ball and enters the operation port 25 or the small winning port 26 on the game board 20, and as the game progresses, the prize ball The game proceeds while paying out or performing various effects. Below, the detailed structure of the control apparatus which controls this game is demonstrated.

C. Control unit configuration:
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control device of the ball game machine 10. As shown in the figure, the control device for the gaming machine includes a main control device 100, a sub control device 200, a display control device 300, and the like. The main control device 100 mainly plays a role of controlling the progress of the game, such as performing the above-mentioned jackpot lottery or shifting to the jackpot gaming state according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Further, by transmitting commands for instructing various operations to the sub-control device 200 and the payout control device 410, these devices are caused to execute various operations. In FIG. 7, the direction in which data and signals are input and output is indicated by black arrows.

C-1. Main control unit configuration:
The main control device 100 includes a one-chip type MPU 102 on which an arithmetic device 104, a ROM 110, a RAM 140, and the like are mounted. Inside the chip of the MPU 102, the arithmetic unit 104, the ROM 110, and the RAM 140 are mutually connected by a bus, and data can be transmitted and received between them. The MPU 102 can read out a program from the ROM 110 using such a bus connection and execute various instructions described in the read program in the arithmetic unit 104. In addition, arithmetic operations such as addition and subtraction can be performed using the arithmetic unit 104. The MPU 102 also stores a program register that temporarily stores the read program, a program counter that stores an address of an instruction being executed in the arithmetic device 104 (an address in the program), and an arithmetic operation performed by the arithmetic device 104. A working register or the like for storing various data to be used is also provided, and a program can be appropriately executed using these configurations.

  Further, the MPU 102 has a timer interrupt function for generating an interrupt at a constant time interval for a program being executed. When an interrupt is generated by the timer interrupt function, the MPU 102 interrupts program execution and stores the value of the program counter in the stack memory in the MPU 102. Also, the value of each register such as a working register is also stored in the memory in the MPU 102. Then, the start address of the program to be executed by interruption is acquired from the program register of the MPU 102 and the program is executed. When the interrupted and executed program ends, the value of the program register stored in the stack memory in the MPU 102 is read, and the value of each register stored in the memory in the MPU 102 is returned to each register. . Then, by starting execution of the original program from the address stored in the program register, it is possible to resume the original program from the next. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the timer interruption function is used to execute processing for detecting entry into the through operation port 24, processing for detecting entry into the operation port 25, and the like. This point will be described in detail later.

  The ROM 110 is provided with a plurality of storage areas capable of storing various types of data. Among these, the program area 111 stores a program executed by the MPU 102. Various data necessary for program execution, such as the program start address, are also stored in the program area 111. The MPU 102 reads the programs and data from the program area 111 of the ROM 110 and executes the programs to control the ball game machine 10.

  In the lottery table area 112 of the ROM 110, a “big hit lottery table” that is referred to when the main control device 100 performs a big hit lottery is stored. In the jackpot lottery table of the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, each numerical value from “0” to “599” is associated with the success / failure result of the jackpot lottery for each numerical value, and “0” to “599”. It is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot lottery is appropriate for the acquired numerical value by acquiring any numerical value up to “” and referring to the jackpot lottery table. A detailed configuration of such a jackpot lottery table and a method of acquiring numerical values used for the lottery will be described in detail later.

  The distribution table area 113 stores a “distribution table” that is referred to when a big hit occurs. As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to generate a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, such as an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and a normal 15R jackpot. For this reason, when a big hit occurs, it is determined which of the big hit gaming states to execute by referring to the distribution table. Details of the distribution table and processing for determining the jackpot gaming state to be executed with reference to the distribution table will be described later in detail.

  The stop mode table area 114 stores a “stop mode table” that is referred to when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the segment type display device 70. In the stop mode table, whether or not each LED of the segment type display device 70 is lit is determined for each LED. By turning on or off each LED according to the stop mode table, the segment type display device 70 It is possible to display a predetermined stop symbol. The detailed configuration of the stop mode table and details of the process of displaying the stop symbol with reference to the stop mode table will be described later.

The variable display time table area 115 stores a “variable display time table” in which a time (variable display time) for displaying symbols in the segment type display device 70 is set. In this variation display time table, a plurality of variation display times having different lengths are set with numbers for identifying the variation times. When performing variable display of symbols, after determining the number of the variable display time, the variable display time of the symbol is determined by referring to the variable display time table and reading the variable display time corresponding to the number. . Details of the process of performing the symbol display will be described later.

  The command information storage area 116 stores various commands that the main control device 100 transmits to the sub control device 200, the payout control device 410, and the like. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, these commands are binary data having a predetermined data length (number of bytes), and can therefore be stored on the ROM 110. If the command is stored in the ROM 110 in this way, when the main control device 100 transmits the command to the sub control device 200, the payout control device 410, etc., the stored command is read and the sub control device is read out. 200 and the payout control device 410 may be transmitted. In this way, it is not necessary to generate a new command every time a command is transmitted, so that the command can be transmitted quickly. Details of various commands and details of processing in which the main control device 100 transmits commands will be described in detail later.

  The above-described classification of each storage area of the ROM 110 is classified by focusing on the contents to be stored, and it is not always necessary that these storage areas are actually divided on the ROM 110. Of course, it is also possible to actually configure the ROM 110 separately. For example, in the address space of the ROM 110, the addresses may be divided for each storage area, or each storage area may be assigned to a different bank using a so-called bank structure. If each storage area is actually divided and configured on the ROM 110 in this way, the data in each storage area is stored in the ROM 110 in a state of being collected, so that data can be read from each storage area more quickly. It becomes.

  The RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is a random access memory capable of temporarily storing various data used for the progress of the game. Similarly to the ROM 110, the RAM 140 is connected to the arithmetic device 104 by a bus, and the MPU 102 can store the data of the arithmetic device 104 in the RAM 140 or read the data of the RAM 140 and transfer it to the arithmetic device 104. It is also possible to store the data in the ROM 110 in the RAM 140 by reading the data from the ROM 110 and writing the data in the RAM 140. Further, since the RAM 140 and the ROM 110 are connected by a bus, when the data of the ROM 110 is stored in the RAM 140, the data of the ROM 110 can be directly written in the RAM 140 without using the arithmetic unit 104. By doing so, it is possible to write the data of the ROM 110 to the RAM 140 more quickly, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the arithmetic unit 104 when writing the data of the ROM 110 to the RAM 140.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the main control device 100 is also provided with a backup device. The backup device monitors the voltage supplied from the power supply device 240 to the main control device 100. When the voltage falls below a predetermined voltage, the backup device determines that a power failure has occurred and sends a power failure notification signal to the main control device 100. Send. When the main control device 100 receives the power failure notification signal, the main control device 100 performs a power failure process such as closing the large entrance 60 and stops the operation of the MPU 102. At this time, a backup voltage is supplied to the RAM 140 from a backup capacitor. By doing so, the data stored in the RAM 140 can be held as it is even during a power failure. The backup capacitor has a large capacitance, and the RAM 140 does not require so much power as long as it only maintains the storage state. Thus, by supplying the voltage from the backup capacitor, the RAM 140 It is possible to keep the memory state for a long time. As a result, when recovering from a power failure, the operation can be resumed with the storage state of the RAM 140 restored to the original state.

  The RAM 140 focuses on the contents of the data to be stored and the functions realized by the stored data, as shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of storage areas (counter area 141, hold storage area 142, flag area 143, It can be understood that the electric accessory holding area 144, the command buffer 145, and the general-purpose area 146) are provided. The details of the processing using these storage areas will be described later, but each storage area will be briefly described for easy understanding.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the configuration of the counter area 141. As shown in the figure, the counter area 141 includes a “big hit random number counter 141a”, a “random number initial value counter 141b”, a “big hit type counter 141c”, a “variable type counter 141d”, a “reach random number counter 141e”, and an “electrical accessory release counter”. 141f "and" round remaining number counter 141g "are provided. Each counter is independent, and the value of each counter can be changed individually. Further, as shown in the figure, a buffer is provided for each counter in the counter area 141, and the numerical values of the respective counters are stored in the buffers as indicated by black arrows in the figure. Is possible. In this way, it is possible to read data from the buffer instead of reading data from the counter when referring to the value of each counter. By doing this, it is possible to read the counter value while the counter value is being updated. Even at the timing when data cannot be read out, the numerical value of the counter can be acquired. In this embodiment, the counters are collectively referred to as a “counter group”, and the buffers corresponding to the counters are collectively referred to as a “buffer group”.

  The “big hit random number counter 141a” is a counter that holds numerical values used in the big hit lottery. Although the details of the jackpot lottery will be described later, whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a with the jackpot lottery table. Further, the numerical value of the big hit random number counter 141a is repeatedly added (counted up) at predetermined time intervals by “1” by a control process executed by the main control device 100. Such processing performed by the main controller 100 will also be described in detail later.

  The jackpot random number counter 141a is configured such that the numerical value returns to “0” when the numerical value of the counter reaches the maximum value. For this reason, a so-called loop counter is configured that repeatedly indicates a value between “0” and the maximum value (“599” in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment). When such a loop counter is used, any value from the minimum value of the counter (“0” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment) to the maximum value (“599” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment) Can be obtained, and a different value can be obtained depending on the timing of reading the value of the counter, so the value is obtained from the counter at random timing (for example, when the game ball enters the operation port 25). Then, it is possible to acquire a random numerical value (so-called random number).

Further, if the time interval for adding “1” to the counter value is made equal (for example, every 4 msec), the minimum value of the counter (“0” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of this embodiment) is increased from the maximum. For any numerical value up to the value (“599” in the jackpot random number counter 141a of the present embodiment), the probability that the counter indicates that numerical value is equal, so for any numerical value from the minimum value to the maximum value, The probability that the number is acquired is equal (equal among all numbers). This makes it possible to obtain a uniform random number from the counter. The jackpot random number counter 141a of the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment is
A counter capable of obtaining such a uniform random number is constructed.

  Further, when a random number is acquired using such a loop counter, the counter value is periodically repeated if the counter value is simply looped. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number counter 141a and the “random number initial value counter 141b” are used in combination, thereby reducing the periodicity of the jackpot random number counter 141a and making it more uniform. A random number can be acquired.

  The “random number initial value counter 141b” is a loop counter that takes a numerical value range (in this embodiment, from a minimum value “0” to a maximum value “599”) that is equal to the numerical value range of the jackpot random number counter 141a. Similarly to the big hit random number counter 141a, the random number initial value counter 141b is updated by a control process performed by the main control device 100. Here, in the jackpot random number counter 141a, the numerical value of the counter is incremented by “1” for every fixed time period (for example, every 4 msec). The time period is not completely uniform. For this reason, the random number initial value counter 141b has lower numerical periodicity than the big hit random number counter 141a. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is updated as follows using such a random number initial value counter 141b.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing how the value of the big hit random number counter 141a is updated while referring to the value of the random number initial value counter 141b. In the drawing, the numerical values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the big hit random number counter 141a are shown. Numerical values up to “599” can be taken.

  When updating the jackpot random number counter 141a, first, the random number initial value counter 141b is referred to, and the first numerical value (random number initial value) to start counting up is determined. For example, when the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b is “0” (see the numerical value surrounded by the broken line among the values of the “random number initial value counter” in the figure), the count-up of the jackpot random number counter 141a is set to “0”. "(See the numerical value surrounded by a broken line among the numerical values of the" big hit random number counter "in the figure). Then, the numerical value is periodically counted up by “1” from the determined random number initial value (see the black arrow in the figure). When the numerical value of the big hit random number counter 141a reaches the maximum value, as described above, the numerical value of the big hit random number counter 141a is returned to the minimum value (“0” in the example of FIG. 9).

  Here, while the jackpot random number counter 141a is counted up, the numerical value of the random number initial value counter 141b is also updated. The jackpot random number counter and the random number initial value counter are updated in this way, and when the jackpot random number counter 141a returns to the random number initial value that started counting up ("0" in the example of FIG. 9), refer to the random number initial value counter again. To determine the initial random number. For example, as indicated by a chain line in FIG. 9, if the numerical value of the random number initial value counter is “597”, the random number initial value is set to “597”. This time, from this new random number initial value, the number is counted up until the numerical value returns to the random number initial value “597”. When the numerical value is taken), the random number initial value is determined again with reference to the random number initial value counter 141b again.

In this way, when the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a has made a round, if the random number initial value is obtained by referring to the random number initial value counter and the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is counted up again from the random number initial value, the jackpot random number counter In 141a, the count-up starts from a different initial value every time the numerical value makes a round, so the jackpot random number counter 141a
It is possible to avoid the situation where the numerical value of has periodicity. Thereby, in the ball game machine 10 of a present Example, it becomes possible to acquire a more uniform random number from the jackpot random number counter 141a.

  Note that, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. 9, the random number initial value counter 141b and the big hit random number counter 141a are updated by “main loop processing” and “timer interrupt processing” executed in the main control device 100. Is done. These processes will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot lottery table that is referred to when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful. FIG. 10A shows a jackpot lottery table for an uncertain change state, and FIG. 10B shows a jackpot lottery table for a probability change state. As shown in the drawing, in the jackpot lottery table, a lottery result of “big hit”, “normally missed”, or “specially missed” is associated with a numerical value (lottery value) used for lottery. As described above, such a jackpot lottery table is stored in the lottery table area 112 of the ROM 110 of the main control device 100.

  When determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is read to acquire the lottery value, and the lottery result corresponding to the acquired lottery value is read by referring to the jackpot lottery table. It is determined whether it is a big hit, “ordinary loss” or “special loss”. At this time, if the ball game machine 10 is in a probable change state, the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state (see FIG. 10B) is referred to. (See FIG. 10A).

  For example, if the lottery value acquired from the jackpot random number counter 141a in the non-probability changing state is “7”, the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value “7” is acquired with reference to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability changing state. In the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state illustrated in FIG. 10A, the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value “7” is “big jackpot”, so the success / failure determination result in this case is “big jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state of the present embodiment, two lottery values “7” and “307” are associated with the jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. 10B, more lottery values are associated with the jackpot than the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state. For this reason, when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful with reference to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state, the jackpot is determined with a higher probability than when determining whether or not the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable variation state is determined. You will win. In this way, by preparing a plurality of jackpot lottery tables with different numbers of lottery numbers associated with the jackpot and switching the referenced jackpot lottery table, it is possible to easily switch the probability of winning the jackpot. . In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the probability variation state, the lottery numerical value is referred to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state in which the lottery value is associated with the jackpot. By referring to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state where the number of associated lottery numbers is smaller than the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state, the probability change state in which the jackpot is generated with high probability, and the jackpot than the probability change state It is possible to realize an uncertain change state with a low occurrence probability.

When the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state and the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state are provided in this way, the lottery value associated with the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state is determined for the probability variation state. The jackpot lottery table may be associated with the jackpot. For example, in the example of FIG. 10, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state (see FIG. 10A), two lottery values “7” and “307” are associated with “jackpot”. These two lottery numerical values are also associated with “hit” in the jackpot lottery table for probability variation state (see FIG. 10B). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in this way, by sharing a part of the lottery value corresponding to the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state and the jackpot lottery table for the probability change state, The effect of “hold display effect” described later is improved. This point will be described in detail later.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment will be missed. As such a miss, there are two types of misses, “normally missed” and “specially missed”, in the jackpot lottery table. Is set. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of losing in the jackpot lottery table and causing the gaming machine to operate differently depending on the type of losing, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is losing, a change occurs in the game. This makes it possible to enhance the fun of gaming. For example, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is “special out”, the open / close mode (the mode in which the large entrance 60 repeatedly opens and closes) is set to the low frequency entrance mode (A mode in which the large entrance 60 is opened only for a short time). As described above, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the large entrance 60 opens and closes in the low-frequency entry mode even when an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, so it is great even in the case of a special departure. If the entrance 60 is opened and closed in the low-frequency entry mode, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred or whether a special miss has occurred. In the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot, the game changes to the probability change state and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the large entrance 60 is opened and closed in the low frequency entry mode, the player We have the expectation that a big hit has occurred. This makes it possible for the player to have the expectation that the state has shifted to the probability variation state even though the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has not occurred.

  In general, if the jackpot does not occur, the player tends to gradually lose interest in the game, but it is actually difficult to generate the jackpot frequently. Therefore, if a special outage is provided in this way, and the operation of the large entrance 60 when the special outage occurs is the same as (or similar to) the operation at the time of the big hit, it is actually Even without generating a big hit, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the game.

  Further, not only the operation of the large entrance 60 but also the operation of the electric accessory 41 may be made the same or similar. For example, in the case of “special loss”, the electric accessory 41 is operated in the low support mode. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the implicit probability variable 2R jackpot occurs during the support mode, the support mode is not changed, so that the implicit probability variable 2R jackpot occurs during the low support mode. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 is completed, the electric accessory 41 operates in the low support mode. Therefore, if the low support mode is started when a special loss occurs, the operation of the electric accessory 41 can be made to coincide with the case where the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot occurs. This makes it possible for the player to have a stronger expectation that an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred.

  Note that details of the processing for determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful and details of processing for performing various operations in accordance with the results of the success or failure determination will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 8, the counter area 141 is provided with a jackpot type counter 141c in addition to the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b used for the jackpot lottery described above. The jackpot type counter 141c is also a loop counter, like the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b. In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the numerical value in the range from “0” to “29” is repeatedly indicated. It is configured as follows. Similarly to the big hit random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b, the numerical value is periodically updated by the processing executed by the main control device 100 (the numerical value is periodically and repeatedly added by "1"). In the case of winning the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter 141c is used to determine the jackpot type from the plurality of types as follows.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a distribution table that is referred to when determining the type of jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the distribution table, reference numerical values and jackpot types are associated with each other. As described above, such a distribution table is stored in the distribution table area 113 of the ROM 110 of the main control device 100. When determining the jackpot type (distributing the jackpot type), the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is read as a reference value, and the jackpot type corresponding to the read reference value is obtained from the sorting table, thereby obtaining the jackpot type To decide.

  For example, in the distribution table illustrated in FIG. 11A, the reference numerical values “0” to “9” correspond to “normal 15R big hit”, so the reference numerical value acquired from the big hit type counter 141c is “0”. If it is any numerical value from “9” to “9”, the type of jackpot is normally 15R jackpot. Similarly, if the reference numerical value acquired from the jackpot type counter 141c is any numerical value from “10” to “14”, it becomes an implicit probability variable 2R jackpot, and any numerical value from “15” to “19” If it is, it becomes the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, and if it is any numerical value from “20” to “29”, it becomes the probability variation 15R jackpot.

  Here, if the time interval for adding “1” to the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is equal, the ratio at which the numerical value of the jackpot type counter 141c takes each value from “0” to “29” Therefore, the ratio assigned to each jackpot type is proportional to the number of reference numerical values associated with each jackpot type. Therefore, if a configuration in which the jackpot type is determined using the sorting table in which the reference numerical value and the jackpot type are associated with each other as described above, the reference number that associates the ratio of each jackpot type with the jackpot type is used. It is possible to easily change only by changing the number. For this reason, it is possible to easily manufacture gaming machines (so-called sibling machines or derived version gaming machines, etc.) whose jackpot type allocation ratio is different from the original gaming machines based on the manufactured gaming machines. In this case, it is possible to manufacture a plurality of types of gaming machines and entertain the difference between the gaming machines.

  Further, in the sorting table shown in FIG. 11 (a), the reference corresponding to the jackpot that shifts to the probability change state (in this embodiment, “non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot”, “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” “probability variation 15R jackpot”). The numerical values are 20 numerical values from “10” to “29”. On the other hand, the reference numerical values corresponding to the big hits (in the present embodiment, “normal 15R big hits”) that do not shift to the probability change state are 10 numerical values from “0” to “9”. The ratio of the reference numerical values (in this example, 20 to 10) corresponds to the ratio between the ratio of shifting to the probability variation state and the ratio of not shifting. As described above, since the jackpot that shifts to the probability change state is a jackpot that is very advantageous for the player, the interest of the game is greatly influenced by the size of the ratio that shifts to the probability change state. In this regard, if such a distribution table is used, the rate of transition to the probability variation state is determined by the number of reference numerical values associated with each jackpot type, so by associating an appropriate number of reference numerical values with each jackpot type, It is possible to set appropriately the ratio which shifts to. Further, since it is only necessary to set the number of reference numerical values in the sorting table, it can be easily set.

In addition, the big hit lottery is performed when the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b enters the ball. Whether the entered operation port is the first operation port 25a or the second operation port 25b. Depending on the situation, different sort tables may be referred to. Ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
In the case of 0, when a big hit lottery is performed in response to a ball entering the first operating port 25a, the distribution table shown in FIG. 11A is used to trigger a ball entering the second operating port 25b. When the big hit lottery is performed, the distribution table shown in FIG. 11B is used.

  In the sorting table for the second operating ports 25b shown in FIG. 11B, the reference numerical values corresponding to the big hits (normally 15R big hits in this embodiment) that do not shift to the probability variation state are from “0” to “9”. It is 10 numerical values. On the other hand, the reference numerical values corresponding to the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state are 20 numerical values from “10” to “29”. The number of these reference numerical values is the same as that of the sorting table for the first working port 25a described above. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the rate of transition to the probability change state is that when a big hit is generated by entering the first operating port 25a and when a big hit is generated by entering the second operating port 25b. It is equal when it occurs.

  On the other hand, in the sorting table shown in FIG. 11 (b), the jackpot for shifting to the probability variation state is set only to “probability variation 15R jackpot”. When it occurs due to the ball entering the mouth 25b, the probability variation 15R big hit always occurs. As described above, it is difficult for the player to enter the large entrance 60 with the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, so the player is more likely than the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot. The probability variation 15R jackpot is more advantageous. For this reason, if the ratio of the probability variation 15R jackpot of the sorting table corresponding to the second operation port 25b is increased in this way, the ball enters the second operation port 25b rather than the first operation port 25a. Can be desired by the player. In this way, by providing an advantage-disadvantage difference between the two operation ports, the game ball is launched while aiming to enter one of the two operation ports (the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b). It becomes possible to add a game to the ball game machine 10.

  Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the sorting tables corresponding to the plurality of operating ports 25 are made different from each other in this way, as described above, the rate of transition to the probability changing state is The first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b are equal. That is, in the distribution table of the first operating port 25a and the distribution table of the second operating port 25b, the ratio of shifting to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, “indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” “probability variation 15R jackpot” The ratio between the jackpots that shift to the probability variation state (the ratios of “non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot”, “explicit probability variation 2R jackpot”, “probability variation 15R jackpot”) is changed. As described above, the interest of the game is greatly influenced by the size of the rate of transition to the probability variation state, but the ratio between each jackpot that transitions to the probability variation state is changed without changing the proportion of transition to the probability variation state. In this case, as described above, the second operating port 25b is advantageously set for the player, so that a game aiming at the second operating port 25b is added to the game, but the first operating port 25a is entered. It is possible to avoid a possibility that the interest of the game is greatly different between the case where the game is entered and the case where the ball enters the second operation port 25b.

Further, since there is a high probability that the jackpot will be won again in the probability variation state, when winning the jackpot that shifts to the probability variation state, it is normal that many prize balls are paid out thereafter. For this reason, if the ratio of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b to be shifted to a certain variation state is greatly different, the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b will be paid out depending on which one is easier to enter. There may be a large difference in the number of winning balls. Furthermore, each player has a change in which one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b is easy to enter due to a subtle difference in the way of aiming when firing the game ball. In addition, there may be a large difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out (so-called number of balls). In general, for game halls that operate with a ball game machine installed, it is preferable that there is less variation in the number of balls, but as described above, the rate of transition to the probabilistic state is made equal among a plurality of operating ports. If this is done, it is possible to avoid the possibility that a large variation in the number of balls will be generated while a game that aims at the operating port is added to the game by advantageously setting a specific operating port for the player. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the ratio of jackpots for shifting to the probability variation state is made different among the plurality of operating ports 25, the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of the operating ports can be further clarified. The player aims at the specific operation port more actively, and can improve the interest of the game aiming at the specific operation port. In addition, since the interest of the game after the jackpot is different depending on the operation opening that is the trigger of the jackpot, the game has diversity, and as a result, the player's interest can be attracted by the game.

  In the bullet ball gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is advantageous for the player to enter the second operation port 25b. From the viewpoint of aiming a specific operating port for the player, either one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b may be advantageously set for the player. It is more preferable to set the opening 25b advantageously. That is, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 41 is provided in the vicinity of the second operating port 25b (see FIG. 3), and when the electric accessory 41 is in an open state (FIG. 3 ( a)), it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second operation port 25b. Therefore, if the second operating port 25b is advantageously set for the player, the player will pay attention to the operation of the electric accessory 41, and as a result, the player can be more strongly drawn into the game. .

  Furthermore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode in which the electric accessory 41 opens and closes can be executed. There are a high support mode that makes it easier to enter the ball and a low support mode that makes it harder to enter than the high support mode. If the second operating port 25b is advantageously set for the player, the player will play the gaming machine while expecting a high support mode that makes it easy to enter the second operating port 25b. The player's interest can be drawn to whether it is started. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the high support mode is started is determined for each jackpot type, so the jackpot of the type in which the high support mode is started (in this embodiment, “ The player tends to desire to win the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, “normal 15R jackpot”, “probability variation 15R jackpot”). For this reason, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in which type of jackpot occurs.

  In addition, as described above, since the electric accessory 41 may operate due to the ball entering the through operation port 24 (see FIG. 2), the player enters the through operation port 24 with a game ball. It becomes possible to attract more attention to whether or not to do so, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the through operation port 24. As a result, it is also possible to launch the game ball by actively aiming to enter the through operation port 24, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in which the game ball is inserted into the through operation port 24. .

  As shown in FIG. 8, the counter area 141 is provided with a “variation type counter 141d” in addition to the above-described jackpot random number counter 141a, random number initial value counter 141b, and jackpot type counter 141c. This variation type counter 141d is also a loop counter similar to the above-described counters, and repeatedly indicates a numerical value within a predetermined range. Further, like the other counters, the numerical value of the counter is periodically updated. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol variation time and symbol variation pattern in the segment type display device 70 are determined by referring to the numerical value of the variation type counter 141d. Details of such processing referring to the variation type counter 141d will be described later.

The counter area 141 is provided with a “reach random number counter 141e”. The reach random number counter 141e is also a loop counter like the other counters. Further, like the other counters, the counter value is periodically updated by the process executed by the main control device 100. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect is determined based on the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e, and the mode of reach effect to be executed is determined. Details of the process of updating the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e and the process of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect with reference to the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e will be described later.

  The electric accessory release counter 141f is a counter used when determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 41 with respect to the entry into the through operation port 24 described above. The electric accessory release counter 141f is a loop counter like the other counters, and the numerical value of the counter is periodically updated. In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the numerical value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is acquired as the lottery value, and the lottery result corresponding to the lottery value is acquired by referring to the lottery table for the through operation port. Whether or not the lottery is successful is determined. If the result of the determination is successful, the electric accessory 41 is opened for a predetermined time (see FIG. 3B). The details of the process for determining whether or not to make such a determination or opening the electric accessory 41 will be described in detail later. In addition, the counter area 141 is provided with a remaining round counter 141g. The remaining round counter 141g will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 140 is provided with a reserved storage area 142 in addition to the counter area 141 described above with reference to FIG. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, another game ball is displayed while the game ball enters the operation port 25 and the segment type display device 70 displays the variation of the symbol. Further, when a ball enters the operating port 25, the ball is stored as a hold. The hold storage area 142 is a storage area for storing such hold. Further, in the present embodiment, in correspondence with the provision of the two operation ports, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, the reservation storage area 142 includes a “first operation port reservation storage area”. Two reserved storage areas of “second working port reserved storage area” are provided.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram conceptually showing the structure of the reserved storage area. As shown in the figure, each of the first operating port storage area and the second operation port storage area is provided with a “retention number storage area (142a, 142e)”, and the number of reservations of each operation port. Can be stored in each pending number storage area. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to hold a maximum of four balls for each operation port, and correspondingly, The reserved number storage area stores a numerical value from “0” to “4” using 3 bits of the storage area of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, since it is possible to hold up to four balls at each operation port, the first operation port storage area and the second operation port storage area are each “first area” as shown in the figure. It is composed of four areas, “second area”, “third area”, and “fourth area”.

  Each area is provided with storage areas of “big hit random number storage area (142b, 142f)”, “big hit type storage area (142c, 142g)” and “reach random number storage area (142d, 142h)”. Among these storage areas, the “big hit random number storage areas (142b, 142f)” can store the numerical value of the big hit random number counter 141a (see FIG. 8). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the big hit random number counter 141a takes a value in the range from “0” to “599”. 142b, 142f) is configured to use 10 bits in a storage area of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The “big hit type storage area (142c, 142g)” (see FIG. 12) is a storage area for storing the value of the big hit type counter 141c (see FIG. 8). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter 141c takes a numerical value ranging from “0” to “29”, so that the jackpot type storage area uses 5 bits of the 1-byte storage area. It has become.

  The “reach random number storage area (142d, 142h)” (see FIG. 12) is a storage area for storing the numerical value of the reach random number counter 141e (see FIG. 8). In the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the reach random number counter 141e takes a numerical value in the range from “0” to “238”, and the reach random number storage area stores 1 byte corresponding to this numerical range. The area shall be used. In this embodiment, a group of these counters (a jackpot random number counter, a jackpot type counter, a reach random number counter) whose values are stored in the storage area are collectively referred to as a “holding acquisition counter group” and stored in the storage area. The value of each counter is referred to as “hold counter information”.

  Each of the first working port reserved storage area and the second working port reserved storage area is provided with four areas each having such a storage area, and when a hold occurs, an on-hold acquisition counter group (a big hit random number counter 141a) The values read from the jackpot type counter 141c and the reach random number counter 141e) are stored in the respective storage areas. Since four storage areas are provided for each operating port, it is possible to store the numerical value of each counter of the on-hold acquisition counter group for up to four holdings for each operating port. Yes.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the operation port in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the symbol variation display is immediately executed. The numerical value of the counter is stored in the holding storage area 142. Based on the numerical values stored in the reserved storage area 142, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this way, when the symbol variation display is executed, the processing is executed with reference to the numerical value in the holding storage area 142 in both cases of the symbol variation display and the case where the symbol variation display is not performed. Good. For this reason, it is possible to share the process of performing the variable display of the symbols, and to keep the program simple. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the MPU 102 when executing the program and to reduce the storage capacity of the program area 111 for storing the program.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the holding storage area 142 is also provided with a total holding number storage area 142i for storing the total number of holdings of each operating port (total holding number). As described above, the storage area 142 stores the storage number (holding number storage area 142a) of the first working port 25a and the storage area (holding number) of the second operating port 25b. Storage area 142e), each of which is provided with a total holding number storage area 142i and storing the total holding number, the total holding number can be determined by referring to the total holding number storage area 142i. It is possible to obtain quickly.

Further, a standby area 142j is provided in the holding storage area 142. The standby area 142j has a jackpot random number storage area, a jackpot type storage area, and a reach random number storage area in the same manner as the first area to the fourth area, and copies the data of the first area to the fourth area to the standby area 142j. Alternatively, the data in the first area to the fourth area can be moved to the standby area 142j. When the standby area 142j is provided in this way, when reading the on-hold counter information from the hold storage area 142, the data of the area to be read is moved to the standby area 142j or copied in advance. Then, it is possible to acquire the target on-hold counter information by reading data from the standby area 142j. Here, when storing the on-hold counter information of a plurality of operating ports in the on-hold storage area 142, or storing a plurality of on-hold counter information on the on-hold storage area 142, a large number of storage areas are stored in the on-hold storage area 142. Therefore, the assignment of the address of the memory space in the reserved storage area 142 becomes complicated, and as a result, the process of acquiring the address where the data to be read is stored tends to be complicated. In this respect, if the target data is moved to a specific area (standby area 142j) in advance, it is only necessary to read the data from the specific area when reading the data. Can be obtained.

  The processing for storing the numerical value of each counter in each storage area of the hold storage area 142 and the process for obtaining the counter information at the time of hold from the storage area will be described in detail later. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the number of reservations of each operation port stored in the number-of-holds storage area 142a and the number-of-holds storage area 142e of the storage area 142 is determined by processing executed by the main control device 100. Reflected in the lighting state of the display lamps 83a and 83b, it is possible to display the number of holdings of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is provided with a flag area 143 in addition to the above-described reserved storage area 142. The flag area 143 holds various flags that are set to ON or OFF in response to a change in the game state accompanying the progress of the game or the occurrence of a jackpot. For example, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states such as a normal 15R jackpot and a probability variation 15R jackpot. A “normal 15R jackpot flag” and a “probability variable 15R jackpot flag” are provided in the flag area 143. When a jackpot occurs, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set (set to ON). When the jackpot gaming state ends, the corresponding jackpot flag is reset (set to OFF). Therefore, by referring to each jackpot flag, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state, or to determine which type of jackpot is the jackpot gaming state.

  As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 such as the low-frequency entrance mode and the high-frequency entrance mode can be executed. Correspondingly, the flag area 143 is provided with a “low frequency entry mode flag” and a “high frequency entry mode flag”. Like the jackpot flag, these flags are set when each open / close mode is started, and reset when the open / close mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether each open / close mode is being executed by referring to each flag.

  The flag area 143 is provided with various flags in addition to the above-described flags. These flags will be described later. Further, processing for setting or resetting each flag and processing for referring to each flag will be described in detail later.

  The RAM 140 of the main control device 100 is also provided with an “electrical accessory holding area 144”. As described above, when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the symbol variation display is performed on the through-segment display device 80. However, while the symbol variation display is being performed, the game ball passes through. When the ball enters the operating port 24, the ball is stored as a hold. The electric accessory holding area 144 is a storage area for storing such holding. The numerical value read from the electric accessory release counter 141f is temporarily stored in the electric accessory holding area 144, and when the symbol change display is completed, the numerical value is read from the electric accessory holding area 144 and the symbol change display. Will be digested. Details of these processes will be described later.

The command buffer 145 temporarily stores commands to be transmitted to peripheral devices connected to the main control device 100 (the sub control device 200, the electric accessory driving unit 42, the large entrance driving unit 62, etc.). This is a buffer area. As will be described in detail later, the main control device 100 stores various commands in the command buffer 145 according to the progress of the game, and outputs the commands to the sub-control device 200, the electric accessory driving unit 42, etc. at a predetermined timing. Thus, the operation of each of these devices is controlled.

  The general-purpose area 146 is a general-purpose storage area in which various data can be temporarily stored when the main control device 100 controls a game, and the calculation result of the calculation device 104 can be temporarily stored. is there. The MPU 102 of the main control device 100 can appropriately execute the processing by appropriately using the general-purpose area 146 when executing various programs for controlling the game.

  As described above, the main control device 100 controls the progress of the game using each of these components. At this time, various processes are performed in accordance with various sensors (such as 11s) connected to the main control device 100 and signals from the payout control device 410. In addition, by transmitting various commands from the main control device 100 to the devices such as the sub-control device 200 and the electric accessory driving unit 42 connected to the main control device 100, the operations of these devices are controlled. Control. Hereinafter, the configuration of these peripheral devices connected to the main control device 100 will be described.

C-2. Peripheral device configuration:
The sub control device 200 is a control device that receives a command transmitted from the main control device 100 and performs various controls according to the command, and mainly plays a role of controlling various effects associated with the game. Although not described in detail, the sub control device 200 includes an MPU, a ROM, and a RAM like the main control device 100, and various processes can be executed using these devices. In addition, a display control device 300 is connected to the sub-control device 200, and the display control device 300 displays various effect images and effect symbols on the effect display device 30 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 200. An effect using the display device 30 can be executed.

  When the sub control device 200 receives a command from the main control device 100, the sub control device 200 analyzes the command, acquires various types of information included in the command, and performs various effects processing according to the acquired information. For example, when a command including information related to the symbol variation display time of the segment type display device 70 and the symbol variation pattern (a “variation start command” to be described later) is received, an instruction is sent to the display control device 300 to display the display control device. The effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 30 connected to 300. At this time, since the command sent from the main control device 100 includes information on the variable display time of the symbols on the segment type display device 70, the sub-control device 200 uses the effect display device 30. It is possible to display the effect symbol variation display in accordance with the symbol variation display on the segment type display device 70. In addition, in accordance with the symbol stop display on the segment type display device 70, the effect symbol variation display on the effect display device 30 can be stopped (determined display).

As described above, the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment can achieve a reach effect, but for such reach effect, the sub control device 200 performs a predetermined process in response to a command from the main control device 100. It is realized by doing. That is, when receiving the change start command from the main control device 100, the sub control device 200 determines whether or not there is a time required for performing the reach effect based on the information regarding the change display time included in the change start command. To do. When it is determined that the reach effect can be executed, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is actually performed, and when the reach effect is performed, a predetermined command is transmitted to the display control device 300. A reach effect is executed by the effect display device 30. Not only such reach effects but also other various effects, the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 2
This is realized by sending a command to 00.

  Similar to the main control device 100 and the sub control device 200, the display control device 300 includes a control circuit equipped with an MPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and can execute various processes using these components. . In addition, image data of various images displayed on the effect display device 30 is stored in advance. These image data are stored in a state where various kinds of encoding processing are performed, and this prevents a situation where the storage area for storing the image data becomes excessive. The display control device 300 decodes the encoded image data using an MPU or a decoding LSI, and outputs the decoded image data to the effect display device 30. In this way, even encoded image data can be quickly displayed on the effect display device 30.

  As shown in FIG. 7, not only the sub-control device 200 but also each sensor provided in the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25 is connected to the main control device 100. Each of the sensors provided at the entrance of the ball sends a signal to the main control device 100 when detecting the entrance of the game ball, and in response to this, a latch circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 100 is sent. By entering the latch state, the game ball is stored. The MPU 102 of the main control device 100 can detect a ball entering the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25 by reading the state of the latch circuit.

  The electric accessory driving unit 42 includes an actuator that opens and closes the electric accessory 41, a drive circuit that drives the actuator, and the like. The main controller 100 can open and close the electric accessory 41 by transmitting a signal to the electric accessory driving unit 42 to operate the electric accessory driving unit 42. The large entrance opening driving unit 62 is also composed of an actuator for opening and closing the large entrance 60, a control circuit for driving the actuator, and the like, similar to the electric accessory driving unit 42. The large entrance 60 can be opened and closed by transmitting a signal to 62.

  The above-mentioned segment type display device 70 is also connected to the main control device 100. For this reason, the main control device 100 can output a signal to the segment type display device 70 and perform a variable display or a stop display on the segment type display device 70.

  The payout control device 410 is a device that controls the payout device 420 connected to the game ball storage tank 400 (see FIG. 5) as described above, and by operating the payout device 420 via the payout control device 410. The game balls in the game ball storage tank 400 can be paid out to the upper plate 13 (see FIG. 1) of the ball game machine 10. The main control device 100 operates the payout device 420 via the payout control device 410 to thereby win a prize ball for entering the operation opening such as the first operation opening 25a and the second operation opening 25b, The winning ball for paying into a winning mouth such as 26 or the big entrance 60 is paid out. The payout device 420 is provided with a payout ball counter that counts the number of game balls that have been paid out, and the main control device 100 refers to the payout ball counter via the payout control device 410 to enter the ball. It is possible to confirm that a predetermined number of game balls determined for each mouth have been paid out.

  Further, the dispensing control device 410 is connected with a lower tray full sensor 530 for detecting that the lower tray 16 is full, and detects the state where the lower tray 16 is full and detects the main state. It is possible to notify the control device 100. By receiving notification from the payout control device 410, the main control device 100 can grasp that the lower plate is full. The full state detection mechanism and the contents of processing performed by the payout control device 410 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIG. 7, an external output terminal 910 is also connected to the main control device 100. As described above, the external output terminal 910 is provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10, and a cable from a hall computer installed in the game hall can be connected to the external output terminal 910 (see FIG. 5). If signals are output from the main control device 100 to the external output terminal 910 with the cable from the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910, various signals are transmitted to the hall computer via the external output terminal 910. Is possible.

  Various signals can be output to the external output terminal 910, but the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment can transmit a “hit signal” indicating that a jackpot has occurred. ing. In addition, various modes can be adopted as modes for outputting the jackpot signal, but simply, a pulse may be output when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. In this way, the hall computer can easily detect that the jackpot has occurred by detecting the pulse. Alternatively, instead of temporarily outputting a signal when a jackpot is generated, the signal may be continuously output while the jackpot occurs and the jackpot gaming state continues. For example, the voltage level is kept at a low level (“Low” state) while not in the jackpot gaming state, while the voltage level is kept at a high level (“High” state) while the jackpot gaming state is continued. In this way, the hall computer can detect that the jackpot has occurred by detecting a change in the voltage level. In addition, since the voltage level corresponds to the current gaming state (in this case, whether or not the jackpot gaming state), it is easy to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state is still ongoing by examining the voltage level It is possible to detect.

  As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a “special loss” may occur, but a signal (special failure signal) may be output even in such a special failure. As described above, the special entrance is performed by opening and closing the large entrance 60, so that the special release can be regarded as being similar to the jackpot. Therefore, if a signal is output even in the case of such a special deviation, it is preferable that the hall computer can accurately grasp that the large entrance 60 is opened and closed. Further, when outputting a special out signal, the jackpot signal and the special out signal may be output together from one signal line (terminal). For example, the voltage level of a specific terminal is set to a high level when either a jackpot or a special loss occurs, and the voltage level of the terminal is set to a low level when none occurs. In this way, the hall computer can grasp whether or not the large entrance 60 is opened and closed by simply examining the voltage of one signal line, which is preferable. Of course, the jackpot and extraordinary loss may be output from separate terminals. In such a case, the hall computer examines the voltage at each terminal to determine whether the jackpot or extraordinary loss occurred. Can be grasped.

  In addition, the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment outputs a predetermined signal even when the game balls in the game ball storage tank 400 are insufficient. Thereby, the game hall can detect the shortage of game balls by the hall computer, and the bullet ball game machine 10 can be operated normally by taking measures such as supplying the game balls.

Further, a signal indicating that the game ball has been paid out and a signal indicating that the game ball has been discharged from the out port 50 can be output. Various modes can be adopted for outputting these signals. For example, a pulse may be output each time a game ball is paid out or discharged from the out port 50. In such a case, a pulse may be output for each game ball, or a pulse may be output for each predetermined number of game balls (for example, every 10 balls). In any case, the hall computer can know the number of game balls paid out and the number of game balls discharged from the out port 50 by counting pulses. Alternatively, the number of game balls that have been fired may be grasped by a hall computer by outputting a pulse each time a game ball is fired. In this way, it is possible to grasp not only the number of game balls discharged from the out port 50 (so-called out number) but also the difference between the number of game balls fired and the out number (so-called safe number). .

  In addition, it is possible to output a signal indicating that the front panel 15 (see FIG. 1) is opened. In order to output such a signal, a sensor or switch is provided between the front panel 15 and the main body, and the open / closed state of the front panel 15 may be detected by the sensor or switch. Alternatively, the opening / closing state of the front panel 15 may not be directly detected, but indirectly detected based on the state of the key portion 17. For example, a sensor is provided in the key unit 17 and the locked state of the key unit 17 is detected by the sensor. Normally, when the ball game machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the key portion 17 is locked. Therefore, when the key portion 17 is unlocked, it is assumed that the front panel 15 is opened. be able to. Therefore, if a signal indicating the sensor state provided in the key portion 17 is output, the open / closed state of the front panel 15 can be detected by the hall computer. In addition, if the state of the key part 17 is detected in this way, even if the key part 17 is forgotten to be locked after the front panel 15 is closed, it can be detected by the hall computer that the key part 17 is not locked. . As a result, it is possible to avoid a risk of receiving an illegal act due to a lack of locking of the key portion 17.

  These various signals may be output using different signal lines and terminals for each signal, or may be output by sharing the signal lines and terminals among a plurality of signals. Good. For example, if so-called serial communication is performed or a plurality of signals are collectively encoded into one signal, a signal line and a terminal can be shared between the plurality of signals. In this way, even when the number of signal lines and the number of terminals are limited, it is possible to output many types of signals.

  In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled using the above-described components. Below, the control process performed using each structure of the ball game machine 10 is demonstrated in detail.

D. Main control unit control contents:
D-1. Main loop processing:
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the “main loop process” executed in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. This process is a process that is read from the program area 111 of the main control device 100 and executed on the MPU 102 of the main control device 100 when the ball game machine 10 is activated. Although not shown in FIG. 13, when the ball game machine 10 is activated, a power failure recovery process for returning the ball ball game machine 10 to the state at the time of the power failure occurs, and then FIG. 13. The main loop process is executed. Further, when a power failure occurs, processing at the time of power failure such as stopping the MPU 102 and supplying a backup voltage to the RAM 140 is performed, but detailed description of these processing is omitted.

  As shown in the figure, in the main loop process, a series of processes from step S1000 to step S1010 are performed in order. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of a series of processing (processing from step S1000 to step S1010) (step S1012). (Step S1012: Yes), the process returns to step S1000, and if it has not elapsed (step S1012: No), it is determined whether the time has elapsed while executing the remaining time processing of step S1014 (step S1012) is repeated. Therefore, in the main loop process, a series of processes from step S1000 to step S1010 are repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period.

  In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, each process is repeatedly executed as described above, and when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the operation port 25, etc. Each step executes various processes or executes a predetermined process according to the passage of time to control the game. In each of these processes, by sending various commands and signals to peripheral devices such as the sub-control device 200, various effects can be performed according to the progress of the game, and prize balls can be paid out. I do. As a result, the game progresses in the entire ball and ball game machine 10. Hereinafter, the details of each process of the main loop process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When starting the main loop process, the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 100 first executes an external output process (step S1000) for outputting a command or a signal to each apparatus connected to the main control apparatus 100. As described above, in the main loop process, a series of processes from step S1000 to step S1010 are repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period. The data is stored in the command buffer 145 (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 140. Therefore, in the external output process of step S1000, a process of transmitting the command stored in the command buffer 145 to the peripheral device is performed.

  For example, a payout control device 410 is connected to the main control device 100 of the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, and it is possible to pay out prize balls by operating the payout control device 410. In response to this, a “prize ball command” for instructing the payout control device 410 to pay out a prize ball is transmitted. This prize ball command includes information on the number of prize balls to be paid out, and the payout control device 410 can pay out an appropriate number of prize balls by operating in accordance with the prize ball command. It is also possible to transmit a change start command, a change end command, etc., which will be described later, to the sub-control device 200. By doing so, the display control device 300 is driven via the sub-control device 200, and the effect display device 30. It is possible to display the effect image. The process of storing these various commands in the command buffer 145 will be described in a timely manner while proceeding with the description along the flowchart of the main loop process.

  Further, as described above, the ball game machine 10 is provided with the external output terminal 910, and various information can be output to a device installed outside the ball game machine 10, such as a hall computer. In the external output process of step S1000, a process of outputting a signal to the external output terminal 910 can also be performed. For example, referring to the flag area 143 described above, various flags such as a jackpot flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state and a special miss flag indicating that a special miss has occurred are read out. Information can be transmitted to an external device by outputting a signal to each terminal of the external output terminal 910 in accordance with the state of each flag.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, after the external output process (step S1000) is performed, the value of the variation type counter 141d is then updated (step S1002). As described above, since the variation type counter 141d is provided in the counter area 141 of the RAM 140 (see FIG. 8), the MPU 102 accesses the RAM 140 and adds “1” to the numerical value of the variation type counter 141d. The numerical value of the variation type counter 141d is updated. At this time, as described above, since the counter area 141 is provided with a buffer (variation type buffer) corresponding to the variation type counter 141d, when the counter value is updated, the updated value is stored in the variation type buffer. To do.

As described above, when the value of the counter area 141 is updated and the value of the variation type buffer is made to match the value of the variation type counter 141d, the value of the variation type counter 141d is obtained by reading the variation type buffer. Is possible. Therefore, even when the fluctuation type counter 141d cannot be directly accessed such as during the update of the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d, the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d can be acquired. In addition, when the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter 141d is changed due to an illegal act, a deviation occurs between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter 141d and the numerical value of the fluctuation type buffer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage caused by fraud.

  After updating the value of the variation type counter 141d (step S1002 in FIG. 13), the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal from the payout control device 410 are read (step S1004). As described above, the payout control device 410 is provided with a counter that counts the payout of prize balls and an abnormal sensor that detects that an abnormality has occurred in the payment, so the MPU 102 reads signals from these counters and sensors. This makes it possible to confirm that the winning ball has been paid out normally. It should be noted that when acquiring these pieces of information relating to payout of prize balls from the payout control device 410, it is possible to directly acquire a signal from the payout control device 410, or the payout control device 410 stores information on the RAM 140. The MPU 102 may read and acquire the written information.

  When the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal are read (step S1004), in the subsequent step S1006, a “symbol game process” for performing various processes relating to the symbol display is executed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the symbol game process. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, it is first determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode (step S1030). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the large entrance 60 can execute the open / close mode in which the open / close operation is repeated, and the “open / close mode flag” in the flag area 143 is set during the open / close mode. Is done. Therefore, the MPU 102 can determine whether or not the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode by reading the state of the open / close mode flag with reference to the flag area 143. The process for setting the open / close mode flag will be described later.

  When it is determined that the open / close mode of the big entrance 60 is in progress (step S1030: Yes), the current gaming state is a gaming state in which a symbol variation display such as a jackpot gaming state is not performed, so the symbol gaming process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large entrance 60 is not in the open / close mode (step S1030: No), it is then determined whether or not the variable display of the symbol is being executed on the segment type display device 70 (step S1032). ). That is, when the symbol variation display has already been started on the segment type display device 70, it is not necessary to display the symbol variation repeatedly. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed, and depending on the determination result. Switch the process. It can be determined by referring to the symbol changing flag in the flag area 143 whether or not the symbol is changing.

When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1032: No), various preparation processes for executing the symbol variation display may be performed. However, as described above, the ball game machine 10 displays the variation of the symbol when the ball enters the operating port 25. Therefore, if there is no ball entering the operating port or there is no holding of the ball, the symbol is displayed. There is no need to display fluctuations. Therefore, first, the total number of reservations is confirmed with reference to the total number-of-holds storage area 142i of the storage area 142 (see FIG. 12) (step S1034). As will be described in detail later, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, if there is a ball in the first operating port 25a or the second operating port 25b, the number-of-holds storage areas (142a and 142e) of the respective operating ports are stored. “1” is added to the numerical value, and “1” is subtracted from the numerical value when the hold is consumed. Further, as described above, the total number of reservations stored in the first operation port 25a and the number of reservations in the second operation port 25b are stored in the total reservation number storage area 142i. If “0”, it means that neither the first operation port 25a nor the second operation port 25b has any entry or suspension.

  Therefore, if the value of the total reserved number storage area 142i is “0” (step S1034 in FIG. 14: Yes), it is not necessary to perform the symbol change display, so the symbol game process is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process. To do. On the other hand, if the numerical value in the total number-of-holds storage area 142i is not “0” (step S1034: No), the “variable display preparation process” in step S1036 is started in order to perform the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display preparation process. As shown in the drawing, when the variable display preparation process is started, first, an operation port to be processed is determined (step S1050). In other words, as described above, the ball game machine 10 displays the variation of the pattern in response to the ball entering the operating port. In this embodiment, the two operating ports, the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b, Since it is provided, it is determined which of the operation ports is to be subjected to the variable display for entering.

  It is possible to determine as follows which of the operation ports to enter the variation display. First, by reading the numerical values in the hold number storage area 142a and the hold number storage area 142e (see FIG. 12), the number of holds in the first working port 25a and the number of holds in the second working port 25b are grasped. When only one of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b has a holding (when the other holding number is “0”), the variable opening may be displayed for the operating port with the holding. Therefore, the operation port with the hold is set as the target of the variable display preparation process. On the other hand, when there is a hold in both the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b (when neither of the numbers in the hold number storage area 142a and the hold number storage area 142e is “0”), Although it is possible to set the operating port as a processing target, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second operating port 25b is preferentially set as a processing target.

  In this way, if there is even one hold in the second working port 25b, the second working port 25b is digested first regardless of the number of the first working port 25a held, so the second working port 25b After all of the hold is digested, the hold of the first working port 25a is digested. As described above, the distribution table to be referred to is different between the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b (see FIG. 11), so that the ratio of the jackpot type is set to the first operating port 25a and the second operating port. 25b can be made different, and it is possible to make a difference in the advantages and disadvantages for the player. In addition to this, if priority is given to the reservation of one of the operating ports, It is possible to improve the fun of the game by making the player feel the comfort that the preferential holding of the advantageous working port is prioritized and the frustration that the preferential holding of the advantageous working port is not easily digested. .

  Further, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the embodiment, the distribution table for the second operation port 25b (see FIG. 11B) is the distribution table for the first operation port 25a (see FIG. 11A). Since the ratio of 15R jackpot (usually 15R jackpot and probability variation 15R jackpot) is set to be larger than that)), from the viewpoint of obtaining more prize balls when the jackpot, This is more advantageous than the one operating port 25a. In this way, if priority is given to the suspension of the operating opening advantageous for the player, it is possible to make the player feel that the state advantageous to the player continues and to attract the player to the game. .

When the operation port to be subjected to the variation display preparation process is determined (step S1050 in FIG. 15), the suspension is then digested and the variation display is performed. Therefore, the number of suspension of the target operation port is reduced by one (step S1052). As described above, the number of holdings for each operating port is stored in the holding number storage area of the holding storage area 142 (see 142a and 142e in FIG. 12), so it is stored in the holding number storage area of the target operating port. "1" is subtracted from the numerical value. Further, since “1” is subtracted from the number of holdings of the operating ports, “1” is also subtracted from the numerical value in the total holding number storage area 142 i that stores the total value of the number of holdings of each operating port. When the number of holds is reduced (step S1052 in FIG. 15), the following processes are performed in order to actually digest the hold.

First, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the memory areas are pre-ordered in the order of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area, and the game ball enters the operation port and is held. Occurs, the on-hold counter information corresponding to the incoming ball is stored in each storage area in this order (stored in the order of the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area). Therefore, also when digesting the suspension, according to this ordering, the suspension can be digested in the order in which the balls are entered if digested sequentially from the on-hold counter information of the first area. Therefore, first, the on-hold counter information of the first area is stored in the standby area 142j (step S1054). As described above, if the on-hold counter information to be read in the on-hold storage area 142 is stored in the standby area 142j in advance, the on-hold counter information can be easily read from the standby area 142j. For this reason, by storing the on-hold counter information of the first area in the standby area 142j in this way, in the “variable display start process” (step S1038 in FIG. 14) to be executed later, Can be read out. The on-hold counter information is stored in each area of the hold storage area 142 by a “timer interrupt process” described later. This point will be described in detail later.

  When the hold information of the first area is stored in the standby area 142j, the counter information at the time of holding in each of the second area, the third area, and the fourth area is shifted to the front area one area at a time ( Step S1056). That is, the on-hold counter information in the second area is moved to the first area, the on-hold counter information in the third area is moved to the second area, and the on-hold counter information in the fourth area is moved to the third area. In this way, if the on-hold counter information is shifted to the front area, it is sufficient to always store the on-hold counter information of the first area in the standby area 142j when digesting the hold, and it is necessary to switch the storage area. Absent. Therefore, the MPU 102 does not have to switch the address that designates the storage area in the RAM 140, so that the processing of the MPU 102 can be kept simple. Further, since it is not necessary to describe the address switching process in the program, the program size can be kept compact, and the storage area of the ROM 110 for storing the program can be saved. Become.

  After the data in the holding storage area 142 is shifted (step S1056 in FIG. 15), a “variable display target flag” is then set in order to store the operation port subjected to the variable display (step S1058). . The variation display target flag may be any form of flag as long as the operation port that is the subject of variation display can be determined. For example, a flag is provided for each working port, and a flag of a mode in which the flag of the working port that is the subject of the fluctuation display is set (set to ON) and the flag of the other working port is reset (set to OFF). Use it. In this way, it is possible to identify the operating port that is subject to symbol variation by referring to the flag of each operating port. In addition, since the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment has two operation ports (the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b), a flag is not provided for each operation port. It is also possible to provide only one. For example, the flag is reset (set to OFF) when the subject of the symbol variation display is the first operating port 25a, and the flag is set (set to ON) when the symbol is the second operating port 25b. By doing so, it is possible to determine which operating port is subject to symbol variation by using one flag, so that it is possible to save the capacity of the flag area 143 (see FIG. 7) where the flag is provided. is there. In this embodiment, the variable display target flag of this method is used.

When the variable display target flag is set (FIG. 15: Step S1058), a “hold shift notification command” to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is set (Step S1060). That is, since the data in the holding storage area 142 has been shifted in the previous step S1056, a command (holding shift notification command) for notifying the sub-control device 200 to that effect is stored in the command buffer 145. The hold shift notification command includes information for specifying the operation port to which the hold information is shifted (that is, the operation port subjected to the change display of the symbol), and the sub-control device 200 executes the hold shift notification command. By receiving it, it becomes possible to identify the operating port that is the subject of the variable display. Thereby, for example, it is possible to determine the aspect of the effect depending on which operation port is the target of the variable display, such as performing a different effect for each operation port.

  Further, as described above, the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the display lamp 83 on the game board 20 indicating the number of holdings of each operation port (see FIG. 2). In the present embodiment, the lighting state of these display lamps 83 is controlled by the main control device 100, but may be controlled by the sub control device 200. That is, the sub-control device 200 can recognize that the hold has been exhausted by receiving the hold shift notification command. Can be appropriately reflected on the display lamp 83.

  Alternatively, the sub-control device 200 may display various effect symbols reflecting the number of holds on the effect display device 30. For example, a different design symbol is associated with each number of holdings in advance, and a design symbol corresponding to the number of holdings is displayed on the effect display device 30, or more simply, the number of reservations is displayed numerically on the effect display device 30. It may be displayed. In such a case, the sub-control device 200 can grasp that the hold has been digested by receiving the hold shift notification command, so that it is possible to update the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 30 in synchronization with the digest of the hold. It is. In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize not only the display lamp 83 but also the effect display device 30 that the number of holds changes. Since the effect display device 30 is provided at a position that is easy for the player in the center of the game board 20 to see, the player can effectively enjoy the interest in increasing or decreasing the number of holds.

  In addition, as described above, it is possible to specify the operating opening digested with the hold, so it is also possible to display a different effect design for each operating opening and update only the effect design of the operating opening digested with hold. is there. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to vary the advantage for the player for each operation port 25. The player's interest also varies depending on the operation port 25. Therefore, if the effect design reflecting the number of reservations is displayed for each operation port, the player can enjoy the interest that the number of reservations increases or decreases while being aware of the difference in advantages and disadvantages for each operation port. In addition, if there is a difference in the advantages and disadvantages of each operating port, the advantageous design of the operating port becomes more important to the player, so it is not possible to discriminate by simply looking at which design symbol corresponds to which holding port. If the effect symbol is displayed, the player tries to determine which effect symbol is important. For example, if an effect design imitating an animal is displayed for the hold of the first operation port 25a, and an effect design imitating a plant is displayed for the hold of the second operation port 25b, the player Since it is impossible to determine at a glance whether the symbol is important, it is sought to determine which is the production symbol corresponding to the operating opening advantageous for the user. As described above, if the effect symbols important for the player are displayed together with other effect symbols, it is possible to provide the player with a new way of enjoying such as determining the important effect symbols from the plurality of effect symbols.

  When the hold shift notification command is set (FIG. 15: Step S1060), the variable display preparation process is terminated and the process returns to the symbol game process of FIG. Once the symbol variation display is prepared by the variation display preparation process described above, the “variation display start process” for actually starting the symbol variation display is executed (FIG. 14: step S1038).

  16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the flow of the variable display start process. As shown in the drawing, in the variable display start process, first, a lottery table used for determining whether or not the big hit lottery is successful is determined (step S1070). That is, the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a jackpot lottery table for an uncertain change state (see FIG. 10A) and a jackpot lottery table for a probability change state (see FIG. 10B). Therefore, the lottery table used for the determination of success / failure is determined according to whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the non-probability variation state. Whether the gaming state is a probability change state or a non-probability change state can be determined by referring to the “probability change state flag” in the flag area 143. This probability variation state flag is a flag that is set (set to ON) when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state, and is reset (set to OFF) when the gaming state transitions to the non-probability variation state. The process for setting the probability variation state flag will be described later.

  When the probability variation state flag is set to ON, the gaming state is a probability variation state, so the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state is used for the determination of success / failure. On the other hand, when the probability variation state flag is set to OFF, the gaming state is a non-probability variation state, and therefore a jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state is used. When the lottery table used for the big hit lottery is determined, whether or not the big hit lottery is actually determined is actually determined using the big hit lottery table (FIG. 16: Step S1072).

  Whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot random number storage area of the standby area 142j with the jackpot lottery table determined previously. That is, as described above, since the lottery value and the lottery result are associated with each other in the jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 10), the corresponding lottery result is obtained using the numeric value stored in the jackpot random number storage area as the lottery value. By reading from the jackpot random number table, the result of the jackpot lottery is acquired.

  Here, as described above, the jackpot random number storage area is a storage area in which the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is stored when a ball enters the operation port 25. Therefore, the numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area is a numerical value acquired when the ball enters the operation port 25. For this reason, determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful using the numerical values in the jackpot random number storage area effectively means performing the jackpot lottery based on the entrance to the operating port (entrance timing). Equivalent to. Thereby, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the timing of the game ball does not exactly match the timing at which the game ball enters the operation port 25 and performs the determination of the success / failure, substantially, It is possible to perform a jackpot lottery based on the entry.

  When the determination result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S1074: Yes), since there are a plurality of jackpot types in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined from them. The jackpot type can be determined using a sorting table (see FIG. 11), but as described above, the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a plurality of sorting tables. Therefore, it is first determined which of the plurality of distribution tables is to be used (step S1076).

As illustrated in FIG. 11, the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a distribution table for the first working port 25a and a sorting table for the second working port 25b. Therefore, if the ball that triggered the jackpot lottery is a ball entering the first operating port 25a, a sorting table for the first port 25a is used, and if a ball entering the second port 25b, A sorting table for the second working port 25b is used. Since the operating opening which is the target of the jackpot lottery is the operating port which is the target of the variation display preparation process of FIG. 15, by examining the operating port determined in step S1050 of the variation preparation process, It is possible to identify the operating port that has become defective. As described above, in the variation display preparation process, the operation port to be processed is stored by the “variation display target flag” (see step S1058 in FIG. 15). And a sorting table for the operation port may be used. In the present embodiment, in the variation display preparation process, the variation display target flag is reset (set to OFF) when the symbol variation display target is the first operating port 25a, and is set when the symbol is the second working port 25b. Since the variable display target flag is “ON”, the distribution table for the second working port is used, and when the variable display target flag is “OFF”, the distribution for the first working port is performed. A table may be used.

  When the distribution table to be referred to is determined, the jackpot type is determined by actually referring to the distribution table (FIG. 16: step S1078). As illustrated in FIG. 11, since the jackpot type is associated with the reference value in the reference table, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot table and acquiring the jackpot type corresponding to the reference value. Is possible. Here, as a reference numerical value when referring to the jackpot table, a numerical value stored in the jackpot type storage area of the standby area 142j may be used. As described above, since the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is stored in the jackpot type storage area, the jackpot type can be determined based on the value of the jackpot counter 141c by using the value of the jackpot type storage area. It becomes possible. Further, the numerical value of the jackpot type storage area is stored in response to the entry of the game ball into the operation port, similarly to the numerical value of the jackpot random number storage area described above. Therefore, by determining the jackpot type based on the numerical value of the jackpot type storage area in this way, it is possible to determine the jackpot type substantially based on the ball entering the operation port.

  After performing the above-described processing related to the jackpot lottery, this time, the symbol stop display mode to be performed after the symbol variation display ends is determined, and various data for setting the symbol stop display in the determined mode are set. Process. In this embodiment, in order to stop and display the symbol in a manner reflecting the result of the jackpot lottery, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S1074: Yes), the “stop mode setting process for jackpot” is performed ( In step S1082), if the result of the big win lottery is not a big win (in the case of failure) (step S1074: No), “stopping stop mode setting process” is performed (step S1084).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a flow of stop mode setting processing for jackpot. This process is a process that is executed when the result of the determination of whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful is a process of setting various data for stopping and displaying symbols in a manner corresponding to the jackpot. Here, since there are a plurality of types of jackpots in the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed, the stop display is performed in a manner reflecting such jackpot types. Correspondingly, in the jackpot stop mode setting process, the jackpot type is determined and processing is performed for each type.

  As shown in the figure, first, it is determined whether or not the normal 15R big hit (step S1100), and if it is the normal 15R big hit (step S1100: Yes), the process branches to step S1118 and the normal 15R big hit processing is performed. . Usually, it is not 15R big hit (step S1100: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability change 15R big hit (step S1102), and if it is the probability change 15R big hit (step S1102: Yes), it branches to step S1114 and the probability change. Processing for 15R jackpot is performed. Similarly, if it is not the probability variation 15R big hit (step S1102: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not it is an explicit probability variation 2R big hit (step S1104). If it is the explicit probability variation 2R big hit (step S1104: Yes), go to step S1110. And the processing for explicit probability variation 2R jackpot is performed. If it is not an explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1104: No), it can be determined that it is an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, so processing for an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is performed (step S1106). When processing is branched according to the type of jackpot in this way, in each processing at the branch destination (step S1106, step S1110, step S1114, step S1118), by referring to the “stop mode table” described below, The stop display mode is determined.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a stop mode table. FIG. 19A shows a stop mode table for normal 15R jackpots, FIG. 19B shows a stop mode table for probability variation 15R jackpots, and FIG. 19C shows an implicit probability change 2R. A jackpot stop mode table is shown in FIG. 19D, and an explicit probability variation 2R jackpot stop mode table is shown. As described above, the stop mode table is stored in the stop mode table area 114 of the ROM 110 (see FIG. 7).

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the stop mode table, there are two patterns of symbol display patterns on the segment type display device 70 (columns where “display pattern 1” to “display pattern 2” are shown in the figure). A plurality of stop mode data are set. A reference numerical value is associated with each stop mode data. For example, in the stop mode table for normal 15R jackpot (see FIG. 19A), as shown in the figure, the character “F” is represented for the reference numerical values from “0” to “4”. Stop mode data (data 1) in which a display pattern and a display pattern representing a character “L.” are set are associated with each other.

  When performing stop display of symbols, the stop mode data is read from such a stop mode table, the display pattern of the segment type display device 70 is acquired, and each LED of the segment type display device 70 is turned on according to the acquired display pattern. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the symbol stop display. In the stop mode data, two display patterns of “display pattern 1” and “display pattern 2” are set. Of these, display pattern 1 is displayed on the left display portion 72 (FIG. 4) of the segment type display device 70. Used for the pattern when lighting. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 19, the stop mode table corresponding to 15R jackpot (“stop mode table for normal 15R jackpot” in FIG. 19A) and “probability variation 15R jackpot for FIG. 19B”. In the stop mode table of FIG. 19C, a pattern representing the letter “F” is set in the display pattern 1, while the stop mode table corresponding to the 2R jackpot (“indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” in FIG. 19C). In “stop mode table for use” and “stop mode table for explicit probability variation 2R jackpot” in FIG. 19D), a display pattern representing the number “2” is set in display pattern 1. As a result, the symbol displayed on the left display portion 72 of the segment type display device 70 (the symbol set in the display pattern 1) corresponds to the number of rounds of the jackpot. It is possible to notify.

  On the other hand, the display pattern 2 may be used when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the central display unit 74 or the right display unit 76. At this time, the display unit for stopping and displaying the symbol is determined depending on which of the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b is entered into the operation port and the symbol variation display is performed. Also good. For example, when the entry into the first operation port 25a is triggered, it is displayed on the central display unit 74, and when the entry into the second operation port 25b is triggered, the right display unit 76 is displayed. To display. In this way, it is possible to notify which of the operating ports has entered the ball and triggered the symbol stop display.

  Since the stop mode table is provided for each jackpot type, when reading the stop mode data from the stop mode table, the stop mode table corresponding to each jackpot may be referred to according to the jackpot type. Here, when acquiring stop mode data with reference to the stop mode table, first, a reference numerical value is acquired, and stop mode data associated with the reference numerical value is acquired. As this reference numerical value, a numerical value stored in the jackpot type storage area of the standby area 142j may be used. As described above, since the value of the jackpot type counter is stored in the jackpot type storage area of the standby area 142j, the stop mode data acquired from the stop mode table is thus based on the value of the jackpot type counter. Can be determined.

  Here, in this embodiment, the reference numerical value ranges of the respective stop mode tables correspond to the above-described reference numerical value ranges of the sorting table. For example, in the sorting table for the first working port 25a shown in FIG. 11A, a numerical value from “0” to “9” is normally set as a reference numerical value for 15R big hit. On the other hand, in the stop mode table for normal 15R jackpot shown in FIG. 19A, the stop mode data 1 is associated with the reference numbers from “0” to “4”, and the stop mode data 2 is “ Reference numbers from “5” to “9” are associated with each other, and the entire stop mode table for the normal 15R jackpot is similar to the distribution table in FIG. Numeric values are associated.

  In this way, if the range of the reference numerical value in the distribution table is associated with the range of the reference numerical value in the stop mode table, when the stop mode table is referred to using the value of the jackpot type counter as the reference value, the stop corresponding to the reference value Since the mode data is surely present in the stop mode table, the stop mode data can be reliably acquired. Therefore, the value of the jackpot type counter 141c can be used as a reference value in both cases of referring to the distribution table and referring to the stop mode table. In this way, it is not necessary to store the reference numerical value for the sorting table and the reference numerical value for the stop mode table separately, so that the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved and the processing executed by the MPU 102 can be kept simple. Is possible.

  In addition, by providing a stop mode table for each jackpot type, even if the reference numerical value associated with the distribution table is common among multiple jackpot types, the stop mode data is appropriately acquired. Is possible. For example, in the sorting table for the first working port 25a shown in FIG. 11A, each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” is associated with the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot. Each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” corresponds to the probability variation 15R jackpot in the distribution table for the second working port 25b shown in FIG. 11B (“10” in FIG. 11B). ”To“ 29 ”(see the point that the probability variation 15R jackpot is associated). Corresponding to this, in the stop mode table of FIG. 19, the stop mode table for the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (see FIG. 19C) and the stop mode table for the probability variation 15R jackpot (FIG. 19B). Each reference numerical value from “10” to “14” is set in any stop mode table. Therefore, it is difficult to appropriately obtain stop mode data used for symbol stop display and perform stop display in a predetermined mode only from the reference numerical value. In this regard, if the stop mode table is divided for each jackpot type and the stop mode table to be referred to is determined and then the stop mode table is referred to, the desired stop mode data can be reliably acquired.

  In general, when a plurality of operation ports are provided and a sorting table is provided for each operation port, a plurality of jackpot types for the same reference numerical value (reference values from “10” to “14” in the above-described example) as described above. However, even in such a case, if a stop mode table is provided for each jackpot type and a stop mode table to be referenced is determined, stop mode data corresponding to the jackpot type can be reliably acquired. It is. In this way, the range of the reference numerical value is made different among the distribution tables so that a plurality of jackpot types do not correspond to the reference numerical value (for example, “0” to “29” as the reference numerical value in the first operating port 25a). Therefore, it is not necessary to use numerical values from “30” to “59” for the second working port 25b, so that the structure of the sorting table can be kept simple. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide a jackpot type counter for each sorting table (for each of the plurality of operation ports) due to different reference numerical values for each sorting table, so that the configuration of the main controller 100 can be kept simple. It is.

In the jackpot stop mode setting process of FIG. 18, after determining the jackpot type, the respective jackpot type stop mode tables are referred to as described above (steps S1106, S1110, S1114, and S1118). At this time, stop mode data corresponding to the reference numerical value may be read from the stop mode table and stored in the RAM 140. However, since the stop mode data stores lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, the data structure is complicated. Or the data size tends to be large. Thus, in this embodiment, the stop mode data is not read, but the address of the storage area in which the stop mode data is stored is acquired. In this way, since the stop mode data can be easily acquired by accessing the acquired address without storing the stop mode data in the RAM 140, the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved. Further, since it is not necessary to perform processing for transferring the data in the ROM 110 to the RAM 140, it is possible to reduce the processing burden on the MPU 102 that controls the ROM 110 and the RAM 140.

  When the address of the stop mode data is acquired with reference to the stop mode table (step S1106, step S1110, step S1114, step S1118), this time, a flag for storing the jackpot type is set according to the jackpot type. That is, if the normal 15R jackpot is set, the normal 15R jackpot flag is set (step S1120). If the probability variation 15R jackpot is set, the probability variation 15R jackpot flag is set (step S1116). Is set (step S1112), and if it is an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag is set (step S1106). After that, the address of the stop mode data acquired previously is stored in the RAM 140 (step S1122), the jackpot stop mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the variable display start process of FIG.

  In the variable display start process, when the determination result of whether or not the big hit lottery is a big hit, the above-described stop mode setting process for the big hit is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong (step S1074: No), a stop mode setting process for removal is performed (step S1084).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a flow of stop mode setting processing for detachment. This process is a process of setting various data relating to the stop display of the symbols in order to stop and display the symbols of the segment type display device 70 in a manner corresponding to the loss in response to the fact that the result of the lottery lottery is missed. . Here, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of “out of normal” and “out of special” as described above with reference to FIG. Corresponding to this, in the stop mode setting process for detachment, it is determined whether it is special detachment or normal detachment, and by setting the data associated with each detachment type, stop display according to the detachment type The aspect of is changed. Whether it is special off or normal off can be determined by referring to the jackpot lottery table, but the jackpot lottery table has a jackpot lottery table for the non-probable change state and a jackpot lottery table for the probability change state (FIG. 10). Therefore, in the outage stop mode setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state (FIG. 20: step S1140). As described above, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state can be determined by referring to the “probability variation state flag” in the flag area 143.

  In the case of the probability variation state (step S1140: Yes), it may be determined whether or not it is special out by referring to the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state (S1142). As described above, the lottery value and the lottery result are associated with the jackpot lottery table. Therefore, by referring to the jackpot lottery table with the lottery random number storage area of the standby area 142j as the lottery value, it is possible to make a special departure. It is possible to determine whether or not. Similarly, in the case of the non-probability change state (step S1140: No), it is determined whether or not it is special out by referring to the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability change state. In the case of special outage (step S1146: Yes), the stop mode table for special outage is referred to (step S1148), and in the case of no special outage (step S1146: No), stop for normal outage The mode table is referred to (step S1150).

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a stop mode table for special removal and a stop mode table for normal removal. The special outage stop mode table shown in FIG. 21A and the normal out stop mode table shown in FIG. 21B are the aforementioned jackpot stop mode tables (see FIG. 19). In the same manner as the above, the stop mode data in which the LED lighting pattern of the segment type display device 70 is set is associated with the reference numerical value. Similarly to the jackpot stop mode table, the stop mode table for special disconnection (the stop mode table for special release and the stop mode table for normal release) is also stored in the stop mode table area 114 of the ROM 110.

  Here, whether the special failure or normal failure is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number storage area (the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a), corresponding to this, the stop mode data from the stop mode table for outage Is used as a reference numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area. At this time, lottery values (“157” and “457” in the example of FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B) associated with the lottery result of “special loss” in the jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 10). In this example, “157”) is set in the special outage stop mode table (see FIG. 21A).

  In this way, when referring to the stop mode table for special outage when a special outage occurs, the stop mode data corresponding to the reference value can be reliably acquired only by using the numerical value of the jackpot random number storage area as the reference value. Can do. In this way, it is not necessary to separately provide a numerical counter for referring to the stop mode table, so that the storage capacity of the RAM 140 can be saved. In addition, since it is not necessary to frequently switch the counter to be referred to, the program can be kept simple, the capacity of the program area 111 can be saved, and the load on the MPU 102 that executes the program can be reduced. .

  Also, with regard to the normal outage stop mode table (see FIG. 21 (b)), the lottery value set in the lottery result of “normal out” in the big hit lottery table is the same as the special outage stop mode table. All you need to do is set. In this way, even in the case of a normal deviation, the stop mode data corresponding to the deviation can be reliably obtained by using the numerical value in the jackpot random number storage area as the reference numerical value.

  As described above, the stop mode data can be acquired by referring to the stop mode table. However, in the stop mode setting process for losing in FIG. Instead of reading the data itself, the address of the storage area where the stop mode data is stored is acquired. Then, in the case of a special outage, after setting a “special outage flag” indicating that it is a special out (FIG. 20: step S1152), the address of the stop mode data is stored in the RAM 140 (step S1154). When the preparation for performing the stop display is completed by performing the above processes, the outage stop mode setting process in FIG. 20 is terminated, and the process returns to the variable display start process in FIG.

  As described above, in the variable display start process of FIG. 16, a big hit stop mode setting process is performed in the case of a big win (step S1082), and a outage stop mode setting process is executed in the case of a big hit ( Step S1084) prepares to execute the stop display in a manner corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery. When the preparation for the stop display is completed in this way, the process of setting the symbol variable display time (FIG. 17: “variable display time setting process” in step S1086) is subsequently executed.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display time setting process. As shown in the figure, in the variable display time setting process, first, the numerical value of the variable type counter 141d is acquired (step S1180). Since the variation type counter 141d is provided in the counter area 141 of the RAM 140, the MPU 102 can access the RAM 140 and acquire the value of the variation type counter 141d. If the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d is acquired in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation display time by referring to the “fluctuation display time table” in which the value of the fluctuation type counter 141d and the fluctuation display time are associated with each other. Become.

  However, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the reach effect with the effect display device 30 as described above, and in such reach effect, the effect time tends to be longer than the normal effect. . Therefore, when setting the variable display time of the symbol of the segment type display device 70, the variable display time table to be referred is switched according to whether or not the reach effect is performed (step S1182).

  Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, normal 15R jackpot, probability variation 15R jackpot) and when it is special out Reach production will be performed. As described above, when a big hit or special loss occurs, each flag in the flag area 143 (an implicit certain variation 2R big hit flag, an explicit certain variation 2R big hit flag, a certain variation 15R big hit flag, a normal 15R big hit flag, a special out flag) is set. Therefore, refer to each flag in the flag area 143 to determine whether or not the reach effect is to be performed. It is possible to determine whether.

  In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the numerical value of the reach random number storage area of the standby area 142j (the numerical value acquired from the reach random number counter 141e) can be obtained even if it is not such a big hit or special loss. In the case of numerical values, a reach effect is performed. Since the reach random number counter 141e is a counter that takes a random numerical value, it is possible to randomly generate a reach effect by determining whether or not to perform a reach effect based on the value of the reach random number counter 141e. Even if a reach effect is generated randomly even if it is not a big win, it is difficult for a player to be sure that a big win will occur even if a reach effect occurs. Continue to pay attention to the effect display device 30 until it becomes clear. Thereby, it is possible to attract a player's interest to a game.

  If it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S1182: Yes), it is then determined whether or not “indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” or “special loss” (step S1192). Then, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot or extraordinary loss (step S1192: Yes), the variation display time is acquired from the variation display time table for the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1196). On the other hand, when neither the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot nor the special loss is found (step S1192: No), the variable display time is acquired from the variable display time table for normal reach production (step S1194).

  As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the operation of the large entrance 60 and the operation of the electric accessory 41 are made to be the same or similar in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the case of special outage. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player to the game with the expectation that the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred even in the case of a special loss. In this regard, in addition to the operation of the large entrance 60 and the operation of the electric accessory 41, if the display time of the variation of the symbol is matched, the bullet ball will be used in the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot and in the case of a special loss. The operation of the gaming machine 10 can be made more similar. Therefore, if the same variable display time table (in the example of FIG. 22, the variable display time table for the explicit probability variable 2R jackpot) is referred to in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the case of special loss in this way, it is not explicit. It is possible to easily make the symbol variation time the same in the case of the probability variation 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss.

  On the other hand, when the reach effect is not executed (step S1182: No), subsequently, a process of acquiring the number of reservations of the operation port 25 is performed (step S1184). That is, when the number of holdings is large, the player may stop firing the game ball because there are enough holdings or the number of holdings cannot be increased beyond the upper limit. From this point of view, it is desirable to quickly digest the suspension when the number of suspensions is large. Therefore, in the variable display time setting process, the number of holds is acquired in order to appropriately set the variable display time according to the number of holds. As described above, the hold number can be acquired by accessing the total hold number storage area 142i, the hold number storage area 142a, and the hold number storage area 142e of the hold storage area 142.

  If the number of holds is acquired, it is then determined whether or not the high support mode is being executed (step S1186). As described above, the high support mode is an operation mode in which the electric accessory 41 opens and closes in a manner that allows easy entry of the game ball. Therefore, in the high support mode, the game ball enters the second operation port 25b. It is easy to accumulate hold. Therefore, a variable display time table for the high support mode is prepared, and during the execution of the high support mode (step S1186: Yes), the variable display time table for the high support mode is referred to (step S1190). In this way, by setting the variable display time of the variable display time table for the high support mode to a short time, it becomes possible to quickly digest the stored suspension. As a result, in the high support mode, game balls frequently enter the second operating port 25b and the symbol variation display is completed in a short time, and the symbol variation display is performed from one to the next. It becomes possible to enjoy a game with a sense of speed.

  On the other hand, when not in the high support mode (step S1186: No), the variable display time may be acquired from the variable display time table for the low support mode (step S1188). In this way, the variable display time table to be referred to is determined according to the presence or absence of the reach effect and the high support mode, and when the variable display time is acquired from the variable display time table, the acquired variable display time is stored in the general-purpose area 146 of the RAM 140. Remember. Note that when the variable display time is acquired from the variable display time table, the variable display time to be acquired is determined based on the number of reservations acquired in step S1184. For example, the variable display time table may be set in association with the hold number and the variable display time, and the variable display time corresponding to the hold number may be acquired. By doing so, it is possible to set an appropriate variable display time according to the number of holds.

  When the symbol variation display time is set by the above processes, the variation display time setting processing in FIG. 22 is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation display start processing in FIGS. Note that the variable display time acquired from the variable display time table may be stored in the general-purpose area 146 of the RAM 140 or stored in a counter in the MPU 102. As will be described later, when the symbol variation display is started, the elapsed time is counted, but if the obtained variation display time is stored in the counter in the MPU 102, the counter is counted down at a predetermined pace and the counter is counted. It is preferable that the change display time can be easily detected by detecting that “0” becomes “0”.

After returning to the variation display start process of FIGS. 16 to 17 (FIG. 17: Step S1086), in order to notify the sub-control device 200 that the symbol variation display is to be executed, the “variation start command” and “game result” The command "is stored in the command buffer 145 described above (step S1088). The change start command includes information on the previously set change display time and information on the presence / absence of reach production, and the sub-control device 200 receives the change start command, whereby the symbol on the segment type display device 70 is displayed. The effect display device 30 can display the effect symbols in a variable manner or perform a reach effect in accordance with the change display time. Further, the game result command includes information on the result of the game times related to the current variation display. For example, various types of information (such as jackpot type and losing type) regarding the jackpot lottery result are included, and by receiving a game result command, the sub-control device 200 causes the jackpot lottery result, jackpot type, or losing Various effects can be executed according to the type. Note that these commands stored in the command buffer 145 are transmitted to the sub-control device 200 during the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) as described above.

  When the command is stored in the command buffer 145, preparation for executing the symbol variation display is completed, and the variation display is actually started (step S1090). As a result, since the variable display of symbols is started on the segment type display device 70, the variable display start processing of FIGS. 16 to 17 is terminated and the processing returns to the symbol game processing of FIG. 14 (see step S1038 of FIG. 14). ).

  In addition, in the segment type display device 70 of the present embodiment, there are provided three display units, that is, a left display unit 72, a central display unit 74, and a right display unit 76. What is necessary is just to determine the display part which performs a variable display according to whether the opportunity of a variable display is the entrance to the 1st operation port 25a, or the entrance to the 2nd operation port 25b. In the present embodiment, when the variable display is performed when the ball enters the first operating port 25a, the central display unit 74 performs the variable display, and the variable image is displayed when the ball enters the second operating port 25b. When performing, the right display part 76 shall carry out a variable display.

  In the symbol game process of FIG. 14, when the symbol variation display is not performed (step S1032: No), the symbol variation display is started by executing the above-described variation display preparation processing and variation display start processing. To do. On the other hand, when the symbol variation display is being executed (step S1032: Yes), in order to continue the symbol variation display until the variation display time elapses, the “variable display continuation process” described below is executed. (Step S1040).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display continuation process. As shown in the figure, in the variable display continuation process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S1210). Whether or not the variable display time has elapsed can be determined by various methods, but simply, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display is measured using a timer circuit or the like provided in the main controller 100. Then, the determination may be made by comparing with the variable display time set in the above-described variable display time setting process (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, it is also possible to determine whether or not the variable display time has elapsed by counting the clock pulses of the MPU 102. For example, the counter is counted up every time a predetermined number of clock pulses are counted, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value corresponding to the variable display time, an interrupt is generated and the variable display time has elapsed. A flag indicating this is set by interrupt processing. By examining whether or not this flag is set, it can be determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. In general, since a clock pulse has an accurate time period, it is possible to accurately detect the elapse of the fluctuation display time by counting the clock pulse.

  Alternatively, it is possible to detect the passage of the variable display time by counting the number of loops of the main loop process (see FIG. 13). That is, as described above, since the main loop process is repeatedly executed every 4 msec, the elapsed time can be estimated from the number of repetitions (the number of loops). If it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed by counting the number of loops in this way, it is not necessary to provide a separate timer circuit or the like, so the device configuration of the main control device 100 can be kept simple. It is. Furthermore, it is possible to measure time by updating a counter when a timer interrupt process described later is executed. Since the timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined time period, if the counter is updated when the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the counter corresponds to the elapsed time. Such a case is also preferable because it is not necessary to separately provide a timer circuit or the like.

  When the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1210 in FIG. 23: No), the lighting pattern of the LED of the segment type display device 70 is changed (S1212). As described above, since the symbol game process is repeatedly executed every 4 msec (see FIG. 13), the variable display continuation process executed in the symbol game process is also repeatedly executed every 4 msec. Therefore, if the LED lighting pattern is changed during the variable display continuation process, the LED lighting pattern can be repeatedly changed until the variable display time elapses. However, if the LED lighting pattern is changed at intervals of 4 msec, the change interval is too short, and in actuality, it may be updated at intervals of about 0.1 seconds. For example, if the LED lighting pattern is changed when the variable display continuation process is repeated 25 times, the LED lighting pattern can be changed at intervals of 0.1 seconds. Thus, by repeatedly changing the lighting pattern of the LED of the segment type display device 70 at a fast cycle, it becomes possible to execute the variable display of symbols on the segment type display device 70.

  If the variable display time elapses while the LED lighting pattern of the segment type display device 70 is repeatedly changed, it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed in step S1210 (step S1210: Yes). The “variable display end process” of S1214 is executed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of the variable display end process. This process is a process in which when the variable display time of the symbol of the segment type display device 70 elapses, the segment type display device 70 displays the stop of the symbol. As shown in the drawing, when the process is started, first, in order to acquire stop mode data (see FIGS. 19 and 21) in which the symbol stop mode is set, the stop acquired in the stop mode setting process described above. The address of the mode data (see step S1122 in FIG. 18 and step S1154 in FIG. 20) is read from the RAM 140 (step S1230). Next, stop mode data is acquired from the table area 113 of the ROM 110 based on the acquired address (step S1232).

  As described above, since the LED display pattern of the segment type display device 70 is set in the stop mode data (see FIG. 19 or FIG. 20), the LED may be turned on according to the set display pattern. . Although two display patterns of “display pattern 1” and “display pattern 2” are set in the stop mode data, “display pattern 2” may be used for the stop display of symbols. In addition, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the central display unit 74 performs a variable display triggered by entering the first operating port 25a, and enters the second operating port 25b. The right display unit 76 performs a change display as an opportunity. Correspondingly, in the case of variable display triggered by entering the first operating port 25a, the central display unit 74 displays a stop display of the symbol, and triggered by entering the second operating port 25b. In the case of the variable display to be performed, the symbol display may be performed by the right display unit 76. Therefore, when the stop mode data is acquired (step S1232), by referring to the variable display target flag in order to determine which of the central display unit 74 and the right display unit 76 performs the stop display, It is specified which variation opening of the symbol currently being executed is a variation display triggered by the entry of a ball into any of the operating ports (step S1234).

When the target of the fluctuation display is to enter the second working port 25b (Step S1236: Yes), the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed by the right display unit 76. Accordingly, the symbol of the symbol is displayed by the right display unit 76 correspondingly. Stop display is performed (step S1240). At this time, it is possible to perform stop display in a mode set in the stop mode data by lighting each LED of the right display unit 76 according to the display pattern 2 of the stop mode data. On the other hand, when entering the first operating port 25a instead of entering the second operating port 25b, the central display unit corresponds to the fact that the symbol change display is performed on the central display unit 74. In 74, the symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1238). Also at this time, it is possible to perform stop display in a mode set in the stop mode data by lighting each LED of the central display unit 74 according to the stop mode data. When the symbol display is terminated by performing the stop display in the segment type display device 70 in this way, the variation display end processing in FIG. 24 is terminated and the variation display continuation processing in FIG. 23 is resumed (see step S1214 in FIG. 23). ). After returning to the variation display continuation process, a “variation end command” for notifying the sub-control device 200 that the symbol variation display has ended is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1216). Thereafter, the variation display continuation process is terminated, and the process returns to the symbol game process of FIG. 14 (see step S1040 of FIG. 14).

  As described above, in the symbol game process, various processes related to the determination of whether or not the big hit lottery is made and the symbol variation display and stop display are executed. When the symbol variation display is executed, if the success / failure result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot. When the big hit occurs in this way, the game of the ball game machine 10 is executed by the “game state transition process” (FIG. 13: step S1008) executed after the symbol game process in the main loop process (see FIG. 13). The state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game state transition process. As shown in the figure, in the game state transition process, first, it is determined whether or not the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is being executed (step S1260). That is, since the game state transition process is repeatedly executed within the main loop process of FIG. 13, there is a case where the game state transition process has already been performed and the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 has been executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the open / close mode is being executed, and only when the open / close mode is not being executed, processing for starting the open / close mode is performed. As will be described later, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, since the “open / close mode flag” is set when the open / close mode is started, whether the open / close mode is being executed by referring to this open / close mode flag. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  If the open / close mode is not being executed (step S1260: NO), it is first determined whether or not the symbol variable display of the segment type display device 70 has been completed (step S1262). As described above, the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is started after the symbol variation display is finished and the symbol is stopped and displayed. When the symbol variation display is not terminated, the opening / closing mode is started. The game state transition process is terminated without any processing (step S1262: No). If the variable display has been completed (step S1262: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the open / close mode is actually started (step S1264).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the big entrance 60 is executed when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (usually 15R big win, probability variation 15R big hit, unspecified probability variation 2R big hit, explicit probability variation 2R big hit) This is the case and special off-line case. Therefore, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery corresponds to these. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the flags corresponding to each jackpot type (normal 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) ) Is set (refer to “Big jackpot stop mode setting process” in FIG. 18), it is possible to check the result of the jackpot lottery by referring to these flags. Similarly, in the case of a special outage, a special outage flag is set (see step S1152 in FIG. 20). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a special outage has occurred by referring to the special outage flag.

When it is determined that the open / close mode is to be started (step S1264 in FIG. 25: Yes), the open / close mode start process of step S1266 is executed. In this processing, the above-described opening / closing mode flag is set. Also, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, even if the open / close mode is started, when the big hit or special loss occurs, the large entrance 60 is not immediately started to open / close, but waits for a predetermined time. After that, the opening / closing operation starts. Therefore, in order to detect the lapse of the standby time, the standby time is set in the timer of the MPU 102. Thus, if a predetermined waiting time (opening time) is provided before the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 is started, the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 is started before the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 is started. It is possible to perform an effect (opening effect) that informs the player that it will start. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the jackpot game and the like. In addition, if a waiting time is provided, the actual opening / closing operation can be started after the preparation process for executing the opening / closing mode has been completed with certainty, so the opening / closing operation is started in an incomplete state. It is possible to avoid the situation and appropriately execute the open / close mode. For example, the sub-control device 200 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 30 in accordance with the open / close mode. Since such an effect image has a large data size, it takes time to read from the ROM in the sub-control device 200. Sometimes. Even in such a case, by providing the standby time, it is possible to appropriately display the effect image in accordance with the start of the open / close mode.

  The opening time is stored in advance in the ROM 110, and can be read from the ROM 110 and set in the timer. In this embodiment, when the open / close mode is executed in the high-frequency entry mode (usually in the case of 15R jackpot or probability variation 15R jackpot), the opening time is set to “1 second”. On the other hand, in the low-frequency entry mode (in the case of non-explicit probability change 2R big hit, explicit probability change 2R big hit, special outage), it is set to “0.2 seconds” shorter than in the high-frequency entry mode. As will be described later, in the low-frequency entry mode, the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 is performed quickly and the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is completed quickly. If this is done, a series of games from the start to the end of the open / close mode can be progressed at a good tempo. As a result, it is possible to give the player a refreshing feeling.

  Although various timers can be used as timers for measuring the passage of time, in this embodiment, a countdown timer that measures time by counting down a numerical value set in a counter at a constant time interval. Is used. The countdown timer is provided in the main control device 100. The countdown timer measures the elapsed time by repeatedly counting down the numerical value of the counter at a constant time interval, and detects that the value of the counter has become “0”. It is possible to detect that the time set in the counter has elapsed.

  When the opening / closing mode start process is executed (step S1266), the LED of the left display unit 72 of the segment type display device 70 is then turned on according to the stop mode data in the stop mode table. That is, as described above, in the stop mode data of the stop mode table, in addition to the display pattern (display pattern 2) used for display on the central display unit 74 and the right display unit 76, the display pattern used for display on the left display unit 72 Since (display pattern 1) is set, the LED of the left display section 72 is turned on according to this display pattern 1. As described above, in the jackpot stop mode data, the display pattern 1 corresponds to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (see FIG. 19). The left display part 72 can be used as a round number display part.

In the subsequent step S1270, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R jackpot (usually 15R jackpot or probability variation 15R jackpot). Such a determination can usually be made by referring to the 15R jackpot flag or the probability variation 15R jackpot flag. In the case of 15R jackpot (step S1270: Yes), “15” is set to the remaining round counter 141g that counts the remaining number of times (number of rounds) to open the large entrance 60 (step S1274). On the other hand, if it is not a 15R jackpot (step S1270: No), since it corresponds to the type of opening the big entrance 60 twice, such as an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, an explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, or a special loss, the remaining round counter 141g is set to “2” (step S1
272).

  After the round remaining number counter 141g is set, an “opening start command” is stored in the command buffer 145 in order to notify the sub-control device 200 that the open / close mode is started and the opening time is reached. The opening start command stored in the command buffer 145 is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) described above, and the sub-control device 200 receives this and synchronizes with the start of the open / close mode. It is possible to excite the game by executing various effects processing. In addition, the opening start command can include information for notifying whether the opening / closing mode to be started is the low-frequency entry mode or the high-frequency entry mode. In 200, it is possible to determine the content of the effect based on the type of the open / close mode, such as switching the content of the effect according to the low frequency entrance mode or the high frequency entrance mode.

  After the opening start command is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1276), various signals are output to the external output terminal 910 in order to output various information related to the start of the open / close mode to the outside (step S1278). . For example, referring to each flag indicating the type of jackpot (normally 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag), if any flag is set, jackpot Set the voltage of the terminal that tells you that has occurred to a high level. By doing so, the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910 can recognize that the jackpot has occurred. Of course, as described above, a signal may be output even in the case of extraordinary loss, or a signal notifying not only of the big hit but also the type of the big hit may be output.

  When the execution of the open / close mode is started by the above process, when the game state transition process is called again in the main loop process of FIG. 13, it is determined that the open / close mode is being executed in step S1260 of FIG. (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1280. In step S1280, the previously set opening time is determined by referring to the previously set countdown timer. If the opening time has not ended (step S1280: No), in order to wait until the opening time ends, the game state transition process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process (see FIG. 13). Thus, until the opening time is completed, it is determined as “No” in step S1280 and the process returns to the main loop process, so that the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 can be waited until the opening time ends. If the opening time ends while waiting while repeating the determination in step S1280 in this way, “Yes” is determined in step S1280, and the process proceeds to “large entrance opening / closing process” in step S1282.

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the flow of the large entrance opening / closing process. This process is a process of actually opening and closing the large entrance 60 upon completion of the opening time. When the large entrance opening / closing process is started, it is first determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is in an open state, and the process is branched depending on whether or not it is open (step S1310). If the large entrance 60 is not being opened (step S1310: No), it is then checked whether or not the remaining round counter 141g is “0” (step S1312). When the remaining round counter 141g is “0” (step S1312: Yes), all the rounds have been digested, and it is not necessary to open the large entrance 60. When finished, the process returns to the game state transition process of FIG.

On the other hand, if the remaining round counter 141g is not “0”, it is subsequently determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1314). If the countdown timer is not “0”, the large entrance The opening / closing process is terminated (step S1314: No). That is, as will be described later, the countdown timer is set when the large entrance 60 is closed because the time for closing the large entrance 60 (closed time) is set to “0”. Until the closing time (until the closing time set in the countdown timer elapses) is reached, the process is terminated without opening the large entrance 60. By doing so, it is possible to repeat the opening / closing operation of the large entrance 60 at appropriate time intervals while keeping the large entrance 60 in the closed state until the set closing time elapses.

  When the countdown timer is “0” (step S1314: Yes), since the predetermined time (set closing time) has elapsed after the large entrance 60 is closed, the large entrance 60 is opened. The “large entrance opening process” is performed (step S1316). In such a process, the large entrance opening driving section 62 is driven to open the large entrance opening 60 by transmitting a drive signal to the large entrance opening driving section 62 connected to the main control device 100.

  Even when the large entrance 60 is thus opened, as described above, if a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60 or if a predetermined time has elapsed after the release, It is necessary to return the entrance 60 to the original closed state again. Therefore, when the large entrance 60 is opened, subsequently, “condition counter setting process at opening” in step S1318 to set various counters used for determining whether to return from the opened state to the closed state. Execute.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of condition counter setting processing at the time of opening. In this process, first, it is determined whether the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is executed in the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode (S1360). That is, the high-frequency entry mode and the low-frequency entry mode differ in the time (opening time) until the large entrance 60 is closed as described above. This can be caused by setting different conditions for returning to the closed state. Therefore, the process is branched depending on whether the open / close mode to be executed is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and different conditions are set for each mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency entry mode is normally executed in the case of 15R jackpot or probability variation 15R jackpot, and in the case of non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot or special outage, the low frequency The entrance mode is to be executed. Therefore, in step S1360, by referring to the flags corresponding to each jackpot type (usually 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) and special outlier flags, It may be determined whether or not to execute the entry mode.

  When the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is executed in the high-frequency entrance mode (step S1360: Yes), the above-described countdown timer is set to “30 seconds” (step S1362). On the other hand, when executing in the low-frequency entry mode (step S1360: No), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds” (step S1366). In this way, in the high-frequency entry mode, the large entrance 60 can be opened for a longer time than in the low-frequency entry mode, so that the game ball is easier to enter. It is possible to execute the open / close mode.

In the case of the high-frequency entry mode, “10” is set in the remaining entry counter (step S1364). As will be described later, since the remaining number counter is counted down by one when there is a ball entering the large ball slot 60, when the set number of game balls have entered, the remaining ball counter is “0”. become. As a result, it is possible to detect that there has been a set number of balls. On the other hand, in the low-frequency entry mode, the numerical value of the remaining entry counter is set to “6” by making it smaller than that in the high-frequency entry mode (step S1368). In this way, in the low frequency entry mode, the large entrance 60 can be closed with a smaller number of entries than in the high frequency entry mode. The number of winning balls paid out for entering the entrance 60 can be reduced as compared with the high-frequency entry mode.

  When the condition counter setting process of FIG. 28 is completed and the large entrance opening / closing process of FIG. 26 is resumed (step S1318), this time, the sub control device 200 is notified that the large entrance 60 has been opened. Therefore, the “large entrance opening command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1320). The large entrance opening command includes information on whether the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode. By transmitting to the sub-control device 200, the sub-control device 200 can grasp whether the open / close mode is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and can execute an effect corresponding to each mode. It becomes.

  When the large entrance opening / closing process in FIG. 26 is thus completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process in FIG. 25 (see step S1282 in FIG. 25), and after performing each process from step S1284 to step S1292 described later, Returning to the main loop process of FIG. Since each process is repeatedly executed in the main loop process as shown in FIG. 13, the game state transition process in FIG. 25 is executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the large entrance opening / closing is performed in step S1282. The process is executed again. Then, since the large entrance 60 is now open, “Yes” is determined in step S1310 (see FIG. 26) of the large entrance opening / closing process, and the process proceeds to step S1322 in FIG.

  In the state shifted to step S1322, as described above, the large entrance 60 is in an open state, so it is determined whether or not the large entrance 60 is closed this time. First, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1322). As described above, since the time (opening time) for maintaining the large entrance 60 in the open state is set in the countdown timer (see steps S1362 and S1366 in FIG. 28), the countdown timer is “0”. In that case, it can be determined that the opening time has elapsed. Therefore, when the countdown timer is “0” (step S1322: Yes), the “large entrance opening closing process” in step S1330 is executed to close the large entrance 60. In the large entrance opening closing process, a drive signal is transmitted to the large entrance opening driving unit 62 to drive the large entrance opening driving unit 62 so that the large entrance 60 is closed.

  On the other hand, when the countdown timer is not “0”, since the opening time has not yet elapsed, it is not necessary to close the large entrance 60 immediately. However, even if the opening time has not elapsed, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the large entrance 60, the large entrance 60 may be closed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the countdown timer is not “0” (step S1322: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the large ball inlet 60 (step S1324). If there is, the remaining ball counter is counted down (step S1326). As a result of counting down the remaining number counter, if the remaining number counter becomes “0” (step S1328: Yes), it means that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large entrance 60. In order to close the large entrance 60, the large entrance closing process described above is executed (step S1330). If the remaining number counter is not “0” (step S1328: No), since the predetermined number of balls has not been reached, the large ball opening / closing process is terminated without closing the large ball opening 60. do it. If there is no entry to the large entrance 60 (step S1324: No), the large entrance closing process may be ended as it is without counting down the remaining entry counter. The presence or absence of a ball entering the large ball opening 60 can be determined by the main control device 100 reading out the detection state of the sensor 60s provided in the large ball port 60.

  When the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S1328: Yes), the large ball opening 60 is closed by closing the large ball opening 60 (step S1330) and the large ball opening 60 is closed. As a result, one round is completed, and “1” is subtracted from the remaining round counter 141g (step S1332). Next, in order to determine whether or not the predetermined number of rounds has been completed, it is determined whether or not the remaining round counter is “0” (step S1334). If the remaining round counter is not “0” (step S1334: No), the round still remains, so it is necessary to open the large entrance 60 again. Therefore, in order to set various counters used when the large entrance 60 is again opened, the “condition counter setting process at closing” in step S1336 is executed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a flow of condition counter setting processing at the time of closing. In this process, similar to the above-described “opening condition counter setting process”, the process branches depending on whether or not the high-frequency entry mode is set, and the condition for shifting to the open state is set for each mode. In the case of the high-frequency entry mode (step S1380: Yes), the countdown timer is set to “2 seconds” (step S1382). As a result, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the countdown timer was set, “Yes” is determined in step S1314 of the large entrance opening / closing process (see FIG. 26), and as a result, the large entrance ball The mouth 60 is opened (step S1316). Thus, the large entrance 60 can be kept closed until a predetermined closing time (2 seconds in this example) elapses, and the large entrance 60 can be shifted to an open state after the closing time has elapsed. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the case of the low-frequency entry mode (step S1380: No in FIG. 29), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds”. By doing so, the large entrance 60 can be opened as soon as a short time has passed since the large entrance 60 was closed. Further, as described above, in the low-frequency entry mode, even if the large entrance 60 is opened, the large entrance 60 is closed immediately (in step S1336 of the open condition counter setting process in FIG. 28). (See that the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds”). Therefore, in the low-frequency entry mode, the opening and closing of the large entrance 60 are repeated in a short time, and all rounds are completed quickly. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game with a sense of speed or to end the open / close mode without the player noticing that the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 has been executed. As described above, in the case of the unspecified probability variation 2R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the transition to the probability variation state is made after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, so that the transition to the probability variation state is realized without the player being aware of this. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by giving the player the surprise that a big hit is likely to occur soon.

  In order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the open / close mode has been executed, it is sufficient that the opening time of the large entrance 60 is short, and the closing time is not necessarily short. That is, it is difficult for the player to notice that the large entrance 60 is opening and closing even when the large entrance 60 is closed. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set the closing time short. Of course, the closing time may be set short. In such a case, since the entire opening / closing mode is completed quickly, the opening / closing mode can be executed in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player. These closing time and opening time may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read out from the ROM 110, and set in the countdown timer.

When the closing time is set in the countdown timer (step S1382 or step S1384 in FIG. 29), the condition counter setting process at the time of closing is terminated and the large entrance opening closing process in FIG. 27 is resumed (see step S1336 in FIG. 27). ). Next, in order to notify the sub control device 200 that the large entrance 60 has been closed, a “large entrance close command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1338). The large entrance closing command includes information on whether the open / close mode is the high frequency entrance mode or the low frequency entrance mode, and the sub-control device 200 receives the large entrance exit command. Thus, it is possible to execute effects corresponding to the respective modes.

  On the other hand, when the remaining round counter is “0” (step S1334: Yes), an ending start process is executed (step S1340). That is, it is possible to end the open / close mode since all rounds have ended, but in this embodiment, the open / close mode is not immediately ended after the end of all rounds, but a predetermined time (ending time) is set. After the elapse, the open / close mode is terminated. Therefore, in step S1340, processing for setting such an ending time in the countdown timer is performed. The ending time may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read from the ROM 110, and set in the countdown timer. In this way, when the ending time elapses, the countdown timer becomes “0”, so that the ending time elapse can be detected.

  When such an ending time is provided, various effects can be performed during the ending time. For example, if the player enters the probability change state after the open / close mode ends, it is possible to notify the player of the fact that it will change to the probability change state, or the player aims to win a big hit again. It is also possible to perform various effects that excite the game so as to continue the game. Therefore, when the ending start process is executed (step S1340), an “ending start command” is set in the command buffer 145 to notify the sub-control device 200 that the ending time has started (step S1342). Such an ending start command includes information on whether the open / close mode is the high-frequency entry mode or the low-frequency entry mode, and the sub-control device 200 receives the ending start command to determine whether the high-frequency entry mode is selected. An effect mode can be determined according to the low-frequency entry mode. Similarly to the other commands, the ending start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) in the main loop process, so the sub-control device 200 is synchronized with the start of the ending time. It is possible to start production.

  In this embodiment, “1 second” is set in the countdown timer in the case of the high-frequency entry mode, and “0.2 seconds” is set in the case of the low-frequency entry mode. As described above, in the low-frequency entry mode, the large entrance 60 is opened and closed in a short time. Therefore, if the ending time is shortened accordingly, a series of operations from the start to the end of the open / close mode are performed. The operation can be performed quickly. By doing so, it becomes possible to advance the game at a good tempo and enhance the exhilaration of the game.

  As described above, in the large entrance opening / closing process, the large entrance 60 is opened and closed to digest the round, and when all the rounds are digested, the ending time is set to the countdown timer. When the large entrance opening / closing process is completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process of FIG. 25 (see step S1282 of FIG. 25).

  After returning to the gaming state transition process, it is then determined by referring to the remaining round counter 141g whether or not all rounds have been completed (step S1284). If the remaining round counter 141g is “0” (step S1284: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by referring to the countdown timer (step S1286). If all rounds have been completed and the ending time has ended (step S1286: Yes), in order to end the open / close mode, an “open / close mode end transition process” (step S1288) or an open / close mode end process ( Step S1292) is executed. On the other hand, if all the rounds have not ended (step S1284: No), or the ending time has not ended (step S1286: No), the open / close mode is continued, so the game state transition process is ended as it is.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are flowcharts showing the flow of the transition process at the end of the open / close mode. This process is a process of shifting the gaming state to various states with the end of the open / close mode of the large entrance 60. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, by executing such processing after the end of the ending time (immediately before the end of the open / close mode) (step S1288 in FIG. 25), the gaming state is set to a predetermined value after the end of the open / close mode. It is possible to shift to the state surely.

  As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the opening / closing mode ends differs depending on the type of jackpot or the type of loss. Therefore, in the transition process at the end of the open / close mode, the process is branched according to the type of jackpot. First, it is determined whether the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400). If the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1406. Whether the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot can be determined by referring to the probability variation 15R jackpot flag or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag.

  In the case of the probability variation 15R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, as described above, after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, the state shifts to the probability variation state and the support mode of the electric accessory 41 is set to the high support mode. Start running. Corresponding to this, in the case of the probability variation 15R jackpot and the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the probability variation state flag is set (step S1408) and the high support mode flag is set (S1410). By doing so, it is possible to shift to the probability change state and to start executing the high support mode. In addition, before setting each flag, various flags (opening / closing mode flag, probability change state flag, high support mode flag) for identifying the gaming state are once reset (flag reset processing in step S1406). By doing this, it is possible to reliably set only the target flag.

  It should be noted that the state in which the probability change state is being executed and the high support mode is being executed is a state that is very advantageous to the player because it is easy to enter the second operating port 25b and a big hit is likely to occur. is there. For this reason, in this embodiment, the gaming state in the probability variation state and the high support mode is referred to as a “special advantageous state”.

  In the case of the probability variation 15R jackpot or the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400: Yes), the probability variation state flag and the high support mode flag are set (step S1408, step S1410) in response to the start of the special advantageous state. ), A “special advantageous state start command” is set in the command buffer 145 (step S1412). The special advantageous state start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) of the main loop process, as with other various commands. By receiving this, the sub-control device 200 can grasp that the special advantageous state has started and execute various effects such as effects that excite the special advantageous state.

  On the other hand, if it is not the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1400: No), it is then determined whether or not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1402). That is, even if it is not the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, in the case of the non-explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is ended. For this reason, it is determined whether or not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, and if it is the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1402: Yes), the process branches to step S1404. Note that it is possible to determine whether or not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is made by referring to the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag.

  Here, the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is different from the probability variation 15R jackpot or the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot in that the high support mode is not started even when the open / close mode ends. However, if the high support mode has been executed before winning the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, the high support mode may be continued as it is. Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the high support mode flag is set. If the high support mode flag is set (step S1404: Yes), similarly to the probability variation 15R jackpot and the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot, The probability variation state flag is set (step S1408), and the high support mode flag is set (step S1410). Further, the special advantageous state start command is stored in the command buffer (step S1412).

  On the other hand, when the high support mode flag is not set (the high support mode is not executed) (step S1404: No), only the probability change state flag is set (step S1416). In this case, if the electric accessory 41 is driven in the high support mode when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, the high support mode is continued as it is, and if the high support mode is not executed, the high support mode is set. The state that is not executed continues. As a result, as described above, it is difficult for the player to notice by the electric accessory 41 that he / she has won the unspecified probability variation 2R jackpot, and the player is surely given the surprise that he / she has transitioned to the certain probability state. Is possible.

  If the high support mode flag is not set (step S1404: No), the special advantageous state is not started because only the probability variation state flag is set and the high support mode flag is not set. In response to this, the “special advantageous state end command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1418). By receiving such a special advantageous state end command, the sub-control device 200 can grasp that the special advantageous state does not occur and execute an effect according to a gaming state other than the special advantageous state. In addition, before setting the probability change state flag in step S1416, various flags (open / close mode flag, probability change state flag, high support mode flag) for identifying the gaming state are reset (step S1414). As described above, this makes it possible to reliably set only the probability variation state flag.

  If it is not the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot (step S1402: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal 15R big hit is made with reference to the normal 15R big hit flag (FIG. 31: step S1420). In the case of a normal 15R jackpot (step S1420: Yes), the flag reset process (step S1422) is executed as in the case of other jackpot types, and then the high support mode flag is set (step S1424). Here, in the case of a normal 15R big hit, the probability variation state flag is not set after the flag reset process, and therefore the probability variation state flag is in the “OFF” state. By doing so, in the case of a normal 15R jackpot, the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 can be ended without shifting the gaming state to the probability changing state. Moreover, even if the gaming state is in a probable change state when a 15R jackpot is generated, it is possible to return to the non-probability change state.

  If flag reset processing is performed (step S1422), then a high support mode flag is set (step S1424). Thereby, after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, the high support mode is started, and it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the second operation opening 25b. Usually, in the case of 15R big hit, since it does not shift to the probable change state after the open / close mode ends, the player's interest in the game tends to decrease when the open / close mode ends. If the game state is easily changed to a ball, the player will be in an advantageous state, so that the player's interest can be avoided and the player's interest can be attracted to the game.

  When the high support mode flag is set (step S1424), the game remaining number counter is set to “100”. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, a series of games from entering the operation port to displaying a symbol stop corresponds to “one game time”. The game remaining number counter is counted down every time one game is performed. Therefore, when the game remaining number counter is set to “100”, the game remaining number counter is set to “0” when 100 game times are performed. Become. Therefore, if the high support mode is terminated when the remaining game count counter reaches “0”, the high support mode can be executed only for 100 game times. As described above, since the game entrance 25 to the symbol stop display corresponds to one game time, the high support mode can be continued until there is 100 entrances to the operation opening. Can do. If the high support mode is continued until there is a predetermined number of balls in this way, a predetermined number of balls can be entered for the player by facilitating the ball entry into the operating port during the high support mode. (And the implementation of a jackpot lottery triggered by entering the ball) can be substantially guaranteed. As a result, the player's interest can be further attracted to the game.

  After setting the game remaining number counter (step S1426), the “special advantageous state end command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1428). That is, in the case of a big hit of 15R, since it does not shift to a certain change state after the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is finished, it does not become a special advantageous state. Therefore, a special advantageous state end command for notifying the sub-control device 200 that the special advantageous state is not set is set in the command buffer 145.

  On the other hand, if it is not normally a big 15R big hit (step S1420: No), it is a case of special failure, so the transition processing at the end of the open / close mode is ended without changing the probability variation state flag and the high support mode flag. That is, in the case of a special outage, if the gaming state before the special outage occurs is a probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained, and if it is a non-probability variation state, the non-probability variation state is maintained. Similarly, if the mode is the high support mode, the high support mode is maintained. If the mode is not the high support mode, the non-high support mode is maintained.

  Here, as described above, in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, as in the case of special outage, if the high support mode is in effect when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot occurs, the high support mode is set after the end of the open / close mode. If the high support mode is not executed when the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is generated, the state in which the high support mode is not executed continues. Therefore, even when the player pays attention to the operation of the electric accessory 41 at the end of the open / close mode, it is not possible to determine from the operation of the electric accessory 41 whether the uncertain probability variation 2R jackpot or the special loss has occurred. Have difficulty. In the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot, since the player shifts to the probability variation state after the open / close mode is finished, the player plays the game with the expectation that the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot is won. By making it difficult to distinguish between the explicit probability variation 2R jackpot and the special loss, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that an implicit probability variation 2R jackpot has occurred even in the case of a special loss. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by raising the player's expectation.

  As described above, in the transition process at the end of the open / close mode, various flags such as a probability change state flag and a high support mode flag are set to shift to a predetermined game state corresponding to the type of jackpot after the open / close mode ends. Perform the setting process. When the transition process at the end of the open / close mode is thus completed, the process returns to the gaming state transition process of FIG. 25 (see step S1288 of FIG. 25).

After returning to the game state transition process, each process for ending the open / close mode is continued. First, the display on the left display unit 72 of the segment type display device 70 is terminated (step S1290). As described above, since the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds in the open / close mode is displayed on the left display portion 72 of the segment type display device 70 (see step S1268), the display is ended with the end of the open / close mode. . When the display on the left display unit 72 is finished, finally, an open / close mode end process is executed (step S1292). In this process, the respective types of jackpot flags (normal 15R jackpot flag, probability variation 15R jackpot flag, explicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag, implicit probability variation 2R jackpot flag) and special loss flags are reset. When the open / close mode is completed by the above processing, the processing returns to the main loop processing of FIG.

  As described above, the display on the left display unit 72 of the segment type display device 70 (display corresponding to the number of rounds) starts when the open / close mode is started (step S1268), and is displayed when the open / close mode ends. The process ends (step S1290). On the other hand, the stop display of the right display unit 76 and the central display unit 74 (the display unit in which the symbol variation display and the stop display are performed due to the ball entering the operation port) are displayed before the start of the open / close mode. Even if the open / close mode ends, it does not end immediately, but continues to be displayed until the next variation display is started. For this reason, the display of the left display part 72 can be displayed only for a short time compared to the stop display of the central display part 74 and the right display part 76. In particular, in the low-frequency entry mode, since the open / close mode is completed in a short time, the display on the left display unit 72 can be displayed for a shorter time. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the case of special loss and the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot are easily determined based on the display of the left display unit 72.

  As described above, in the game state transition process (step S1008) of the main loop process, the game state is shifted to the open / close mode and various flags are set when the open / close mode is ended in response to occurrence of a jackpot or special loss. By setting, the gaming state is shifted to the gaming state according to the jackpot type. If such a game state transition process is performed, then an “electrical accessory control process” for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 41 is performed (step S1010). In addition, the support mode of the electric accessory 41 described above is realized by driving the electric accessory 41 by the electric accessory control process.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the flow of the electric accessory control process. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the “supporting flag” is set (whether or not it is set to “ON”) (step S1440). As will be described later, the supporting flag is a flag that is set when various conditions for starting the support mode are met. When the supporting flag is set (step S1440: Yes), the support mode is started by executing “electric member opening / closing process” (step S1490) for opening and closing the electric member 41. If the supporting flag is not “ON” (step S1440: No), each process (steps S1442 to S1450) for confirming various conditions for starting the support mode is sequentially performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is “ON” (step S1444). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery with the entry into the through operation port 24 is won (in the case of support winning), the electric accessory 41 is opened. The support winning flag is a flag for storing that the lottery (support lottery) has been won. The process for setting the support winning flag will be described later.

If the support lottery has not been won, or if the support lottery has not been determined yet, the support winning flag has not been set, so “No” is determined in step S1442, and the flow proceeds to step S1444. In step S1444, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0”. As will be described later, the symbol variable display time on the through-segment display device 80 is set in the countdown timer. Therefore, in step S1444, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display time has elapsed. If the countdown timer is not “0” (step S1444: No), since the variable display time has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory control process is terminated without starting the support mode, and the main loop process (FIG. 13). Return to).

  In the main loop process, the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined time interval (see FIG. 13), but the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 32) is performed until the variable display time elapses. As soon as "No" is determined in S1444, the process returns to the main loop process. For this reason, it is possible to wait for the execution of the processing after step S1444 until the variable display time elapses. If the variable display time elapses while waiting in this manner, “Yes” is determined in step S1444, and the process proceeds to step S1446.

  When the variable display time has elapsed, in response to the variable display time having elapsed, the variable display of the through-segment display device 80 may be terminated and the symbols may be stopped and displayed. However, the reason why the countdown timer is determined to be “0” in step S1444 is not limited to the case where the variable display time has elapsed. For example, when the symbol variation display is not started in the first place, the countdown timer remains “0”. Alternatively, as described above, since the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed in the main loop process, it is repeatedly executed not only immediately after the change display time of the symbol has elapsed, but also in this case, the countdown timer is set in step S1444. It remains “0”. Therefore, when the countdown timer is “0” (step S1444: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change display has just ended (step S1446). Such determination can be made by various methods. For example, the count value of the countdown timer when the electric accessory control process was executed last time is stored and compared with the count value of the current countdown timer. That's fine. If the previous value of the countdown timer is a value other than "0" and the current value is "0", the variable display time has not elapsed in the previous time, and the variable display time has elapsed in this time From this, it can be determined that the fluctuation display time has just passed.

  Immediately after the end of the variable display (step S1446: Yes), in order to end the variable display of the through segment type display device 80 and stop the display of the symbols, the stop type display device 80 is provided with a stop symbol. It is displayed (step S1448). At this time, since the support winning flag is OFF (see step S1442), the result of the support lottery corresponding to the symbol variation display that has been executed is out. Therefore, the through segment type display device 80 displays a symbol corresponding to the detachment (a detachment symbol).

  If it is not immediately after the end of the variation display (step S1446: No), the variation display is not performed in the first place, or the variation display is performed, but the display is already stopped and displayed immediately after the end of the variation display. Therefore, step S1448 is skipped and it progresses to step S1450.

  In step S1450, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the through operation port is “0”. That is, since the variation display of the symbol is completed on the through-segment display device 80, if there is a hold of the through operation port (step S1450: No), if the suspension is digested and the variation display of the symbol is started. Good. On the contrary, if there is no hold (step S1450: Yes), the electric accessory control process may be terminated as it is. Since the information related to the hold of the through operation port is stored in the electric-powered article holding area 144 of the RAM 140, the presence or absence of the holding can be determined by referring to the electric-powered article holding area 144.

When there is a hold of the through operation port (step S1450: Yes), as described above, the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, and whether or not the support lottery is determined is determined. If the result of the determination is correct, the electric accessory 41 may be opened. Here, in the present embodiment, when performing such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 41 is operated in the high support mode (FIG. 33: step S1452). Then, the process is branched between when operating in the high support mode and when not operating (in the low support mode). By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 between the high support mode and the low support mode. Whether or not to execute in the high support mode can be determined by referring to the high support mode flag (see step S1410 in FIG. 30 and step S1424 in FIG. 31) set in the above-described transition process at the end of the open / close mode. .

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the high support flag is set (step S1452 in FIG. 33: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 is being executed (step S1452). In step S1454, when the open / close mode is being executed (step S1454: Yes), the process proceeds to processing for the low support mode (processing starting from step S1472). In this way, during the execution of the open / close mode, the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 becomes the low support mode, and entering the second working port 25b is not as easy as the high support mode. During execution of the open / close mode, a large number of prize balls tend to be paid out because it is easy for game balls to enter the large entrance 60, but in this way, the entrance to the second operating port 25b is more than the high support mode. If it is difficult, it is possible to suppress the payout of prize balls for entering the second operation port 25b, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60 can be suppressed as a whole. Is possible.

  Furthermore, by suppressing the ball entering the second operating port 25b during the open / close mode in this way, it is possible to suppress the number of balls that are played without causing the player to be significantly dissatisfied. That is, since the player tends to focus on the large entrance 60 during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, it is difficult to notice that the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 has changed. Even if a change in the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 is noticed, a large number of winning balls can be obtained by entering the large entrance 60, so that it can be obtained by entering the second operating port 25b. Even if the number of prize balls is reduced to some extent, there is no change in that a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole. For these reasons, it is possible to suppress the number of balls without causing the player to feel frustrated or distrustful.

  In addition, not only in the high-frequency entry mode in which entry into the large entrance 60 is easy, but also in the low-frequency entry mode in which entry is difficult, the player is similarly dissatisfied. The operation mode of the electric accessory 41 can be switched to the low support mode without any problem. That is, when the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is the low-frequency entry mode, the opening / closing mode itself can be quickly ended because the opening time of the large entrance 60 is short. For this reason, since the high support mode can be resumed immediately upon completion of the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, it is difficult for the player to notice that the operation mode of the electric accessory 41 has become the low support mode. Moreover, even if the player notices, the high support mode is immediately resumed, so that the player rarely feels dissatisfied. For these reasons, even when the operation mode of the large entrance 60 is the low-frequency entry mode, it is possible to switch to the low support mode without causing the player to be dissatisfied.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not it is a high support mode when a big hit occurs, if the low support mode is set during the open / close mode of the big entrance 60, it depends on whether or not the high support mode was set when a big hit occurs. The ease of entering the second operating port 25b during the jackpot game does not change greatly. Therefore, there is no significant difference in the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game depending on whether or not the jackpot is in the high support mode, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the variation in the number of balls to be played for each jackpot game. .

In this embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the mode is the high support mode (step S1452), and then it is determined whether or not the switch is in the open / close mode (step S1454). You may go. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the open / close mode is in effect. If it is not in the open / close mode, it is next determined whether or not the mode is the high support mode. If the mode is the high support mode, the processing for the high support mode in step S1456 and after is performed. Process for mode. In this way, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the high support mode is in the open / close mode, the processing load on the MPU 102 in the open / close mode can be reduced. On the contrary, if it is determined first whether or not the mode is the high support mode as shown in FIG. 33, if the mode is not the high support mode (in the case of the low support mode), it is not determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 102 in a state where it is not in the high support mode.

  In both cases of high support mode and not in open / close mode (step S1452: Yes, step S1454: No) and low support mode or open / close mode (step S1452: No, or step S1454: Yes) When digesting and starting the display of the variation of the symbol, first, the determination of whether or not the support lottery is successful is performed using the value of the electric-powered item holding area 144 (step S1456, step S1472). That is, when a game ball enters the through operation port 24, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is acquired in the electric accessory holding area 144. Therefore, it is determined whether or not this value corresponds to a predetermined hit value. As a result, whether or not the support lottery is successful is determined. In the present embodiment, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f takes a numerical range from “0” to “249”, and a numerical value in the range from “0” to “190” corresponds to the winning numerical value. Therefore, if the value of the electric-powered item holding area 144 is within the range from “0” to “190”, the winning / failing determination result is a support lottery winning (support winning).

  Note that the probability of winning the support lottery may be different between the high support mode and the low support mode. For example, the support lottery is won in the high support mode with a higher probability than in the low support mode. In this way, in the high support mode, not only can the opening time of the electric accessory 41 be made longer than in the low support mode, but also the frequency with which the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed can be increased. It becomes possible to enter the ball more easily. On the contrary, the winning probability may be set so that the support winning is more likely in the low support mode than in the high support mode. In this way, since the electric accessory 41 opens and closes more frequently in the low support mode than in the high support mode, even if the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is short, it is said that the ball enters the second operating port 25b. It is possible to attract the player to the game by holding the expectation on the player. Furthermore, since the opening / closing of the electric accessory 41 is caused by the through operation port 24, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the through operation port 24, or to operate the firing handle 11 aiming at the through operation port 24. Become.

  If the support lottery determination is made (step S1456 or step S1472), then, in order to start the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display time of the through-segment display device 80 is set in the countdown timer (step S1458). Or step S1474). By setting the symbol variation display time in the countdown timer in this manner, as described above, it is possible to detect the passage of the symbol variation display time by determining whether or not the countdown timer is “0”. (See steps S1444 and S1492 in FIG. 32).

In this embodiment, in the high support mode, the symbol variation display time is set to “1.5 seconds” (step S1458). When the symbol display is completed, the electric accessory 41 is opened according to the result of the support lottery. If the symbol variation display time is set to about several seconds in this way, the symbol variation display is displayed for several seconds. After completing the process, the electric accessory 41 can be quickly switched to the open state. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game progresses at a high tempo and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since it is after the end of the symbol variation display that the electric accessory 41 is in the open state, if the symbol variation display time is shortened, the electric accessory 41 is frequently opened accordingly. As a result, the ratio of the open state (the ratio of the open time to the sum of the time of the open state and the time of the closed state) can be improved, and the entry into the second working port 25b can be further promoted. . In addition, it is possible to quickly digest the hold for the ball entering the through operation port 24, so that the number of the hold reaches the upper limit and the player enters the through operation port 24, and the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to avoid the possibility of being held.

  On the other hand, in the low support mode, the symbol variation display time is set to “29.5 seconds” longer than in the high support mode (step S1474). Thus, if the variable display time is set longer than that in the high support mode, the frequency of the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 41 is lowered by the amount that the variable display of the symbol is performed for a long time. It is possible to achieve a more difficult state than the high support mode. In addition, if the variable display time is lengthened, the ratio of the open state time (the ratio of the open state time to the sum of the open state time and the closed state time) can be reduced. If the time is shortened, the ratio of the open state can be increased. Therefore, by adjusting the fluctuation display time, it is possible to adjust the ease of entering the second operation port 25b as a result. Therefore, by adjusting the frequency of jackpot lottery due to entering the second operating port 25b and the number of game balls paid out for entering the second operating port 25b. Is also possible. In particular, if the variable display time in the low support mode is set to 20 seconds or longer as in this embodiment, the number of balls that are sufficiently suppressed from entering the second working port 25b, or In the low support mode, it is also possible to mainly perform a big hit lottery based on a ball entering the first operating port 25a.

  After the symbol change display time is set in the countdown timer (step S1458 or step S1474), the process is branched depending on whether the result of the support lottery is support winning or not (step S1460 or step S1474). If it is not a support win (step S1460: No, or step S1476: No), since the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 41 is not performed, the electric accessory control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, in the case of support winning (step S1460: Yes or step S1476: Yes), a “support winning flag” is set correspondingly (step S1462 or step S1478).

  Next, the number of times the electric accessory 41 is opened is set in the open remaining number counter (step S1464 or step S1480). In this embodiment, “3” is set in the open remaining number counter in the case of the high support mode (step S1464), and “1” which is smaller than in the high support mode is set in the low support mode ( Step S1480). By carrying out like this, since the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed many times in the high support mode than in the low support mode, it is possible to realize a state in which the entry into the second operating port 25b is promoted more than in the low support mode. Is possible. On the other hand, in the low support mode, if the numerical value set in the open balance counter is made small, it is possible to suppress the number of balls to be played by suppressing the number of times that the electric accessory 41 is opened. In particular, if it is set to the smallest “1” as in this embodiment, the player is prevented from being dissatisfied with the fact that the electric accessory 41 is not opened by opening the electric accessory 41. However, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the ball that is caused by the ball entering the second working port 25b. In addition, since it is difficult to enter the second operation port 25b, as described above, it is possible to mainly perform the big win lottery based on the entry to the first operation port 25a in the low support mode. Become.

In the low support mode, if a numerical value is set in the open remaining number counter (step S1480).
), The electric accessory control process of FIGS. 32 to 33 is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process. On the other hand, in the case of the high support mode, subsequently, it is determined whether or not to reset the high support mode flag, and each process of resetting the high support flag according to the determination result is performed (steps S1466 to S1470). ).

  First, in the case of the probability variation state (step S1466: No), the electric accessory control process is terminated without resetting the high support mode flag. This makes it possible to maintain the high support mode without ending the high support mode in the case of the probability change state. In the probability change state, in addition to the high probability of winning the big hit lottery, the second operating port 25b As a result, it is possible to generate jackpots more easily.

  In the case of the non-probability change state (step S1466: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the remaining game times counter is “0”. In other words, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the high-support mode is entered with the occurrence of a normal 15R jackpot (see step S1424 in FIG. 31), a predetermined number of game times are performed. The high support mode is maintained until the game is played, and the high support mode is terminated when a predetermined number of game times have been performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the remaining game number counter is “0” with reference to a remaining game number counter (see step S1426) in which the remaining number of game times for maintaining the high support mode is set. If the remaining game number counter is “0” (step S1468: Yes), it means that a predetermined number of game times have been performed, so the high support mode flag is reset (step S1470). On the other hand, if the remaining game number counter is not “0”, the predetermined number of game times have not ended yet, so the electric accessory control process of FIGS. 32 to 33 is performed without resetting the high support mode flag. The process ends (step S1468: No).

  In the present embodiment, the high support mode is continued in the case of the probability variation state. However, as in the case of the non-probability variation state described above, the probability variation state is also increased when a predetermined number of game times are performed. The support mode may be ended (the high support mode flag is reset). In such a case, the player tends to play the game while wishing to win the jackpot before the high support mode ends and it becomes difficult to enter, so the player is relieved that the game is in a promising state. Thus, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the interest in the game is reduced and to attract the player's interest to the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, each process related to symbol variation display and support lottery (step S1452: No) and open / close mode (step S1454: Yes). Step S1472 to step S1480) are shared, but different processing may be performed in each case. For example, the symbol variation time may be different between the case of not being in the high support mode and the case of being in the open / close mode, or the winning probability of the support lottery may be different. In this way, it is possible to vary the frequency of opening and closing of the electric accessory 41 and the time required to open and close the opening of the large entrance 60 during the execution of the opening / closing mode and in the low support mode. It is also possible to vary the frequency of entering the second operation port 25b and the ratio of the frequency of entering the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b between the open / close mode and the low support mode. On the other hand, if the processing is made common as in the present embodiment, the program can be kept simple to save the capacity of the program area 111 of the ROM 110, or the processing load on the MPU 102 that executes the program can be reduced. It is.

When the electric accessory control process is finished and the process returns to the main loop process (FIG. 13: Step S1010), the electric accessory control process is executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is elected and the support winning flag is set (see steps S1462 and S1478 in FIG. 33), “Yes” is determined in step S1442 in FIG. 32, and the process proceeds to step S1492. In step S1492, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” in order to determine whether or not the symbol variation display time of the through-segment display device 80 has elapsed. If the countdown timer is not “0”, since the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main loop process again (step S1492: No). On the other hand, if the countdown timer is “0” (step S1492: Yes), since the variable display time has elapsed, the symbol of the through-segment display device 80 is stopped and displayed (step S1494). At this time, since the support lottery is won, the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the “supporting flag” is set in response to the fact that the symbol variation display is finished and the mode is actually shifted to the support mode (step S1496). In addition, the support winning flag is reset instead of the support flag being set (step S1498). When the supporting flag is set in this way, when the electric accessory control process is executed again after returning to the main loop process, “Yes” is determined in step S1440, and the electric accessory 41 is actually opened and closed. The process proceeds to “Electric accessory opening / closing process” (step S1490).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of the electric accessory opening / closing process. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened (step S1500). Although it is possible to determine whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened by various methods, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 42 that drives the electric accessory 41 (see FIG. 7), the main control device 100 determines whether or not the electric accessory 41 is being opened. If the electric accessory 41 is being opened (step S1500: Yes in FIG. 34), then, in order to keep the electric accessory 41 open until a predetermined time has elapsed, whether or not the countdown timer is “0” or not Is determined (step S1502). That is, as described later, the countdown timer is set with a time (opening time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the open state. Therefore, by checking whether the countdown timer is “0”, the set open time is set. Judge whether or not it has passed.

  If the countdown timer is not “0”, since the opening time set in the countdown timer has not yet elapsed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without closing the electric accessory 41 (step S1502: No). . When the electric accessory opening / closing process is thus completed, the process returns to the electric accessory control process of FIG. 32 (step S1490), and then returns to the main loop process of FIG. In the main loop process, since the electric accessory control process is repeatedly executed, the electric accessory control process of FIG. 32 is executed again, and further, the electric accessory opening / closing process of FIG. 34 is executed (FIG. 32: step S1490). In the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 34), if the countdown timer is not “0”, the process returns to the main loop process again (step S1502: No). The execution of the process is repeated until the countdown timer becomes “0”. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the electric accessory 41 open until the opening time set in the countdown timer elapses.

If the opening time elapses while the return to the main loop process and the execution of the electric accessory opening / closing process are repeated, “Yes” is determined in step S1502, and the process proceeds to the “electric accessory closing process” in step S1504. To do. In such a process, a control signal is transmitted to the electric accessory driving unit 42 (see FIG. 7) connected to the main control device 100, thereby driving the electric accessory 41 to bring the electric accessory 41 into a closed state. . Next, the time during which the electric accessory 41 is kept closed is set in the countdown timer. In this embodiment, the countdown timer is set to “0.5 seconds” (FIG. 34: step S1506). By setting the closing time to a short time in this way, in the high support mode in which the electric accessory 41 is opened multiple times,
Since the next opening is performed immediately in a short time even when the electric accessory 41 is closed, the electric accessory 41 can be quickly returned to a state in which it is easy to enter the second operating port 25b. .

  When the electric accessory 41 is switched from the open state to the closed state, since the opening of the electric accessory 41 is completed once, the value of the remaining open counter is counted down (step S1508). Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining opening counter is “0” (step S1510). If the remaining opening counter is “0” (step S1510: Yes), the electric accessory 41 is opened for the set number of times. Therefore, the supporting flag is reset to end the support mode (step S1512). If the remaining open counter is not “0”, the opening operation for the set number of times has not been completed yet, and thus the electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without resetting the supporting flag (step S1510: No). .

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory is not being opened (step S1500: No), since the electric accessory 41 is in the closed state, a process for opening the electric accessory 41 is performed this time. First, it is determined whether or not the countdown timer is “0” (step S1514). When the electric accessory 41 is in the closed state, as described above, the countdown timer is set with a time (closed time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the closed state (see step S1506). Therefore, when the countdown timer is not “0”, the closing time has not yet elapsed, and thus the electric accessory opening / closing process is terminated without opening the electric accessory 41 (step S1514: No).

  As described above, when the electric accessory opening / closing process ends and the process returns to the electric accessory control process (see FIG. 32), the process returns to the main loop process (see FIG. 13), and then the electric accessory control again. The process is executed (FIG. 13: Step S1010), and the electric accessory opening / closing process is called (FIG. 32: Step S1490). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the process returns to the main loop process until the countdown timer reaches “0” (step S1514: No). Thus, the return to the main loop process and the execution of the electric accessory opening / closing process are repeated until the countdown timer reaches “0”, thereby closing the electric accessory 41 until the closing time set in the countdown timer elapses. Can be kept in a state.

  When the countdown timer becomes “0” after the closing time has elapsed (step S1514: Yes), the “electrical accessory release process” of step S1516 is executed to bring the electric accessory 41 into an open state. In this process, the electric accessory 41 is opened by transmitting a control signal to the electric accessory driving unit 42 to drive the electric accessory 41. After the electric accessory 41 is thus opened, processing for setting the countdown timer for the time (open time) for maintaining the electric accessory 41 in the open state is performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described processing for setting the symbol variation time (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the mode is the high support mode (step S1518). If not, the process is branched. By doing so, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening time of the electric accessory 41 between the high support mode and the low support mode. Whether or not the mode is the high support mode can be determined by referring to the high support mode flag. When the mode is not the high support mode (step S1518: No), the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds” (step S1524). On the other hand, if it is in the high support mode (step S1518: Yes), it is further determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode (step S1520). If it is in the open / close mode (step S1520: Yes), the low support mode is set. As in the case, the countdown timer is set to “0.2 seconds” (step S1524).

As described above, when the electric accessory 41 is opened during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, in addition to the ball that is caused by entering the large entrance 60, the second operation port 25b is entered. However, if the opening time in the open / close mode is set to be short as described above, the ball that is caused by the ball entering the second operating port 25b is removed. Can be suppressed. In addition, during the opening / closing mode of the big entrance 60, if the opening time is set to be short regardless of whether or not the high support mode is being set, the second time depends on whether or not the high support mode is set when the jackpot gaming state is entered. There is no significant difference in the number of balls resulting from entering the operation opening 25b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the total number of winning balls that are paid out during the open / close mode of the large entrance 60, and to suppress variations in the number of balls that are played for each jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the open time set in the countdown timer is the same in the low support mode (step S1518: No) and in the open / close mode (step S1520: Yes). However, different opening times may be set. In this way, since the opening time of the electric accessory 41 differs between when the large entrance 60 is in the open / close mode and when in the low support mode, the frequency of entering the second operating port 25b, the first operating port, It becomes possible to make the ratio of the frequency of entry between the 25a and the second working port 25b different between the open / close mode and the low support mode. On the other hand, if the opening time is the same as in the present embodiment, the processing can be made common between the low support mode and the open / close mode, so the program can be kept simple and the ROM 110 can be maintained. It is possible to save the capacity of the program area 111 and to reduce the processing load of the MPU 102 that executes the program.

  If it is in the high support mode and not in the open / close mode (step S1518: YES and step S1520: NO), the countdown timer is set to “1.6 seconds” (step S1522). In this way, in the high support mode, by setting a longer opening time than in the low support mode, the electric accessory 41 is in the open state for a longer time in the high support mode than in the low support mode. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the entrance into the second working port 25b than in the low support mode.

  In this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the high support mode is in effect (step S1518), and then it is determined whether or not it is in the open / close mode (step S1520), but the determination is made in the reverse order. You may go. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the switch is in the open / close mode. When the switch is in the open / close mode, the opening time for the low support mode is set. . If the mode is the high support mode, the opening time is set for the high support mode, and if the mode is not the high support mode, the opening time for the low support mode is set. In this way, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the high support mode is in the open / close mode, the processing load on the MPU 102 in the open / close mode can be reduced. Conversely, if the high support mode is determined first, it is not necessary to determine whether the switch is in the open / close mode when it is not in the high support mode (in the low support mode). It is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 102 in a state other than the support mode.

  When the opening time of the electric accessory 41 is set in the countdown timer (step S1524 or step S1522), the electric accessory opening / closing process of FIG. 34 is terminated and the process returns to the electric accessory control process of FIG. After that, the process returns to the main loop process of FIG. 13 (see step S1010 of FIG. 13). By repeatedly executing such an electric accessory control process in the main loop process, the electric accessory 41 is opened and closed, and as a result, a high support mode and a low support mode are realized.

As described above, in the main loop process of FIG. 13, each process from the external output process (step S1000) to the electric accessory control process (step S1010) is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (4 msec). Here, the numerical values of various counters referred to in each process described above are updated by “timer interrupt process” that generates an interrupt at a predetermined time period with respect to the main loop process. In this way, it is possible to update the counter value as needed while executing each process of the main loop process. Hereinafter, such timer interrupt processing will be described. The remaining time process (step S1014) of the main loop process will be described in detail later.

D-2. Timer interrupt processing:
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing. This process is a process executed by the MPU 102 in response to an interrupt generated during the execution of the main loop process described above. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such an interrupt is generated at a cycle of 2 msec by using the timer interrupt function of the MPU 102. Therefore, such timer interrupt processing is also repeatedly executed at a cycle of 2 msec. . Note that the period of occurrence of the interrupt is not limited to 2 msec, but may be any period, but is preferably shorter than the period of the main loop process. In this way, since the timer interrupt process is executed at least once between the execution of each process in the main loop process and the next execution, each process in the main loop process is set to the counter value. It is possible to reliably update the value of the counter between the time when the reference is made and the time when the next reference is made.

  Further, since the timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period, the elapsed time can be measured by counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed. For example, when the number of executions of timer interrupt processing reaches 2 times (2 msec × 2 times), it is possible to detect the elapse of the main loop processing repetition time (4 msec) (see step S1012 in FIG. 13). . This is preferable because it is not necessary to separately provide a timer for detecting the elapsed time. In the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of timers provided in the main control device 100 can be suppressed and the device configuration can be kept simple by detecting the repetition time of the main loop processing by a method that takes time.

  In the timer interruption process of FIG. 35, first, a sensor reading process for reading detection states of sensors provided in the respective operation ports (through operation port 24, first operation port 25a, and second operation port 25b) of the ball game machine 10. Is performed (step S1600). That is, as described above, when there is a ball in each operation port, the ball is detected by a sensor provided in each operation port, and this detection state is read and stored in the RAM. Since the timer interrupt process is a process executed at a constant cycle, if the sensor detection state is read in the timer interrupt process as described above, the sensor detection state can be read at a constant cycle. This makes it possible to maintain a uniform probability of acquiring each value that can be taken by the jackpot random number counter (in this embodiment, each value from “0” to “599”). This point will be described in detail later.

  Next, “1” is added to the value of the random number initial value counter 141b to update the value of the random number initial value counter 141b (step S1602). As described above, the random number initial value counter 141b is a counter that designates an initial value for starting the count-up of the jackpot random number counter 141a (see FIG. 9). By updating the value of the random number initial value counter 141b, when the value of the big hit random number counter 141a is cycled and the count up is restarted, the count up can be restarted from an initial value different from the previous value. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the numerical value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is repeated at a constant cycle. Here, as described above, the random number initial value counter 141b is also updated in the main loop process (see FIG. 9). However, as described later, the main loop process sets the random number initial value counter 141b when the process is repeated. It is not always updated every time. Therefore, if the value of the random number initial value counter is also updated in the timer interrupt processing, the value of the random number initial value counter 141b can be reliably updated. As a result, the value winning the lottery lottery is aimed at. It is possible to more reliably avoid an illegal act such as causing a game ball to enter the operation port 25 at a timing when the numerical value is repeated.

When the numerical value of the random number initial value counter is updated (FIG. 35: Step S1602), the values of other counters in the counter area 141 (see FIG. 8) are then updated (FIG. 35: Step S1604). That is, “1” is added (incremented) to each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a, the jackpot type counter 141c, the variation type counter 141d, the reach random number counter 141e, and the electric accessory release counter 141f. As described above, since each of these counters constitutes a loop counter, by updating the counter value by timer interrupt processing, these counters repeatedly change a value within a predetermined range while successively changing the value. It becomes possible to point.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the counter area 141 is provided with a buffer corresponding to each counter, and the value of each counter can be stored in the corresponding buffer (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the updated value may be stored in each buffer when each counter is updated. At this time, depending on the timing at which the timer interrupt processing is started, the buffer may be referred to from the processing in the main loop processing. In such a case, only the counter value is updated and the main interrupt processing is started. After the reference from the processing in the loop processing is completed, the counter value is copied to the buffer. In this way, it is possible to reliably avoid the possibility that the value of the buffer is updated while the processing in the main loop processing is referring to the buffer. Further, since the counter value can be updated even while the buffer is being referenced, the counter value can be reliably updated regardless of the timing at which the main loop process is called. In this way, it is possible to avoid the possibility of receiving fraud such as manipulating the counter value to generate a jackpot by hindering the updating of the counter value. After updating the value of each counter and the value of the buffer corresponding to the counter in this way, next, “actuating port entrance processing” in which the entrance into the operating port is detected and various processes for the entrance are performed (FIG. 35: step S1606). ).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the flow of the working port entrance processing. As shown in the drawing, in the operation port entry processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an entry in the first operation port 25a (step S1620). That is, the timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed, but there is a predetermined time interval between the execution of the timer interrupt process and the next execution. Therefore, if there is a ball in the first operating port 25a during this period, a predetermined process is performed on the ball. Whether or not there is a ball in the first operating port 25a is determined by the sensor detection state stored in the RAM 140 in the above-described sensor reading process (FIG. 35: step S1600) (the detection state of the sensor 25as provided in the first operating port 25a). ) Can be determined.

  When there is a ball entering the first working port 25a (step S1620: Yes), first, the first working port 25a is set to pay out the winning ball for the ball entering the first working port 25a. The number of winning balls is written in the RAM 140 (step S1622). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first operating port 25a is set to “3” and stored in advance in the ROM 110, and the number of prize balls may be read and written in the RAM 140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 is transmitted to the payout control device 410 by the external output process (FIG. 13: step S1000) of the main loop process. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 13.

  After the number of winning balls is written in the RAM, a signal is output to the external output terminal 910 in order to notify an external device such as a hall computer that a ball has entered the first operating port 25a (step S1624). Such a signal can be output in various modes. For example, it is only necessary to output a pulse to a terminal for transmitting that the ball has entered the first working port 25a. In this way, the hall computer connected to the external output terminal 910 can easily detect the ball entering the first operating port 25a by detecting the pulse. Since the timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a short time cycle, the process of outputting a signal in the timer interrupt process in this way allows an external device such as a hall computer to enter the first operating port 25a. It is possible to grasp the sphere almost in real time. After the signal is output to the external output terminal 910, “information acquisition processing” (FIG. 36: step S1626) is then executed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a flow of information acquisition processing. This process is a process of acquiring information from each counter when the ball enters the operation port 25 and updating the number of suspensions of the operation port 25. Here, the information acquisition process is executed not only for the entry into the first operation port 25a as described later but also for the entry into the second operation port 25b (step S1634 in FIG. 36). See). Therefore, in the information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not the operation port to be processed is the first operation port 25a (step S1650 in FIG. 37). Such a determination can be performed by various methods. For example, before executing the information acquisition process in the operation port entrance process of FIG. 36, it is determined which of the operation ports the information acquisition process is to be executed. (For example, when the information acquisition process is executed in step S1626, a flag indicating that the processing target operating port is the first operating port is set, while in step S1634 When executing the information acquisition process, it is only necessary to set a flag indicating that the operation port to be processed is the second operation port).

  When the operation port to be processed is the first operation port 25a (step S1650: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of reservations in the first operation port 25a has reached the upper limit value (step S1652). As described above, since the number of holdings of the first working port 25a is stored in the holding number storage area 142a of the first working port holding storage area (see FIG. 12), the holding stored in the holding number storage area 142a. What is necessary is just to determine whether the number has reached the upper limit (four in this embodiment).

  If the number of holds has reached the upper limit (step S1652 of FIG. 37: Yes), since the number of holds has reached the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated without holding the current entry. On the other hand, when the number of holdings has not reached the upper limit (step S1652: No), a process of holding the current entry is subsequently performed. First, “1” is added to the number of reservations of the first working port stored in the number-of-holds storage area 142a in response to the increase in the number of reservations of the first working port 25a (step S1654). Further, since the total number of reservations increases due to the increase in the number of reservations in the first working port, “1” is added to the value of the total reservation number storage area 142i (step S1656).

  Next, a process of storing each value of the holding acquisition counter group in the first working port holding storage area is performed (step S1658). That is, as described above, the first working port reserved storage area is provided with four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area, and each area is a jackpot that can store the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. A random number storage area 142b, a jackpot type storage area 142c that can store the value of the jackpot type counter 141c, and a reach random number storage area 142d that can store the value of the reach random number counter 141e are provided (see FIG. 12). Accordingly, in response to the game ball entering the first working port 25a, the values of these counters (holding acquisition counter group) are acquired and stored in the storage areas of the first working port holding storage area. To do. Which storage area from the first area to the fourth area is determined in accordance with the order of the storage areas described above (the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area). That's fine. In other words, if there is no hold, it may be stored in the first area, and if there is a hold and some of the storage areas are used, they are stored in the next storage area in this order. For example, if there is one hold and the first area is used, it may be stored in the next second area, or if there are two holds and the second area is also used. May be stored in the next third area. It can be determined by referring to the value of the reserved number storage area 142a which storage area is used (that is, the reserved number).

Thus, if the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is acquired in response to the ball entering the first operating port 25a, the acquired value is compared with the jackpot lottery table (step S1072 of the variable display start process in FIG. 16). ), It is possible to execute a jackpot lottery based on the timing at which a game ball enters the first operating port 25a. Similarly, it is possible to determine the jackpot type based on the timing of entering the first operating port 25a by acquiring the value of the jackpot type counter 141c triggered by entering the first operating port 25a. (See step S1078 in FIG. 16). In addition, by acquiring the value of the reach random number counter triggered by entering the first working port 25a, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a reach effect based on the timing of entering the first operating port 25a. It becomes possible. When the values of the respective counters are stored in the first working port holding storage area as described above (FIG. 37: step S1658), the information acquisition processing of FIG. 37 is terminated and the processing returns to the working port entrance processing of FIG. (See step S1626 in FIG. 36).

  In the working port entrance processing, when the above-described processes for the first working port 25a are executed, this time, processing for the second working port 25b is performed. First, it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the second working port (step S1628). Whether or not there is a ball in the second operating port 25b is the same as in the case of the first operating port described above, the sensor detection state stored in step S1600 of the timer interrupt process (the sensor provided in the second operating port 25b) It can be determined by reading out the detection state (25bs). If there is no entry into the second working port 25b, the working port entering process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (step S1628: No). On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the second working port 25b, the number of winning balls of the second working port 25b is written in the RAM in the same manner as the processing for the first working port 25a described above (step S1630). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second working port 25b is set to “4” which is larger than the number of prize balls in the first working port 25a and is stored in the ROM 110 in advance. The number of winning balls is read and written in the RAM 140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 is transmitted to the payout control device 410 by the external output process of the main loop process (FIG. 13: step S1000), similarly to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 25a described above. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 13.

  After the number of winning balls is written in the RAM 140, a signal is output to the external output terminal 910 in order to notify an external device such as a hall computer that a ball has entered the second operating port 25b (FIG. 36: Step S1632). The output of such a signal can be transmitted using various methods in the same manner as the signal for notifying the entry into the first working port 25a. When a signal is output to the external output terminal, an information acquisition process (see FIG. 37) is then executed as in the case of the first operating port 25a described above.

  When the information acquisition process is executed, it is determined as “No” in step S1650, and each process (steps S1660 to S1666) for updating the number of suspensions in the second working port 25b is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves in the second working port 25b has reached the upper limit (step S1660). Since the number of holdings of the second working port 25b is stored in the holding number storage area 142e of the second working port holding storage area, if this value reaches the upper limit value, no further holding is performed, so information is acquired. The process is terminated and the process returns to the operation port entrance process (step S1660: Yes).

On the other hand, if the number of reserves of the second operating port 25b has not reached the upper limit value, “1” is added to the number of reserves of the second operating port 25b (second operation), as in the case of the first operating port 25a described above. “1” is added to the value of the hold count storage area 142e of the mouth hold storage area (step S1662), and “1” is added to the total hold count (“1” is added to the value of the total hold count storage area 142i) (Step S1664). Further, a process of storing each value of the counter group in the second working port storage area is performed (step S1666). The process of storing each value of the counter group in the second working port holding storage area may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the first working port 25a described above (step S1658). In this way, the second operation port 25b also enters the second operation port 25b by acquiring the value of each counter when triggered by the ball entering the second operation port 25b, similarly to the first operation port 25a. Based on the timing, it is possible to perform a jackpot lottery, determine a jackpot type, and determine the presence or absence of reach production. When the information acquisition process for the entrance of the second operation port is completed as described above, the process returns to the operation port entrance process of FIG. 36 (step S1634), and then returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG. (See step S1606 of 35).

  In the sensor reading process (FIG. 35: step S1600), the detection state of the sensor provided in the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b is changed to the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b. Detection is performed by reading, but when the detection state of such a sensor is read, the detection state is reset. For example, when a sensor of a type that latches an electric signal at a predetermined voltage level when a ball enters the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b is used, the latch is reset when the detection state is read out. In this way, it is possible to reliably detect the incoming ball after reading. Also, if the detection state is reset immediately after reading out, even if it takes time to execute the processing due to processing for a plurality of operating ports, the ball entering the operating ports is detected. There is no risk of damage, which is preferable.

  In addition, as described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the detection state of the sensor provided in the operation port is read and stored (step S1600 in FIG. 35), and when a ball is detected, In the information acquisition process (see FIG. 37) executed in the same timer interrupt process after reading the sensor detection state, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is acquired (steps S1658 and S1666 in FIG. 37). Therefore, with respect to the entrance of the period from the reading of the sensor detection state to the next reading of the sensor detection state (the period until the timer interrupt process is executed again and the sensor reading process of step S1600 is executed) Thus, the same value (the value after being updated in step S1604 in FIG. 35) is acquired from the jackpot random number counter 141a for any timing of entry during the period. For this reason, the longer the time interval from reading the sensor detection state to reading the sensor detection state again, the longer the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a (the value after being updated in step S1604 in FIG. 35). The probability that the value is acquired increases. Conversely, the shorter the time interval, the lower the probability that the value is acquired. Therefore, for each value that can be taken by the jackpot random number counter 141a (each value from “0” to “599” in this embodiment), the sensor is read from the viewpoint of keeping the probability that each value is acquired uniformly. It is desirable to keep the time interval from reading to reading the next sensor as uniform as possible.

  In this regard, if the sensor reading is performed in the timer interrupt processing as in this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is executed at a constant time period, so that the time interval for reading the sensor can be kept uniform. Become. Further, if the sensor reading process is executed at an early stage in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the detection state of the sensor can be read at a more uniform cycle. For example, if it is executed at a stage prior to the operation port entry process (step S1606), the time required for executing the operation port entry process (or the time required for the information acquisition process performed in the operation port entry process) is increased. Even if it is not uniform (changes at every execution), it is possible to read the detection state of the sensor at a constant period. As a result, for each value that can be taken by the jackpot random number counter 141a (each value from “0” to “599” in this embodiment), the probability of acquiring each value can be kept more uniform.

  In the timer interruption process of FIG. 35, when the process for entering the first working port 25a and the second working port 25b (the working port entering process in step S1606) is performed as described above, “Through-operation-entrance ball entry process” for performing various processes for entering the ball 24 is executed (step S1608).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the flow of the through operation entrance ball entering process. Such a process is a process of updating the holding number of the through operation port 24 or acquiring the value of the counter when triggered by entering the through operation port 24. When the process is started, first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the through operation port 24 (step S1680). The presence or absence of a ball entering the through operation port 24 is based on the detection state of the sensor stored in the sensor reading process (see FIG. 35: step S1600), similarly to the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b described above. It is possible to judge. That is, when a ball enters the through operation port 24, a sensor (sensor 24s) provided in the through operation port 24 detects the entry, so the detection state of the through operation port 24 is read and stored in the RAM. If it is done, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a ball entry based on the stored detection state. If there is no entry into the through operation opening 24, the through operation entry process may be terminated as it is (step S1680: No).

  On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the through operation port 24 (step S1680: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the number of the hold of the through operation port 24 has reached the upper limit value (step S1682). In the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of holds of the through operation port 24 is stored in the electrically-powered object holding area 144 of the RAM 140, and an upper limit value (four in this embodiment) is referred to this number of holds. To determine whether or not If the number of holdings of the through operation port 24 has reached the upper limit value, it is determined that the holding is not stored any more, and the through operation port entrance processing is terminated as it is (step S1682: Yes).

  On the other hand, when the number of the hold of the through operation port 24 has not reached the upper limit value (step S1682: No), the number of the hold of the through operation port 24 corresponding to the ball entering the through operation port 24. “1” is added to (step S1684). Although the detailed description is omitted, the number of reserves of the through operation port 24 is reflected on the lighting state of the display lamp 82 by the main controller 100, so that the number of reservations of the through operation port 24 can be displayed by the display lamp 82. It becomes possible. Next, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is stored in the electric accessory holding area 144 (step S1686). Although the detailed description of the electric-powered item holding area 144 is omitted, the electric-purposed item holding area 144 is also provided with the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the holding number, similarly to the holding storage area 142. By storing the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f in the storage area, it is possible to store the hold up to the upper limit value of the number of holds. As described above, the value of the electric accessory release counter 141f is acquired in the electric accessory holding area 144 in response to the entry of the through operation port 24 as a trigger, whereby the electric accessory control process described above (see FIG. 32). , It becomes possible to perform a lottery (support lottery) triggered by the entry of the through operation port 24. When each of the above processes is performed, the through operation hole entrance process of FIG. 38 is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process of FIG.

  In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that no prize ball is paid out for the entry into the through operation port 24, but unlike this, for the entry into the through operation port 24 A prize ball may be paid out. In this case, a process of writing the number of prize balls of the through operation port 24 in the RAM 140 may be performed following the process of determining whether or not there is a ball entering the through operation port 24 (see step S1680 in FIG. 38). The number of prize balls for the through operation port 24 may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read out and written into the RAM 140. The number of prize balls written in the RAM 140 can be transmitted to the payout control device 410 in the external output process (step S1000 in FIG. 13) in the main loop process, as in the case of the prize ball of the operation port 25 described above. Therefore, it is possible to pay out the game balls for the number of prize balls set in the through operation port 24 to the upper plate 13.

Further, the process of writing the number of winning balls of the through operation port 24 in the RAM 140 can be executed in the process related to the through operation port 24 in the main loop process (the electric accessory control process in step S1010). If executed in the timer interrupt process in this way, the interrupt process is executed in preference to the main loop process.
It is possible to reliably execute the process of writing the number of prize balls of 4 in the RAM 140 and to pay out the prize balls.

  In addition, in the process for entering the through hole 24 (through hole entering process in FIG. 38), the process for entering the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b (inlet entering the operating hole in FIG. 36) is also performed. Similarly to the ball processing), in step S1600 in FIG. 35, the detection state of the sensor 24s of the through operation port 24 is read out, and then the processing for the incoming ball is performed. As described above, if the detection state of the sensor is read out at a constant time interval for the through operation port 24 as well, as in the case of the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b described above, For each possible value (each value from “0” to “249” in this embodiment), it is possible to keep the probability of acquiring each value uniform.

  As described above, in the timer interruption process, the values of the counters such as the jackpot random number counter 141a and the random number initial value counter 141b are updated, and the first operation port 25a, the second operation port 25b, and the through operation port 24 are updated. The value of each counter is stored in the holding storage area 142 and the electric-powered item holding area 144 in response to the entry of the ball. By doing so, in the above-described main loop process, it is possible to advance the game while performing a lottery or the like triggered by entering the operation port 25 or the through operation port 24.

  Further, as described above, the bullet ball game machine 10 transmits various commands from the main control device 100 to the sub control device 200 while controlling the progress of such a game by the main control device 100 (FIG. 13). In step S1000, the sub-control device 200 can be operated to execute various effects using the effect display device 30 and various lamps. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects according to the progress of the game and further enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball is received into the operation port 25, and a value is acquired from each counter (holding acquisition counter group) and stored in the holding storage area 142. Therefore, if the information (holding counter information) in the holding storage area 142 is stored in a command and transmitted to the sub-control device 200, the sub-control device 200 determines an effect mode based on the holding counter information. Is possible. For example, since the counter value at the time of holding includes the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a, referring to this value, the result of determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful before the main controller 100 starts the variable display of symbols Can be grasped. For this reason, for example, when displaying the image indicating the hold on the effect display device 30, by displaying an image different from the image indicating the normal hold, the player is notified that the hold corresponds to the jackpot. It is possible to execute such an effect. Alternatively, since the value of the jackpot type counter 141c is included in the on-hold counter information, it is possible to grasp the jackpot type before starting the variable display of symbols. Therefore, it is also possible to notify the player of the jackpot type by making the image indicating the hold displayed on the effect display device 30 an image corresponding to the jackpot type. If the on-hold counter information is used, it is possible to perform such an effect using the on-hold display (on-hold display effect), and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Of course, it is not limited to such a hold display effect, and if the counter information at the time of holding is used, the result of the big win lottery and the type of jackpot can be grasped before the variable display of the symbol is started. It is possible to execute various effects by determining the presence / absence of effect execution and the effect mode based on the effect. For example, if a specific effect image is displayed on the condition that there is a hold corresponding to the jackpot, the player who has seen the effect image greatly increases the expectation for the jackpot, and thus attracts the player strongly to the game. Is possible. In addition, since such an effect can be performed before the display of the variation of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is started, for example, the timing earlier than the timing when the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is performed (for example, corresponding to the jackpot) A series of performances that last from the time when the change display of the hold that entered before the hold is started) to the time of occurrence of the jackpot, or the content of the stage changes gradually as the hold corresponding to the jackpot approaches It is also possible to execute a production that goes on. By doing so, the player gradually increases the sense of expectation for the jackpot as the performance progresses, so that the player can be more strongly attracted to the game.

  However, as described above, if the pending counter information is transmitted to the sub control device 200 as it is, the data amount of the command increases or the command data amount increases. There is a tendency for the types to increase. For this reason, the main control device 100 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform an effect using the counter information at the time of hold and an effect mode, and stores the result of the process in the command in the sub control device 200. It is desirable to send. However, when such processing becomes complicated, there is a risk that the processing load of the main control device 100 increases and the game control processing is hindered. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing related to such effects is executed as follows using the remaining time processing of the main loop processing, so that these processing can be executed by the main control device 100. However, it is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering the game control.

D-3. Remaining time processing:
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the remaining time processing flow of this embodiment. Such processing uses time (remaining time) until a predetermined repetition time (4 msec) elapses after each processing (step S1000 to step S1010 in FIG. 13) such as symbol game processing in the main loop processing. This process is executed (see step S1014 in FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the remaining time process, first, “1” is added to the value of the random number initial value counter 141b to update the value of the random number initial value counter 141b (step S1700). Similarly, “1” is added to the value of the variation type counter 141d to update the value of the variation type counter 141d (step S1702). Thus, by updating the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d using the remaining time processing, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the values of these counters have a time period. That is, when the counter value is updated by the MPU 102, the MPU 102 operates based on a pulse signal (so-called base clock) having a fixed period as a reference of operation, and therefore the timing for updating the counter value tends to have periodicity. There is. In particular, when the process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle as in the main loop process of the present embodiment, when the counter value is updated in such a process, the counter value is updated until the next update. Since the time interval is constant, the counter update interval is constant, and as a result, the time interval from when the counter points to a certain value to the same value also becomes constant. As described above, if the value of the counter has such periodicity, there is a risk that the player may receive an illegal act such as causing a game ball to enter the operation port 25 aiming at the timing of winning the big hit lottery.

In this regard, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the remaining time processing is repeatedly executed using the remaining time in which each processing (step S1000 to step S1010 in FIG. 13) in the main loop processing is executed. The possibility that the counter has periodicity can be avoided. That is, in each process in the main loop process, the process is performed according to the entry into the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, or the process is branched according to the game state. The processing content to be executed changes accordingly. Therefore, the time required for these processes is not constant and varies depending on the game situation. In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop process and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the main loop is continued until the timer interrupt process is completed. Although the execution of the process is waited for, the process for the timer interrupt process is also performed according to the ball entering the through operation port 24 and the operation port 25, so the time required for executing the timer interrupt process also depends on the game situation. As a result, the standby time of the main loop process changes. For these reasons, the time required to execute a series of main loop processing (steps S1000 to S1010 in FIG. 13) varies depending on the game situation. As a result, the remaining time also depends on the game situation. Will change.

  Then, as described above, in the main loop process of the present embodiment, the remaining time process is repeatedly executed until the remaining time runs out (see step S1012 and step S1014), so the number of times the remaining time process is repeatedly executed is It will change according to the situation. As a result, the number of times the values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d are updated (that is, the value added to the counter value) changes substantially randomly. As a result, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the values of the random number initial value counter 141b and the variation type counter 141d have periodicity. As a result, the game ball is placed in the operation port 25 with the aim of winning the big hit lottery. It is possible to avoid a situation in which an illegal act such as entering a ball is received.

  In the remaining time processing of FIG. 39, after updating the value of the random number initial value counter 141b and the value of the variation type counter 141d (step S1700, step S1702), the sub-control device indicates that a game ball has entered the operation port 25. Judgment is made as to whether or not to set the “operation opening ball command” notified to 200 in the command buffer 145 (step S1704). Since the operation port entry command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 200 of entering the operation port 25, if there is an entry into the operation port 25, the operation port entry command may be set.

  The presence or absence of a ball entering the operating port 25 can be determined by various methods. For example, when the entrance into the operation port 25 is detected in the operation port entrance processing (see FIG. 36) in the timer interruption process (after step S1620: Yes or after step S1628: Yes in FIG. 36). A flag may be set and a ball entering each operation port may be detected by referring to the flag. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the number of holds in the hold storage area 142 is increased by comparing the state of the hold storage area 142 when the remaining time processing was executed last time and the state of the hold storage area 142 this time. By doing so, it may be determined whether or not there is a ball entering each operating port. In the present embodiment, when the entrance into the first operation port 25a is detected in the operation port entry process of FIG. 36, the “first operation port entry flag” is set, and the entry into the second operation port 25b is performed. When detected, a “second operation entrance ball flag” is set, and when any of the flags is set with reference to these flags, an operation entrance operation command is set (S1704: Yes). It shall be judged.

  If it is determined that the operation port entry command is to be set (step S1704 in FIG. 39: Yes), “operation port entry command setting process” in step S1706 is executed. On the other hand, if there is no entry into the operation port 25, there is no need to set an operation port entry command, so the remaining time process is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process (step S1704: No).

40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the flow of the operation entrance ball command setting process. This process is a process of setting an operation port entry command in the command buffer 145 in response to a ball entering the operation port 25. The sub-control device 200 can detect that a ball has entered the operation port 25 by receiving this operation port entry command, and various processes such as changing the number of suspensions displayed on the effect display device 30. Can be executed. In addition, if various information related to entering the operating port 25 (such as a result of a big lottery when triggered by entering the operating port 25) is included in the operating port entering command, the sub-control device 200 Then, it becomes possible to determine the production mode based on various types of information related to the entry. In addition, since the command for entering the operation port is transmitted at the time of entering the operation port, the sub-control device 200 displays various kinds of information related to the entry before the symbol change display corresponding to the entry is performed. It is possible to reflect this information in the production content. In the working port incoming ball command setting process of the present embodiment, an “operating port incoming command” including various kinds of information related to entering the working port 25 is set.

  Here, since the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment has two operation ports, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, when setting the operation port entry command, An operation port entry command corresponding to entering the first operation port and an operation port entry command corresponding to entering the second operation port are set. Therefore, in the operation port entry command setting process of FIG. 40, first, it is determined whether or not there is an entry into the first operation port 25a (step S1720). The presence or absence of a ball entering the first working port 25a can be determined by various methods. For example, when a ball entering the first working port 25a is detected by the above-described working port ball entry process (see FIG. 36). (Step S1620: Yes), when a ball entering the second working port 25b is detected (Step S1628: Yes), a flag is set, and any flag is entered by referring to this flag. What is necessary is just to detect. Alternatively, as described above, the state of the storage area 142 when the remaining time processing was executed last time is compared with the state of the current storage area 142, and the number of reservations in the first working port 25a increases. It is good also as what judges the presence or absence of the entrance into the 1st operation port 25a by judging whether it is.

  If there is no entry into the first operation port 25a, there is no need to set an operation port entry command corresponding to the first operation port 25a, and then an operation port entry command corresponding to the second operation port 25b. (Step S1720: No). In the process of setting the operation port entry command for the second operation port 25b, as in the case of the first operation port 25a, first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the second operation port 25b (step S1732). Whether or not there is a ball entering the second working port 25b can be determined by the same method as that for determining whether or not there is a ball entering the first working port 25a. If there is a ball entering the second operation port 25b (step S1732: Yes), the “second operation” is an operation port ball entry command that transmits to the sub-control device 200 that the ball has entered the second operation port 25b. The “entrance ball command” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1734).

  On the other hand, when there is a ball entering the first working port 25a (step S1720: Yes), not only the fact that there is a ball entering the first working port but also various types related to the ball entering. The following processes are executed to transmit this information to the sub-control device 200 as well. First, in order to refer to the value (counter information at the time of holding) acquired from each counter at the time of entering the ball, a storage area in which the counter information at the time of holding is stored is specified (FIG. 40: step S1722). That is, in the first working port holding storage area (see FIG. 12) in which information is stored when entering the first working port 25a, four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area are provided. Therefore, it is specified in which storage area the on-hold counter information subject to command setting is stored. Here, it is the latest entry that is the target of the entry entry command, and as described above, the counter value is stored in order from the first area. Therefore, if the number of holds is grasped by referring to the number-of-holds storage area 142a, it is possible to specify the storage area in which the counter information at the time of holding corresponding to the latest entry is stored. For example, if the number of holds is 3, the on-hold counter information is stored in the three storage areas of the first area, the second area, and the third area. It can be determined that the counter information is stored in the third area, which is the last storage area, in the order in which the on-hold counter information is stored.

When the storage area corresponding to the entry is specified in this way (step S1722), the value of the big hit random number counter 141a stored in the big hit random number storage area 142b of the specified storage area is acquired (step S1724). If the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is acquired in this way, it is possible to acquire the determination result of the jackpot lottery by referring to the jackpot lottery table. However, in this embodiment, instead of referring to the jackpot lottery table, a “holding type table” described below is referred to. In this way, as will be described next, it is possible to acquire not only the success determination result of the jackpot lottery, but also the hold type determined for each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a hold type table. As shown in the figure, in the hold type table, a hold type is associated with each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a. Here, the correspondence between each value of the jackpot random number counter 141a and the jackpot type corresponds to the aforementioned jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 10). That is, in the jackpot lottery table for the uncertain change state shown in FIG. 10A, lottery values (values of the jackpot random number counter) “7” and “307” are associated with jackpots. “7” and “307” are also associated with the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state shown in FIG. 10B (refer to the numbers surrounded by broken lines in FIG. 10). Correspondingly, in the hold type table of FIG. 42, the jackpot random number counter values “7” and “307” correspond to jackpots in both the non-probable variation state and the probabilistic variation state. It is categorized as “Pending Hold”.

  A value that is associated with a jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state but is not associated with a jackpot in the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state corresponds to the jackpot only in the probability variation state. Therefore, these values are categorized as “probability limited limited hold”. The other values that do not correspond to the jackpot in the jackpot lottery table are classified as “normal hold”.

  In step S1726 of FIG. 40, the hold type corresponding to the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter is specified by referring to such a hold type table. As will be described in detail later, by acquiring such a hold type, it is possible to execute a hold display effect that enhances the fun of the game using the hold display displayed on the effect display device 30. The specified hold type may be stored in the general-purpose area 146 of the RAM 140. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the hold type in each subsequent process.

  When the hold type is specified (step S1726), this time, in order to specify the jackpot type corresponding to the hold, the value of the jackpot type storage area 142c of the storage area is acquired (step S1728), and the corresponding value is acquired. The jackpot type is specified with reference to the sorting table of FIG. 11 (step S1730). When the hold type and the jackpot type are specified in this way, subsequently, each process of FIG. 41 is executed in which an operation entrance ball command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is determined based on the hold type and the jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not the hold type is normal hold (step S1750). In the case of the normal suspension (step S1750: Yes), the “first operation port entry command D” for transmitting the fact of the normal suspension to the sub control device 200 is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1764). In the sub-control device 200, by receiving the first operation port entry command D, the fact that there has been an entry to the first operation port 25a and the value of the big hit random number counter 141a acquired at the time of the entry is a big hit. It becomes possible to grasp that it does not fall under.

If the hold type is not normal hold (step S1750: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type corresponds to 2R jackpot (an implicit probability variable 2R jackpot or an explicit probability variable 2R jackpot) (step S1752). In the case of 2R jackpot (step S1752:
Yes) As in the case of the normal suspension, the first operation port entry command D is stored in the command buffer 145. That is, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, 2R jackpots and 15R jackpots can be generated, but the 2R jackpot has a property that the number of rounds is small and the opening time of the large entrance 60 is short. For this reason, in the case of winning the 2R jackpot and the case of winning the 15R jackpot, there is a tendency that the player's feeling of uplifting is greater when the 15R jackpot is won. In view of these points, in this embodiment, in the case of 15R jackpot, the sub-control device 200 normally responds to the occurrence of the hold corresponding to the 15R jackpot by transmitting a command different from the case of the normal hold. An effect different from the hold can be executed. On the other hand, in the case of 2R jackpot, the same effect as the normal hold can be executed by transmitting the same command as the normal hold.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the case of 2R jackpot, the same first operation port entry command (first operation port entry command D) as that for normal holding is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. However, even in the case of 2R big hit, it is good also as what transmits the 1st operation port entrance command different from normal holding. In this way, since it is possible to grasp that the hold corresponding to the 2R jackpot has occurred in the sub-control device 200, it is possible to execute an effect different from the normal hold in response to the occurrence of the 2R jackpot hold. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if the same command is transmitted as described above, the number of types of commands can be suppressed, so the storage area of the ROM for storing the commands can be saved or the commands can be received. Thus, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sub-control device 200 that determines the command type.

  If it is not a 2R jackpot (if 15R jackpot, step S1752: No), it is then determined whether or not it is normally a 15R jackpot (step S1754). In the case of a normal 15R big hit (step S1754: Yes), the “first operation port entry command C” is stored in the command buffer 145 (step S1762). By receiving the “first operation port entry command C”, the sub-control device 200 recognizes that there has been an entry to the first operation port 25a, and the jackpot random number acquired when the entry is made It is possible to grasp that the value of the counter 141a corresponds to the jackpot and that the jackpot type is normally 15R jackpot.

  When it is not normally 15R big hit (in the case of probability variation 15R big hit, step S1754: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold type is probability change limited winning hold (step S1756). If the hold type is probability variation limited winning suspension (step S1756: Yes), “first operation entrance ball command B” is set (step S1760), and if it is not probability variation limited winning suspension (in the case of common winning suspension, step S1756: No), the “first operation port entry command A” is set (step S1758). By doing so, the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command A” or the “first operation port entry command B”, so that the jackpot random number counter acquired upon entry is received. It becomes possible to grasp that the value of 141a corresponds to the jackpot and that the type of jackpot is a probability variation 15R jackpot. In addition, when the “first operation entrance command A” is received, the holding type is the common winning hold, and when the “first operation entrance command B” is received, the hold type is definitely changed. It is possible to grasp that it is a limited winning hold. As described above, when various actuation port entry commands are set according to the hold type and the jackpot type, the entry operation command setting process of FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the entrance into the first operation port 25a is detected in the operation port entry process of FIG. 36, the “first operation port entry flag” is set and the second operation port is entered. When a ball entering 25b is detected, the “second working port ball entry flag” is set, and in the remaining time processing of FIG. 40, any one of the flags is set with reference to these flags. In this case, a command for entering the operation port is set (see FIG. 39: S1704). Therefore, when the operation port entry command setting process is completed, these flags are reset in response to the operation port entry command setting.

  The operation port entry command stored in the command buffer 145 by the operation port entry command setting process described above is returned to the external output process of the main loop process (see step S1000 in FIG. 13) after the remaining time is over. Is transmitted to the sub-control device 200. As a result, immediately after a ball enters the operation port 25, it is possible to transmit the operation port input command to the sub-control device 200.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory view exemplifying the data structure of the above-mentioned various operation entrance ball commands. As shown in the drawing, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation port entry command is composed of two bytes, an upper byte and a lower byte. Of these, the upper 4 bits of the upper byte correspond to the types of commands such as the change start command, shift notification command, and opening start command, and all the commands shown in the figure are action entry commands. From these, the same value “1000” is set. On the other hand, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are set according to whether the working port that has entered the ball is the first working port 25a or the second working port 25b. In the operation port entry command corresponding to the ball (first operation port entry command A to first operation port entry command D), it is set to “1000”, and in the second operation port entry command, “1100 "Is set. Therefore, in the sub-control device 200, the command type is identified by referring to the upper byte of the command, and any of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b is specified. It is possible to specify whether the command is an operation entrance ball command resulting from entering the operation aperture.

  In addition, there are four types of commands from the first operation port input command A to the first operation port input command D in the operation port input command related to the input to the first operation port. It is possible to identify which command is a command by referring to the lower byte. In other words, different data for each command is set in the lower byte of the command for entering the operation port for the first operation port. For this reason, the sub-control device 200 can identify which command is one of the four types of commands by referring to the lower byte of the received operation entrance ball command. As described above, since the command to be transmitted is determined based on the hold type and the jackpot type, the sub-control device 200 identifies the command in this way, thereby grasping the hold type and the jackpot type, as well as the hold type and the jackpot type. An effect mode can be determined based on the type.

  Note that such an operation hole entry command may be stored in advance in the ROM 110, read out from the ROM 110, and stored in the command buffer 145, or the MPU 102 may operate each bit of 2-byte data to execute the command. And the created command may be stored in the command buffer 145.

  As described above, in the working port entrance processing of the present embodiment, based on the value of each counter (holding counter information) acquired when the game ball enters the working port 25, the holding type and jackpot The type is specified, and the operation entrance ball command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is determined based on the specified hold type and jackpot type. For this reason, in the sub-control device 200, it is possible to specify the hold type and the jackpot type based on the received operation opening ball command, and as a result, determine the effect mode based on the hold type and the jackpot type. Is possible.

As described above, if the main control device 100 determines the holding-entry ball entering command by specifying the holding type and the jackpot type based on the on-hold counter information, the sub-control device 200 determines the jackpot type and the holding based on the command. Since the type can be specified, there is no need to transmit the on-hold counter information to the sub-control device 200. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the data size of the command transmitted to the sub control device 200 increases while the sub control device 200 can grasp the hold type and the jackpot type.

  Further, when the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a (holding counter information) is stored in the command transmitted from the main control device 100 to the sub control device 200, a signal between the main control device 100 and the sub control device 200 is illegally transmitted. By reading, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a may be obtained. In such a case, there is a possibility that a lottery value corresponding to the jackpot will be estimated based on the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a, or the entrance timing for winning the jackpot may be estimated. In this respect, if the hold type or jackpot type is transmitted to the sub-control device 200 using the operation entrance ball command in this way, even if the signal is illegally read, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a itself is read. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which damage is caused by such fraud.

  In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the setting process of the operation entrance ball command is executed in the remaining time process (see step S1706 in FIG. 39). In this way, processing related to the progress of the game is executed in the main loop processing, and if the operation entrance ball command is set in the remaining time after executing each processing, the operation entrance ball command is set. Even if the processing becomes complicated, it is possible to create an operation entrance ball command without hindering each processing in the main loop processing. For example, in the above-described working port entry command setting process (see FIG. 40) of the present embodiment, which holding type corresponds to which holding type the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the working port. Although it is specified by referring to the table, in order to specify the hold type, the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the ball is checked against each of a plurality of numerical values associated with the hold type table. There is a need to. For example, in the example of the hold type table shown in FIG. 42, each numerical value (“7” “307”) associated with “common winning hold” and “probability limited limited hold” are associated. It is necessary to collate the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the ball with each numerical value. Since a plurality of numerical values must be collated in this way, the processing for specifying the hold type tends to increase the processing time.

  Of course, if the numerical value associated with the hold type table is determined according to a simple rule, it is possible to simplify such collation processing. For example, if a numerical value from “0” to “20” is associated with the probability variation limited winning suspension, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter acquired at the time of entering the ball is “20 or less”. It is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation limited hold is satisfied. However, since the hold type table corresponds to the jackpot lottery table as described above, if the hold type table is to be simplified in this way, the jackpot lottery table must be simplified. In such a case, since the lottery value corresponding to the jackpot follows a simple rule, this time, it becomes easy to be damaged by fraud. For these reasons, it is actually difficult to set the numerical value associated with the hold type table (the numerical value associated with the hold type corresponding to the jackpot) according to a simple rule. The verification process to be performed takes time. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if it takes time to specify the hold type, since this process is performed in the remaining time, it is possible to avoid the possibility of hindering each process in the main loop process. .

Further, in the ball ball game machine having a plurality of operation ports like the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, since processing must be performed for the plurality of operation ports, it has a single operation port. Compared with a ball game machine, there is a tendency that the operation opening ball command setting process is inevitably prolonged. For example, in the operation port entry command setting process of FIG. 40, when there is an entry in both the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b, the operation port entry for the entry into the first operation port 25a. Command setting processing (each processing from step S1722 to step S1730 in FIG. 40 and each processing in FIG. 41), and processing for setting an operation port entry command for entering the second operation port 25b (step S1734 in FIG. 40). ), Both of which are necessary to process.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, since the operation entrance ball command setting process is performed in the remaining time process, even if the process takes time, the execution of other processes performed in the main loop process is hindered. It is possible to avoid the possibility of coming.

  Of course, it is possible to avoid the possibility of causing trouble not only for each process in the main loop process but also for each process in the timer interrupt process executed by interrupting the main loop process, and each process executed in the timer interrupt process. Can be properly implemented. For example, in the timer interrupt process, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a is updated (see step S1604 in FIG. 35), but if a delay occurs in the timer interrupt process repetition cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), the jackpot random number The probability that the counter 141a points to each value is not the same between the values. For example, in the state where the jackpot random number counter 141a points to “0”, if the repetition cycle of the timer interrupt processing is delayed, the time pointed to “0” becomes longer than the time pointed to other numerical values. , The probability of indicating “0” is higher than the probability of indicating other numerical values. When the operation port incoming ball command setting process is executed in the timer interrupt process, if the operation port incoming ball command setting process takes time, there is a possibility that such inconvenience may occur due to that.

  In this regard, if the processing for entering the entrance ball command is performed for the remaining time, even if the entrance ball command setting process takes time, the processing time for the timer interrupt processing is prolonged and the timer interrupt processing is performed in a predetermined manner. There is no risk of being unable to execute in a time cycle. Therefore, the counter update process (step S1604 in FIG. 35) executed in the timer interrupt process and the process of detecting a ball entering the operation port 25 or the through operation port 24 (see steps S1606 and S1608) are surely performed. It is possible to execute the game appropriately by executing it. The timer interrupt process can be executed by interrupting the command setting process even when the command setting process is being executed (the MPU 102 interrupts the command setting process and executes the timer interrupt process). Even if it takes a long time, timer interrupt processing can be reliably executed.

  In addition, since the timer interrupt process can be executed reliably, the hold counter information is reliably acquired by the timer interrupt process when executing the operation entrance ball command setting process. Based on the information, it is possible to reliably set the operation entrance ball command. For the above reasons, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the data amount of the command to be transmitted to the sub-control device 200 is increased while appropriately performing various effects based on the hold type and the jackpot type. It is possible to avoid such a situation, and in addition, it is possible to appropriately control the game while avoiding the possibility of trouble in the control of the game.

  Note that, as described above, various commands such as the operation opening ball command stored in the command buffer 145 of the main control device 100 are sub-controlled in the external output process of the main loop process (see step S1000 in FIG. 13). Since it is transmitted to the device 200, the sub-control device 200 can receive this and execute various processes related to the production.

Here, since the sub-control device 200 can grasp the hold type and the jackpot type by receiving the operation entrance ball command, it is possible to determine the production contents according to the hold type and the jackpot type. . Of course, the sub-control device 200 can grasp the jackpot type and the hold type by the “variation start command”, but as described above, the variation start command is transmitted when the symbol variation display is started. On the other hand, the operation port entry command is transmitted immediately after entering the operation port 25. For this reason, even if the variable display of the symbol for the incoming ball is not started immediately (when it is put on hold), it is possible to grasp the hold type and the jackpot type with the sub-control device 200. It is possible to reflect the jackpot type or the hold type in the effect that is executed prior to the timing at which the event is started (the effect that is executed during the hold). In the following, as an example of reflecting the jackpot type and the hold type in the contents of the processing executed by the sub control device 200 in response to the command transmitted from the main control device 100 and the effect executed during such hold, The “hold display effect” will be described.

E. Control contents of sub-control unit:
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the flow of command response processing executed by the sub-control device 200. Such a process is a process executed by the MPU mounted on the sub-control apparatus 200, and the MPU of the sub-control apparatus 200 repeatedly executes such a process at a predetermined time period (for example, 2 msec period), whereby the main control apparatus 100 The commands sent from are processed one after another. In addition, commands sent from the main control device 100 are stored in a command buffer provided in the sub-control device 200. In the command handling process, commands are taken out from the command buffer one by one, Execute the process corresponding to the command. Note that if there is no command to be processed in the command buffer, such as when a command has not yet been sent from the main control device 100 or when all the sent commands have been processed, the process starts executing. Exit immediately after.

  From the main control device 100, there are various types of commands such as a change start command for notifying that the change display of symbols has been started on the segment type display device 70 and an opening start command for notifying that the opening time has started. Will be sent. Therefore, in the command handling process, the type of the command extracted from the command buffer is specified, and the process corresponding to the type of command is performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is an operation entrance ball command (FIG. 44: step S2000). As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the command has a 2-byte data structure, and the command type is stored in the 2-byte data. Therefore, by analyzing such data, it is possible to determine whether or not the command is an operation entrance ball command. For example, in the operation entrance ball command illustrated in FIG. 43, the command type is stored in the upper byte of the two bytes constituting the command as described above, and the upper 4 bits “1000” of the upper byte are set. Indicates that the command is a ball entry command. Therefore, by analyzing the upper 4 bits of the upper byte of the command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is an operation entrance ball command. If the command is an operation entrance ball command (step S2000: Yes), in response to this, the “operation entrance entrance command response process” in step S2012 is executed.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing for entering the operation port command. In such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the operation port entry command to be processed is the second operation port entry command (step S2030). As illustrated in FIG. 43, since the operation entrance ball command has different data (bit string) set for each command, it is determined whether or not it is the second operation entrance command by examining the command data. Is possible.

When the command to be processed is the second operation port entry command (step S2030: Yes), the numerical value of the second operation port retention number counter provided in the sub-control device 200 is counted up (step S2048). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the ball game machine 1 of this embodiment
In 0, the sub-control device 200 includes a holding number counter (a first working port holding number counter, a second working port holding number counter) that counts the number of holdings for each of the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b. By using these counters, it is possible for the sub-control device 200 to grasp the number of suspensions of each operation port. When an operation entrance ball command is received, it means that the number of holdings has increased, so these counters are counted up. As will be described later, these counters are counted down when the main controller 100 completes the hold and sends a hold shift notification command. The sub-control device 200 can reflect the number of reservations at each operation port in the display content of the effect display device 30 based on the values of the first operation port reservation number counter and the second operation port reservation number counter.

  When the second working port hold number counter is counted up (FIG. 45: Step S2048), in order to display a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 30 as the second working port hold increases, The “operation port hold increase command” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2050). In the display control device 300, the display state of the second working port hold display area (see FIG. 6A) on the effect display device 30 is updated by receiving the second working port hold increase command. That is, in response to the increase in the number of holdings of the second working port 25b, the same number of design symbols as the number of holdings after the increase is transferred from the first area b1 to the fourth area b4 of the second working port holding display area. Display in order from the first area (displayed with left justification). By doing so, it is possible to display the number of reservations in the second working port using the effect display device 30.

  On the other hand, when the operation port entry command is not the second operation port entry command (step S2030: No in FIG. 45), the command is the operation port entry command for entering the first operation port. The value of the one-operation-port hold number counter is counted up (step S2032). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation port entry command is “first operation port entry command A” (step S2034). If it is the first operation port entry command A (step S2034: Yes), in response to this, the “hold increase command A” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2036). When receiving the hold increase command A, the display control device 300 displays the same number of design symbols as the number of hold of the first operation port in the first operation port hold display area (see FIG. 6) of the effect display device 30. At this time, in this embodiment, a hold display effect is displayed for displaying different design symbols for each type of the hold increase command. The hold display effect will be described in detail later.

  If the processing target entry command is not the first entry command A (step S2034: No in FIG. 45), it is subsequently determined whether or not the “first entry command B”. (Step S2038) If it is not the first operation port entry command B, it is subsequently determined whether or not it is the “first operation port entry command C” (Step S2042). And if it is the 1st operation mouth entrance command B, "hold increase command B" will be transmitted corresponding to this (step S2040), and if it is the 1st operation entrance entrance command C, In response to this, a “hold increase command C” is transmitted to the display control apparatus 300 (step S2044). When the operation port entry command to be processed is not any of the first operation port entry command A to the first operation port entry command C, it is “first operation entrance command D”. In response to this, a “hold increase command D” is transmitted to the display control apparatus 300. The hold display effect performed by the display control apparatus 300 in response to the hold increase command B or the hold increase command D will be described in detail later. As described above, when the pending increase command corresponding to each operation entrance command is transmitted to the display control device 300, the operation entrance command response processing in FIG. 45 is terminated, and the command response processing in FIG. Return (see step S2012 in FIG. 44).

In the command corresponding process of FIG. 44, when the command to be processed is not an operation entrance ball command (step S2000: No), it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is a “pending shift notification command”. (Step S2002). Whether or not the command is a hold shift notification command can be determined by analyzing the command to be processed, as in the case of the operation opening ball command described above. If the command to be processed is a hold shift notification command (step S2002: Yes), the “hold shift notification command handling process” in step S2010 is executed.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the pending shift notification command response process. As described above, since the hold shift notification command is a command transmitted when the hold is digested, in this process, a hold number counter (first operation port hold) that receives the hold shift notification command and grasps the hold number is received. The number counter and the second working port hold number counter) may be counted down. First, it is determined which of the first working port 25a and the second working port 25b is the working port where the suspension is digested (step S2070). As described above, since the hold shift notification command includes information specifying the operation port where the hold is consumed, the first operation port 25a and the second operation port 25b are analyzed by analyzing the hold shift notification command. It is possible to determine which of the working port retention is digested.

  When the subject of the pending digestion is the second working port 25b (step S2070: Yes), the pending of the second working port 25b is digested, so the value of the second working port retained number counter is counted down (step) S2076). Next, in order to update the hold display displayed on the effect display device 30, a “second operation port hold number decrease command” is transmitted to the display control device 300. When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 erases one design symbol for hold display displayed in the second operation port hold display area (see FIG. 6) of the effect display device 30 from the right. Thereby, it is possible to display the same number of design symbols as the number of reserved second working ports 25b after the digestion, reflecting the decrease in the number of reserved items in the second working port reserved display area of the effect display device 30. .

  On the other hand, when the subject of the pending digestion is the first working port 25a (step S2070: No in FIG. 46), since the retaining of the first working port 25a is digested, the value of the first working port retained number counter is set. Count down (step S2072). Next, as in the case of the second operation port 25b described above, a command for updating the hold display of the effect display device 30 (first operation port hold number decrease command) is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2074). . In response to such a command, the display control device 300 erases one of the design symbols for holding display displayed in the first working port holding display area from the right, thereby reducing the holding of the first working port 25a first. It is reflected in the working port hold display area. Thereby, it is possible to display the same number of design symbols as the number of reservations of the first working port 25a after the digestion in the first working port holding display area. With the above processing, when the decrease in the number of holdings is reflected in the display of the holding number counter (the first operating port holding number counter and the second operating port holding number counter) of the sub-control device 200 and the holding display area of the effect display device 30. Then, the pending shift notification command handling process is terminated and the process returns to the command handling process of FIG. 44 (see step S2010 of FIG. 44).

  In the command corresponding process of FIG. 44, when the command to be processed is not an operation entrance ball command (step S2000: No) and is not a hold shift notification command (step S2002: No), then, it relates to a special advantageous state. It is determined whether it is a command (“special advantageous state start command” or “special advantageous state end command”) (step S2004). If the command is related to the special advantageous state (step S2004: Yes), processing corresponding to these commands is performed (step S2008).

First, in the case of the “special advantageous state start command”, the sub controller 200 recognizes that the special advantageous state has been started in the main controller 100, in the RAM of the sub controller 200. Set the flag. Further, in order to notify the display control device 300 that the special advantageous state has started, a “special advantageous state start command” is transmitted to the display control device 300. When notifying the display control device 300, the main control device 1
The special advantageous state start command received from 00 may be extracted from the command buffer and transmitted to the display control device 300 as it is. In this way, it is not necessary to previously store the command to be transmitted to the display control device 300 in the sub control device 200, so that the storage capacity of the ROM of the sub control device 200 can be saved. Of course, a command different from the command received from the main control device 100 may be transmitted. When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 sets a “special advantageous state flag” for storing the special advantageous state. In the display control device 300 of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol to be displayed in the hold display area of the effect display device 30 is determined according to the state of the special advantageous state flag. This point will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, in the case of the “special advantageous state end command”, the special advantageous state flag set in the RAM of the sub-control device 200 so that the sub-control device 200 knows that the special advantageous state has ended in the main control device 100. To reset. Further, as in the case of the special advantageous state start command described above, a “special advantageous state end command” is transmitted to the display control device 300 so that the display control device 300 can grasp that the special advantageous state has ended. . Also at this time, the command received from the main control device 100 may be transmitted to the display control device 300 as it is, like the special advantageous state start command described above. Of course, a command different from the command received from the main control device 100 may be stored in advance and the command may be transmitted. When receiving such a command, the display control device 300 resets the “special advantageous state flag” described above.

  When the command to be processed is not a command related to the special advantageous state (step S2004: No), the command to be processed is “change start command”, “change end command”, or the like. These commands are dealt with by “general command handling process” (step S2006) described below.

  47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the flow of general command handling processing. In such processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command to be processed is a “variation start command” (step S2090). In the case of a change start command (step S2090: Yes), since the variable display of the symbol is started on the segment type display device 70, the contents of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 30 in accordance with the change display of the symbol are displayed. Perform the decision process. Such processing can be performed by referring to the effect content table storing the effect content.

  Here, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the symbol variation display is “indefinite probability variation 2R jackpot” or “special loss” (step S2092), The effect content table to be referred to is switched between “non-explicitly probable 2R jackpot” or “special loss” and other cases. The determination of whether or not the implicit probability change 2R is a big hit or special loss can be performed by analyzing a “game result command” (see step S1088 in FIG. 17) sent together with the change start command. That is, as described above, the game result command includes information on the result of the jackpot lottery and the type of jackpot. By analyzing this game result command, it is determined whether or not it is an unspecified probability 2R jackpot or special loss. Can be determined.

  In the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot or special loss, the content of the effect is determined with reference to the common effect content table (step S2094). In the common effect content table, since a plurality of effect contents with different time required for effect are stored, based on the variable display time of the pattern of the segment type display device 70, it is actually executed from the plurality of effect contents. Determine the contents of the performance to be performed. Since the change start command includes information related to the change display time of the symbols of the segment type display device 70, it is possible to grasp the change display time by analyzing the change start command.

  In the common effect content table, the display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the effect display device 30, the lighting state of various lamps provided in the bullet ball game machine 10, the content of the sound output from the speaker 14, etc. are set. It is possible to keep. In addition, it is possible to set in detail the manner in which the effect symbol is displayed. For example, the variable display time for variably displaying the effect symbol of the effect display device 30, the presence / absence of the reach effect described above, and the reach effect can be set. In the case of execution, it is possible to set the timing for starting the reach display (the time from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach display). Furthermore, at the time of reach display, which of the lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6) of the effect display device 30 is used for reach display, the type of character symbol 32 used for reach display, and variable display It is also possible to set a combination of the character symbols 32 when the display is stopped and stopped. In step S2092 of FIG. 47, the contents of effects such as the lighting modes of various lamps and the patterns of effects displayed on the effect display device 30 are determined by referring to such a common effect content table.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the same effect content table (common effect content table) is referred to in the case of the implicit probability variation 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss. By doing so, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lighting state of various lamps, the display content of the effect display device 30, and the like are the same in the case of the unspecified probability 2R jackpot and in the case of special loss. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to discriminate the implicit probability change 2R jackpot and the special loss from the lighting state of various lamps and the display content of the effect display device 30. This makes it possible for the player to hold the expectation that the probability variation state may have occurred even in the case of a special loss, and as a result, the player can be attracted by the game.

  On the other hand, when neither the uncertain probability variation 2R big hit or special loss is found (step S2092: No), the production content is determined with reference to the normal production content table. In the same manner as the above-described common effect content table, this normal effect content table is also a variety of contents related to the effect modes such as the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 30, the variable display time of effect symbols, and the lighting status of various lamps. Can be set in advance. In step S2096, based on the fluctuation display time obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command (symbol fluctuation display time on the segment type display device 70), the contents of the effect to be executed are determined from these effects.

  The effect content determined in step S2094 or step S2096 is set in the effect content area provided on the RAM of the sub-control device 200. The sub-control device 200 can execute the effect of the determined effect content by controlling the operation of various lamps and the speaker 14 while referring to the effect content area. In addition, the sub control device 200 stores the effect content related to the effect display device 30 in the “display content command” and transmits it to the display control device 300. In the display control device 300, by displaying various images on the effect display device 30 according to the display content command, it is possible to display the effect image on the effect display device 30 along the determined effect content.

  In the general command handling process, if the command to be processed is not a change start command (step S2090: No), it is then determined whether or not the command to be processed is an “opening start command” (step S2098). If it is an opening start command (step S2098: Yes), the opening time is started in the main control device 100, so that the effect content to be executed during the opening time is determined, and the determined effect content is sub-control device. The effect content area is set to 200 (step S2100). Further, the contents of the effect performed by the effect display device 30 are stored in the effect content command and transmitted to the display control device 300. As a result, it is possible to execute effects using the various lamps, the speaker 14, and the effect display device 30 with the start of the opening time.

  If the command to be processed is not an opening start command (step S2098: No), it is then determined whether it is an “ending start command” (step S2102). In the case of an ending start command (step S2102: Yes), in response to the start of the ending time, the content of the effect to be executed at the ending time is determined and set in the effect content area (step S2104). In addition, the production contents related to the production display device 30 are stored in the production content command and transmitted to the display control device 300. As a result, various effects can be performed in accordance with the start of the ending time.

  If the command to be processed is not an ending command (step S2012: No), it is subsequently determined whether it is a “large entrance opening command” (FIG. 48: step S2120). In the case of the large entrance opening command (step S2120: Yes), in response to the opening of the large entrance 60, the content of the effect performed when the large entrance 60 is opened is set in the effect content area ( Step S2124). If the command to be processed is not a large entrance opening command (step S2120: No), it is determined whether or not it is a “large entrance closing command” (step S2126). If it is a mouth closing command, the content of the exercise to be performed when the large entrance 60 is closed is set in the effect content area (step S2128). Thereby, according to the opening / closing operation | movement of the large entrance 60, it becomes possible to perform the effect for an open state, and the effect for a closed state. As for the effect at the time of opening the big entrance and the effect at the time of closing the big entrance, the content of the effect related to the effect display device 30 is stored in the effect content command and the display control device 300 as in the case of the ending effect described above. It is possible to execute an effect using the effect display device 30 by transmitting to.

  In addition, when the opening / closing mode of the large entrance 60 is in the low frequency entrance mode, the time for the large entrance 60 to be in the open state is short. It may be determined whether the frequency entry mode, and the effect is executed only in the high frequency entry mode. The open / closed mode of the large entrance 60 is selected from the high frequency entrance mode and the low frequency entrance mode when the large entrance opening command or the large entrance closing command is set. By storing the information to be stored in the command, the sub-control device 200 can determine.

  If the command to be processed is not a large entrance opening command or a large entrance closing command (step S2120: No, step S2126: No), it is next determined whether or not it is a “variation end command” (step S2130). In the case of a change end command (step S2130: Yes), in response to the end of the change display time of the symbol, the effect image that has been variably displayed on the effect display device 30 is stopped (determined to be displayed). A “variable display stop command” is transmitted to the display control device 300. In response to this, the display control device 300 stops the variable display of the effect display device 30 and displays the final display. On the other hand, when the command to be processed is not a change end command (No in step S2130), since it is other various effect commands, effect setting processing is performed corresponding to each command. Although detailed description is omitted, various effects can be executed using the speaker 14, various lamps, and the effect display device 30 by transmitting such various commands from the main control device 100 to the sub-control device 200 in a timely manner.

As described above, in the command response processing (FIGS. 47 and 48) performed by the sub control device 200, various commands transmitted from the main control device 100 are received and processing corresponding to the type of command is performed. Thus, various effects are executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the main control device 100. At this time, it is also possible to execute various effects using the effect display device 30 by transmitting various commands to the display control device 300. In addition, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the hold control type and the jackpot type can be grasped by the sub-control device 200 based on the operation port entry command. As an aspect, the image displayed in the hold display area (first operation port hold display area and second work port hold display area) of the effect display device 30 is changed according to the hold type or the jackpot type “hold display effect” Can also be executed. Hereinafter, the hold display effect performed by the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

F. Hold display effect:
49 and 50 are explanatory views illustrating the contents of the hold display effect of this embodiment. FIG. 49A illustrates a state in which design symbols with a shell as a motif are displayed in three areas from the first area a1 to the third area a3 of the first working port hold display area. As described above, the first working port reservation display area corresponds to the number of reservations of the first working port 25a, and the number of design symbols (holding display symbols) in the first working port reservation display area is the first working port 25a. It is possible to display the number of holdings of the first operating port 25a by corresponding to the number of holdings.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), three design symbols are displayed in the first working port holding display area in response to the number of holdings of the first working port 25a being “3”. ing. Similarly for the second working port hold display area, the number of design symbols displayed in the second working port hold display area can be made to correspond to the number of hold of the second working port 25b, as shown in FIG. 49 (a). In the example, two design symbols are displayed in the second working port holding display area in correspondence with the number of holdings of the second working port 25b being “2”. As described above, when the display control device 300 receives the hold number increase command, the display control apparatus 300 adds one design symbol to the hold display area of the operation port where the hold is increased, and on the other hand, the hold number decrease command (first When the operation port hold number decrease command or the second operation port hold number decrease command is received, one design symbol is deleted from the corresponding hold display area. By doing so, it is possible to quickly reflect the change in the number of reservations at each operating port in the display content of the effect display device 30.

  In this embodiment, the design symbol displayed in the hold display area is called a hold display symbol. Such a hold display symbol may be stored in advance in the ROM of the display control device 300 and read out from the ROM and displayed when displayed on the effect display device 30.

  Here, in the hold display effect of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol to be displayed in the first operation port hold display area is determined based on the type of the operation port entering command received by the sub control device 200. First, when the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command A”, as illustrated in FIG. The hold display symbol (hold display symbol A) is displayed. As described above, when the sub control device 200 receives the first operation entrance command A, the “hold increase command A” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (see step S2036 in FIG. 45). The display control apparatus 300 may display the hold display symbol A when the hold increase command A is received.

  When the hold increase command A is received, the hold display symbol A may not be displayed at all times, but the hold display symbol A may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned “special advantageous state flag” is set, that is, in the case of a special advantageous state (a state in which the probability change state and the high support mode are in progress), such a hold display symbol A is displayed. In other cases, a description will be given assuming that a normal hold display design (in the example of FIG. 49, a design design with a shell as a motif) is displayed.

As described above, the first operation entrance ball command A is transmitted when the holding type is “common winning hold” (see step S1758 of FIG. 41). In this way, when the holding type is common winning hold, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a acquired at the time of entering the operation port is either the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state or the jackpot lottery table for the non-probability variation state. Is also a jackpot (see FIG. 10 and FIG. 42). For this reason, if the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol A is digested and the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot will be won regardless of whether the gaming state is a probability change state or a non-probability change state.

  Therefore, by displaying the hold display symbol A, the player recognizes that when the hold on the hold display symbol A is digested, a big hit will occur in both the non-probability change state and the probability change state. It becomes possible to make it. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing the result generated when the hold is digested, and by changing the aim of the game ball to be fired according to the recognized result, It is also possible to change. This makes it possible to provide the player with a new way of enjoying playing a game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the displayed on-hold display symbol.

  For example, when the hold display symbol A is displayed, the player wins the jackpot in both the probability change state and the non-probability change state, so the player does not have to digest the hold during the probability change state. It may be considered that it is sufficient to digest the suspension after ending the process and becoming indeterminate. In such a case, a game ball may be launched aiming at entering the second working port 25b so as not to digest such holding. As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold of the second operation port 25b is digested in preference to the hold of the first operation port 25a, so that the game ball is put into the second operation port 25b. If the number of reserves of the second operation port 25b is secured by entering the ball, it is possible to avoid digestion of the hold on the hold display symbol A.

  On the other hand, the player may want to win the jackpot as soon as possible. For example, if you have a limited time to play a game, such as when the game hall is close, or if you have another job after the game, you should finish the jackpot game within the limited time. There is a tendency to want to secure a ball. In such a case, the second operation port 25b is put on hold by removing the aim from the second operation port 25b so that the launched game ball does not enter the second operation port 25b or by stopping the launch of the game ball. By eliminating, it is possible to digest the hold on the hold display symbol A. In this way, the player can change the way the game proceeds based on his / her own judgment, so that the game can be further enjoyed.

  In addition, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of jackpot related to the hold display symbol A is a probability change jackpot (probability change 15R jackpot) (see step S1754 and step S1758 of FIG. 41), and hold Since the display symbol A is displayed in the probability variation state (in the case of a special advantageous state), by displaying the hold display symbol A, a game is played aiming to enter the second operating port 25b. It is possible to guide the player to the game mode. That is, the player can recognize that if a big hit is generated after the hold on the hold display symbol A is digested, the probability change state occurs after the big win. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs due to the ball entering the second operating port 25b, there may be a non-probable change state after the big win (usually when winning a big hit type that does not become a probable change state such as 15R big hit) ). Generally, in the probability variation state, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the non-probability variation state, so the player tends to play a game while hoping that the probability variation state will continue. In particular, as in this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by jackpot game in the probability variation state is almost equal to the number of prize balls that can be obtained by jackpot game in the non-probability state (significantly less If there is no such), this tendency is stronger. Therefore, if you leave the hold on the display display symbol A until you win the jackpot and the gaming state becomes an uncertain change state, you will digest the hold when it becomes an uncertain change state. Thus, it is possible to return the gaming state to the probable state again. For this reason, when the on-hold display symbol A is displayed, the player tends to play a game aiming at entering the second operation port 25b. By displaying the hold display symbol A in this way, it is possible to guide the player to a game mode aiming at the second operation port 25b.

Note that the hold display symbol A may be displayed not in the probability variation state but in the non-probability variation state, and in this way, the game mode is changed to avoid entering the second operating port 25b. It is possible to guide the person. That is, the player can recognize that it is possible to shift from the non-probability change state to the probability change state by digesting the hold related to the hold display symbol A. As described above, since the player has a tendency to desire to advance the game in the probability changing state, in such a case, the second operation port 25b tries to shift to the probability changing state by digesting the holding on the holding display symbol A. There is a tendency to shoot game balls in a state where the aim is removed from the game, or to stop the shoot of game balls. This makes it possible to guide the player to a game mode that avoids entering the second operating port 25b.

  FIG. 49 (c) shows a state in which a hold display symbol (hold display symbol B) in which the character “probability” is added in a circle is displayed. In the hold display effect of the present embodiment, such a hold display symbol B is displayed when the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation entrance ball command B”. As described above, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command B, the sub-control device 200 transmits a “hold increase command B” to the display control device 300 (see step S2038 in FIG. 45). In the control device 300, when the hold increase command B is received, the hold display symbol B may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold display symbol B is displayed only in the special advantageous state (probability change state and the state in the high support mode) as in the case of the hold display symbol A described above, and in other cases Shall display a normal hold display symbol.

  As described above, the first operation port entry command B is a case where the hold type of the hold generated by entering the operation port is “probability limited limited hold” (see step S1760 in FIG. 41). In the case of the probability variation limited winning suspension, the value of the jackpot random number counter 141a acquired at the time of entering the operation port corresponds to the jackpot only in the jackpot lottery table for the probability variation state. Therefore, when the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol B is digested and the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot is won only when the gaming state is in the probable change state, and the jackpot is not won in the case of the non-probability change state. It will be.

  By displaying such a hold display symbol B, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of thinking about how to proceed with the game or selecting how to proceed with the game according to the displayed hold display symbol. That is, if the player thinks that the hold applied to the hold display symbol B will be won in the probable state only when the hold on the hold display symbol B is won in the probable state, the second operation port In order to prevent the on-hold digestion of the first operating port 25a from being performed only after the on-hold digestion of the 25b, a game ball is fired with the aim removed from the second operating port 25b, or the game ball Can be stopped. By displaying the hold display symbol B in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting how to advance the game according to the hold display symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the hold display symbol B is not displayed in the non-probability change state, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the player loses interest in the game due to the hold display symbol B. It has become. In other words, when such a hold display symbol B is displayed in the non-probability change state, the player thinks that the player could win a big hit, but could not win because the game state is in the non-probability change state. It may happen that you wake up with the impression that you have lost. In this regard, if the on-hold display symbol B is not displayed in the uncertain change state, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the player has such dissatisfaction.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the hold on the hold display symbol B corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (probability variation 15R jackpot) (see step S1754, step S1756, step S1760 in FIG. 41). From this, by displaying the hold display symbol B, it is possible to strongly induce the player to proceed with the game to avoid entering the second operating port 25b. That is to say, the hold on the hold display symbol B not only wins the jackpot only in the case of the probability change state, but the gaming state is surely changed to the probability change state after winning the jackpot. In general, the player tends to want to proceed with the game in a probable state, and therefore has a tendency to strongly desire to quickly digest such holding. For this reason, since the tendency to play a game while avoiding entering the second operating port 25b is further increased, it is possible to strongly induce the player to a game mode that avoids entering the second operating port 25b.

  In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect performed when the hold of the second operation port 25b is digested because it is desired to quickly digest the hold on the hold display symbol B in this way. In other words, when the second operating port 25b has been put on hold and the jackpot is won, depending on the type of the jackpot that has been won, there may be a transition to a non-probable change state (usually a jackpot without a probable change state such as a 15R jackpot). in the case of). Therefore, when the hold of the second operating port 25b is digested and the variation display of the symbol is started on the effect display device 30, the player gazes at the effect display device 30 while hoping that no big hit will occur. This makes it possible to attract the player more strongly to the game.

  In addition, when the suspension of the second operating port 25b is digested and the effect display device 30 displays the variation of the effect symbol, the probability that the big hit will not occur is higher than the probability that the big win will occur. Therefore, in a state in which the hold display symbol B is displayed, it is possible to display a result (disappearance) desirable for the player on the effect display device 30 at a frequency higher than a result undesirable for the player (big hit). In general, in an effect that is normally performed using the effect display device 30, the frequency with which a desired result (image corresponding to a jackpot) is displayed is low, and the frequency with which an undesirable result (image corresponding to a loss) is displayed. Although it is high, a desired result can be displayed on the effect display device 30 at a frequency opposite to the normal frequency. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the player more than the normal effect performed using the effect display device 30, and to greatly increase the interest of the player than the normal effect.

  In addition, when the hold display symbol B is displayed, it is sufficient that the image corresponding to the detachment is displayed only a limited number of times until the hold is digested. It is possible to improve. In other words, the player can watch the display content of the effect display device 30 in a state where the player knows how many times the symbol is to be displayed before the hold on the hold display symbol B is consumed. . In such a case, every time an image corresponding to a miss is displayed, the remaining number of times is counted down, and the expectation that the target hold can be digested gradually will be gradually increased, and the target hold can be managed somehow. In addition, the display device 30 is watched while hoping that the image corresponding to the detachment should be continued several times. For this reason, the player's consciousness can be strongly attracted to the effect display device 30, and great joy can be given to the player when the intended hold is reached. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control device 200 receives the “first operation port entry command C”, as shown in FIG. A hold display symbol (hold display symbol C) is displayed. As described above, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command C, the “hold increase command C” is transmitted to the display control device 300 (step S2044 in FIG. 45 is executed). When the display control apparatus 300 receives the hold increase command C, the display control apparatus 300 may display the hold display symbol C. In this embodiment, similar to the above-described hold display symbol A and hold display symbol B, the hold display symbol C is displayed only in the special advantageous state (the state in the probable change state and in the high support mode), and the others In the case of, normal holding display symbols are displayed.

Even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while considering how to proceed with the game, like the hold display symbol A and the hold display symbol B described above. That is, since the hold for the hold display symbol C usually corresponds to the jackpot type 15R jackpot (see step S1754 and step S1762 in FIG. 41), when the hold for the hold display symbol C is digested, However, after the big hit game, it will shift from the probabilistic state to the non-probable state. Therefore, when a player who has visually recognized the hold display symbol C wants to continue the probability change state, in order to avoid the hold on the hold display symbol C being consumed, a game ball is placed in the second operation port 25b. What is necessary is just to make a ball enter and to increase the holding | maintenance number of the 2nd operation port 25b. On the other hand, if you want to win the jackpot because you do not mind the probability change state, you can launch a game ball with the aim off the second operating port 25b, or launch a game ball. What is necessary is just to digest the holding | maintenance concerning the hold display symbol C by stopping. Thus, even when the hold display symbol C is displayed, the player can play a game while considering how to proceed with the game according to the hold display symbol, and as a result, the game can be further enjoyed. .

  Further, in the hold display effect of the present embodiment, the hold display symbol C is displayed in the probability variation state, so that the hold display symbol C is displayed in the same manner as the hold display symbol A and the hold display symbol B described above. Thus, it is possible to guide the player to a specific game mode. That is, when the hold on the hold display symbol C is digested, the gaming state that has been in the probable change state shifts to the non-probability change state through the jackpot gaming state, but as described above, the player continues in the probabilistic change state. Since there is a tendency to desire to do so, there is a strong tendency to play the game so that the hold on the hold display symbol C is not digested. For this reason, by displaying the on-hold display symbol C, it is possible to strongly guide the player to a game mode in which a game is played aiming at entering the second operation port 25b.

  In the above description, when the sub-control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command A, the hold display symbol A is displayed, and when the sub control device 200 receives the first operation port entry command B, the display is on hold. Although it demonstrated as what displays the symbol B, you may display a common holding | maintenance display symbol by the case where the 1st operation port entrance command A is received, and the case where the 1st operation port entrance command B is received. . For example, when either the first operation port entry command A or the first operation port entry command B is received, a predetermined probability (for example, 50% probability) is shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown, a design symbol (holding display symbol D) with a question mark in a circle may be displayed.

  As described above, if the hold display symbol D is displayed both in the case of receiving the first operation port entry command A and in the case of receiving the first operation port entry command B, the player Indicates whether the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol D is a hold that wins a jackpot in any game state of the non-probability change state and the probability change state (hold corresponding to the operation entry command A), or the probability change state In this case, it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a hold to win a jackpot (hold corresponding to the operation entrance command B). As described above, the decision whether or not to hold the hold differs between the hold that wins the jackpot in both the non-probability state and the probability change state and the hold that wins the jackpot only in the case of the probability change state. When the hold display symbol D is displayed, the player determines whether the hold corresponds to the hold and determines whether to hold the hold. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing a game while predicting which hold is applicable. In addition, since the player digests the hold on the hold display symbol D while paying attention to whether the predicted result is correct, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in addition to the first operation port entry command A and the first operation port entry command B, a common hold display symbol may be displayed for the first operation port entry command C as well. That is, the first operation entrance command A, the first operation entrance command B, the first operation entrance command C
If any of the above is received, the same hold display symbol is displayed with a predetermined probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 50C, a design symbol (holding display symbol E) with two question marks in a circle may be displayed. As described above, the first operation entrance command A and the first operation entrance command B correspond to the probable big hit (see step S1754, step S1758, step S1760 in FIG. 41), but the first operation The jackpot corresponding to the entrance ball command C is not a promiscuous jackpot. There is a big difference between whether or not a promiscuous jackpot and a big jackpot (usually a big jackpot) will be in a probable state after the jackpot game, so depending on whether or not to hold the hold on the hold display symbol E, the situation of the subsequent game Is greatly affected. Therefore, since it is important for the player to predict which of the hold corresponding to the hold display symbol D is a hold corresponding to which command, the player is more concentrated on the prediction. In this way, by preserving the hold display symbol for the hold corresponding to the probability change jackpot and the hold corresponding to the jackpot other than the probability change jackpot, it is possible to predict which hold the common hold display symbol corresponds to. In addition, it is possible to strongly attract the player's consciousness, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game.

  Whether such a common hold display symbol (hold display symbol D or hold display symbol E) is displayed, or a hold display symbol associated with each command (hold display symbol A, hold display symbol B, hold) Whether to display the display symbol C) may be determined by lottery. Such a lottery can be executed by various methods, and any method may be used. In addition, the probability that the holding display symbol A is selected in the lottery (the probability in the lottery) and the probability that the holding display symbol D is selected (the probability in the lottery) are arbitrary. For example, the holding display symbol A is selected. If the probability of being held (probability in the lottery) and the probability of selecting the hold display symbol D (probability in the lottery) are set to the same level, any hold display symbol can be displayed with the same frequency. Is preferred.

  In the above description, in the case of common winning hold, the hold display symbol with the word “Keikyo” is displayed, and in the case of probability variation limited winning hold, the hold with the character “Probable” is given. It has been described that characters indicating the hold type are attached to the hold display design, such as displaying a display design. However, the hold display symbol does not necessarily need to be a symbol that clearly indicates the hold type in this way, and may be any symbol as long as it can be distinguished from other hold display symbols. For example, you may use the design which designed living things, such as a turtle, a whale, and an octopus. Even in such a case, if the respective holding display symbols can be distinguished from each other, the player knows in advance which holding type and jackpot type each holding display symbol corresponds to. Similar to the case of the hold display symbol in which the jackpot type is displayed, it is possible to determine how to advance the game based on the hold display symbol.

  As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the hold display effect that displays the hold display symbol corresponding to the jackpot type or the hold type in the hold display area of the effect display device 30. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, the process of determining the hold display symbol to be displayed based on the jackpot type or the hold type is executed in the operation entrance ball command setting process (see FIGS. 40 and 41) executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 100. is doing. And since the operation entrance ball command setting process is executed using the remaining time of the main loop process, even if it takes time to set the operation entrance ball command, each process in the main loop process In addition, there is no possibility of hindering each process in the timer interrupt process. Thereby, in the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game by determining the presentation mode based on the jackpot type or the hold type, but the situation in which the progress of the game is hindered Thus, it is possible to control the game stably by avoiding the problem.

The game control of the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment has been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof.

  For example, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the probability variation state has been described as continuing until the next jackpot. However, the probability variation state may not be continued until the next jackpot, but may continue for a certain number of game times. . Alternatively, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift from a probability variation state to a non-probability variation state is triggered by entering the operation port 25, and the probability variation state is shifted from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state according to the lottery result, or the probability variation state is continued. It is good also as what to do. In addition, the high support mode of the electric accessory 41 may be continued for a certain number of game times, or may be continued until a big hit occurs. Furthermore, if the high support mode is started with the jackpot, the high support mode may not be executed after the next jackpot.

G. Composition of the payout mechanism:
As described above, in the ball game machine 10, the game proceeds with various effects, and when the game ball enters the operation port 25 or the large entrance 60, the game ball is paid out as a prize ball. The game balls are paid out by the payout device 420, and the paid-out game balls are stored in the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 through a flow path in the gaming machine. At this time, if the game balls are paid out while the upper plate 13 and the lower plate 16 are full, there is a possibility that inconveniences such as the game balls are jammed and the payout device 420 breaks down. Therefore, in general, in a ball game machine, a sensor for detecting a full state is provided, and a device for stopping payout when the player is full has been devised.

  Here, recently, it has become difficult to provide such a sensor mechanism. That is, in recent years, a large game board may be provided in a ball game machine, and in such a case, the apparatus configuration on the back side may be complicated or enlarged. Alternatively, when trying to improve the skill of a production device such as a so-called production actor, the device configuration on the back side may increase in size. If the apparatus configuration on the back side is complicated or enlarged as described above, a space for providing a sensor for detecting a full state may be limited. In particular, as the apparatus on the back side becomes larger, when the path of the game ball (the path on the back side of the gaming machine) must be provided in a limited space, the sensor installation space is also limited accordingly. End up. Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, by adopting the following configuration for the payout mechanism, the detection mechanism for the full state of the lower plate 16 is properly installed even when the space is limited It is possible.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a detailed configuration of the payout mechanism of the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment. As described above, such a payout mechanism is provided on the back side of the ball game machine 10 (see FIG. 5). As described above, the game balls are supplied to the payout device 420 from the game ball storage tank 400, and the cam mechanism in the payout device 420 is driven by the stepping motor. The game ball is paid out.

  FIG. 51 shows the internal structure of the lower flow path 440. As shown in the drawing, a nozzle flow path 422 from the dispensing device 420 protrudes in the upper part of the lower flow path 440. The game ball from the payout device 420 is guided to the upper space of the lower flow path 440 through the nozzle flow path 422 and flows down in the lower flow path 440 downward from the outlet of the nozzle flow path 422 by gravity. Go.

  Below the lower flow path 440, the lower flow path 440 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 448 and a second flow path 450. At the lower end of the first flow path 448, an upper dish discharge flow path 452 toward the upper dish 13 is provided. On the other hand, at the lower end of the second flow path 450, a lower dish discharge flow path 454 toward the lower dish 16 is provided. It has been. Here, the outlet of the nozzle flow path 422 opens in the direction of the first flow path 448, so that the game ball from the nozzle flow path 422 goes to the first flow path 448.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the game ball discharged from the nozzle flow path 422 flows down in the lower flow path 440. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the game ball flowing down in the nozzle flow path 422 is also given a speed in the horizontal direction (direction toward the first flow path 448) by the nozzle flow path 422. (Refer to the white arrow in the figure), it flows down in the lower flow path 440. As described above, the game ball can be more reliably guided to the first flow path 448 by applying the horizontal velocity toward the first flow path 448 to the game ball by the nozzle flow path 422.

  The game ball that has flowed into the first flow path 448 is discharged to the upper plate 13 through the upper plate discharge flow path 452 provided at the lower end of the first flow path 448. Thus, by guiding the game balls from the payout device 420 to the first flow path 448, the game balls can be discharged to the upper plate 13 in preference to the lower plate 16. Further, as described above, by giving a speed in the direction toward the first flow path 448 by the nozzle flow path 422, it is possible to guide the game ball to the upper plate 13 more reliably.

  Here, when the upper plate 13 is filled with game balls, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the game balls that cannot be discharged to the upper plate 13 overflow from the upper plate discharge flow path 452, It stays at the lower end of one flow path 448. If the discharge of the game balls from the payout device 420 is continued in this state, the game balls are stacked in the first flow path 448 as shown in FIG. When the payout continues and the game balls are stacked, the game balls flow down to the second flow path 450 as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game balls flow down to the second flow path 450 as the game balls are stacked in the first flow path 448. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when game balls are stacked in the first flow path 448, the stacked game balls eventually separate the first flow path 448 and the second flow path 450 from each other. The height of the part 480 is exceeded. When a game ball is released from the nozzle channel 422 in this state, as shown by an arrow in the figure, the game ball is pushed by the stacked game ball, and the right side of the partition 480 (second channel). The game ball flows down to the 450 side. Since the second flow path 450 is connected to the lower tray 16, the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path 450 is discharged to the lower tray 16. Thereby, when the upper plate 13 is full, it becomes possible to discharge the game ball to the lower plate 16 this time.

  Here, when the game balls start to accumulate on the lower plate 16, the player usually moves the game balls accumulated on the lower plate 16 to the ball box by operating a slide lever provided on the lower plate 16. is there. However, if the player does not move the game ball, or if a large number of game balls are dispensed in a short time and are not in time, the lower plate 16 may become full. In such a case, the game balls that can no longer be discharged to the lower plate 16 overflow from the lower plate discharge channel 454 and accumulate in the second channel 450.

FIG. 53 (b) shows a state where game balls are stacked on the second flow path 450. As shown in the figure, when the payout from the payout device 420 continues with the game ball overflowing from the lower tray discharge channel 454, on the game ball overflowing from the lower tray discharge channel 454, The game balls from the payout device 420 are piled up. Here, if the game balls continue to be stacked in the second flow path 450 in this state, the stacked game balls eventually reach the payout device 420. In this case, even if the payout device 420 is driven, the game ball cannot be discharged from the payout device 420. As a result, when the payout device 420 is driven, the payout device 420 may be broken. For example, in a payout device 420 of a type in which a game ball is guided to a drop hole by a cam mechanism and the game ball flows down from the drop hole, the game ball stays in the drop hole without flowing down from the drop hole, and in that state, the next game ball There is a risk that the cam mechanism will be damaged when trying to move the lens to the drop hole. In view of these points, the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment can detect the full state of the lower plate 16 by using the lower plate full detection mechanism 500 described below.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a detailed configuration of the lower dish full detection mechanism 500. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the lower plate full detection mechanism 500 is provided in the vicinity of the lever member 510 provided so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 512 and the projection 514 of the lever member. The lower plate full tank sensor 530 and the like. The lower pan full sensor 530 is a so-called photosensor that includes a light source and a detection element that detects light from the light source. When a member is inserted between the light source and the detection element, the light from the light source is detected. It is possible to detect that a member has been inserted by changing the output of the detection element without reaching the element. The lower pan full sensor 530 operates as follows in accordance with the rotation of the lever member 510.

  FIG. 54B shows a state where the lever member 510 is rotated. As shown in the drawing, when the lever member 510 is pushed toward the outer side of the second flow path 450 (see the white arrow in the figure), the lever member 510 rotates around the shaft portion 512. To do. The lever member 510 is provided with a protrusion 514 on the opposite side of the second flow path 450, and the protrusion 514 moves between the light source and the detection element of the lower dish full sensor 530 as the lever member 510 rotates. Inserted between. Accordingly, it is possible to detect that the lever member 510 is pushed toward the outside of the second flow path 450 by the lower dish full sensor 530. In this embodiment, the state where the lower pan full sensor 530 detects the insertion of the protrusion 514 is referred to as a “sensor detection state”, and the state where it is not detected is referred to as a “sensor non-detection state”. . The position of the lever member 510 where the lower plate full sensor 530 is in the “sensor detection state” is referred to as “sensor detection position”, and the position of the lever member 510 where the lower plate full sensor 530 is in the “sensor non-detection state” is “ It shall be called a “sensor non-detection position”.

  In addition, a spring member 504 is connected to the lever member 510, and the lever member 510 can be urged toward the inner side of the second flow path 450 by the spring member 504. Therefore, in a state where the lever member 510 is not pushed toward the outside of the second flow path 450, the protrusion 514 is separated from between the light source 530 and the detection element, and the lower pan full sensor 530 is not connected to the sensor. It is possible to maintain the detection state.

  The lower plate full detection mechanism 500 is provided in the vicinity of the inlet of the lower plate discharge channel 454, and the lever member 510 is a part of the side wall of the second channel 450 near the inlet of the lower plate discharge channel 454. Is configured. Using the lower plate full detection mechanism 500, the bullet ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment detects the full state of the lower plate 16 as follows.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing how the lower plate 16 is detected by the lower plate full detection mechanism 500. FIG. 55A shows a state where the lower plate 16 is full and game balls are stacked on the second flow path 450. As described above, when the lower plate 16 is full, the game balls that cannot be discharged to the lower plate 16 overflow from the lower plate discharge channel 454 to the second channel 450. When the game ball is further paid out, the game ball is piled up in the second flow path 450.

  Here, in the vicinity of the lower dish discharge channel 454, the lever member 510 constitutes a part of the side wall of the second channel 450. For this reason, when the game balls are piled up, the lever member 510 is gradually pushed toward the outside of the second flow path 450 by the weight of the game balls. Eventually, when the number of game balls increases more than a predetermined number (9 balls in the example of FIG. 55), the force by which the game balls push the lever member 510 exceeds the urging force of the spring member 504, and FIG. ), The lever member 510 rotates in the outer direction of the second flow path 450. Thereby, the lower pan full sensor 530 enters a sensor detection state, and the full state of the lower pan 16 can be detected by reading the detection state of the lower pan full sensor 530.

  Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to detect the full state of the lower plate 16 more accurately, when the detection state of the lower plate full sensor 530 continues for a predetermined time or more, the lower plate 16 It is assumed that it is full. That is, when the lower plate 16 is full, the game ball continues to push the lever member 510 unless the game ball accumulated in the second flow path 450 is discharged, so the lower plate full sensor 530 is in the detection state. Will continue. On the other hand, in the environment where the gaming machine is installed, there is an electrical noise from other gaming machines or an electrical noise from the gaming machine itself, so that there is noise in the output of the lower pan full sensor 530. There is a case where it is erroneously determined as a detection state by riding. However, in this case, since the noise usually fluctuates in a short time, the detection state rarely continues for a long time. Therefore, as described above, if the detection state of the lower plate full sensor 530 continues for a predetermined time or more, if it is determined that the lower plate 16 is full, a false detection occurs due to noise. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the full state of the lower plate 16.

  In addition, after detecting the full state of the lower tray 16, the payout of the game ball may be stopped by controlling the payout device 420 via the payout control device 410. Furthermore, an image that prompts the player to discharge the game ball on the lower plate 16 may be displayed on the effect display device 30 via the sub control device 200 and the display control device 300. For example, by transmitting a signal from the payout control device 410 to the main control device 100, the main control device 100 grasps the full state, and further transmits a command from the main control device 100 to the sub control device 200. In response to this, the sub control device 200 displays an image for notifying the player that the lower plate 16 is full on the effect display device 30 via the display control device 300. Alternatively, the speaker 14 outputs a sound or sound effect that informs the player that the lower plate 16 is full. By doing so, it is possible to prompt the player to cancel the full state of the lower plate 16. The payout stop operation performed by the ball game machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail later. Details of the processing for detecting the continuation of the detection state described above will also be described later.

  Further, the above-described erroneous detection may occur not only due to electrical noise but also due to the flow of game balls. That is, even if the lower plate 16 is not full, when the game ball flowing down the second flow path 450 collides with the lever member 510, the lever member 510 is rotated due to the impact of the collision, resulting in erroneous detection. There is a risk of it. In order to avoid such erroneous detection caused by the flow of the game ball, it is conceivable to avoid the collision by providing the lever member 510 at a position away from the outlet of the dispensing device 420 (the outlet of the nozzle flow path 422). Alternatively, by providing the rotation direction of the lever member 510 in a direction that intersects the direction of the horizontal velocity of the game ball (in this embodiment, the direction from the inlet of the first flow path 448 to the inlet of the second flow path 450). It is conceivable that the lever member 510 is prevented from rotating even when a game ball collides with the lever member 510.

  However, if the lever member 510 is provided at a position distant from the outlet of the dispensing device 420 (the outlet of the nozzle channel 422), the device configuration tends to increase in size accordingly. Alternatively, if the lever member 510 is rotated in a direction intersecting with the horizontal speed direction of the game ball, the apparatus configuration becomes large in the rotation direction of the lever member 510. For example, in the example of FIG. 54, since the game ball has a speed in the horizontal direction in the figure, in order to prevent the lever member 510 from rotating even if the game ball collides with the lever member 510, the front-rear direction ( It is conceivable that the lever member 510 is arranged so as to rotate in the direction behind the front of the ball game machine. If it does so, an apparatus structure will enlarge in the front back direction of a bullet ball game machine.

Therefore, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as will be described below, by providing a recoil plate 600 above the lever member 510, the lever member 510 is installed away from the payout control device 410, or the lever Even if the rotation direction of the member 510 is not provided in a direction different from the speed direction of the game ball, the collision of the game ball with the lever member 510 can be avoided, and the apparatus configuration can be kept compact.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a situation in which the collision of the game ball with the lever member 510 can be avoided by providing the recoil plate 600. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), when game balls are discharged from the nozzle flow path 422 in a state where game balls are stacked in the first flow path 448, the game balls pass over the partition portion 480. It is pushed out into the second channel 450. Here, in the ball game machine 10, the inclined surface 480s is provided at a position beyond the vertex of the partition portion 480, and the game ball is given the speed in the horizontal direction by the inclined surface 480s, and the second flow path. 450 (see arrow in the figure).

  Here, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a recoil plate 600 is provided at the tip of the second flow path 450 through which the game ball is guided. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the game ball can be rebounded by the recoil plate 600. When the game ball is bounced in this manner, the game ball now has a speed in the direction of the first flow path 448, so that the game ball moves away from the lever member 510 provided on the same side as the recoil plate 600. As a result, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the game ball collides with the lever member 510.

  In this way, if a game ball is given a horizontal speed and guided in a predetermined direction and rebounded by a member provided at the tip of the game ball, a horizontal speed opposite to the guided direction is given. be able to. Therefore, if the lever member 510 is provided in the direction in which the game ball is guided, the possibility that the game ball collides with the lever member 510 can be avoided. If the collision of the game ball with the lever member 510 is avoided in this way, the lever member 510 does not have to be provided far away from the nozzle flow path 422 in order to avoid the collision of the game ball with the lever member. It becomes possible to keep it compact. In particular, since it is not necessary to largely separate the lever member 510 and the nozzle channel 422 in the vertical direction, the vertical apparatus size can be kept compact.

  In addition, as described above, it is not necessary to provide the rotation direction of the lever member 510 in a direction crossing the direction in which the game ball is guided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size in the direction intersecting the direction in which the game ball is guided (in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the front and back direction of the ball game machine 10).

  Further, when the rotation direction of the lever member intersects the direction of the speed of the game ball, the game ball will fly from the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member. A case where the member becomes a lever and twists the rotating shaft is conceivable. As a result, the rotation shaft is displaced and the lever member does not rotate smoothly. As a result, the reliability of the operation of the apparatus may be lowered, or the life of the apparatus may be deteriorated. In this regard, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball collides with the lever member 510, it collides from the rotation direction of the lever member 510, so that the possibility of twisting the rotation shaft is avoided. Is possible. As a result, the reliability of the ball game machine 10 can be improved, and the life of the ball game machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the recoil plate 600 is provided on the facing side across the second flow path 450 from the first flow path 448. The recoil plate 600 may be provided at any position as long as the game ball is guided. However, when the recoil plate 600 is provided on the opposite side of the first flow channel 448 with the second flow channel 450 interposed therebetween, Is preferred. That is, as described above, since the lever member 510 can be provided on the same side as the recoil plate 600, the lever member 510 is provided on the opposite side (the side away from the first flow path 448) across the second flow path 450. It is possible. For this reason, the first flow path 4
It is not necessary to provide the lever member 510 between the first flow path 448 and the second flow path 450, and therefore it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the lever member 510 between the first flow path 448 and the second flow path 450. Thus, the first flow path 448 and the second flow path 450 can be provided close to each other, and as a result, the size of the lower flow path 440 can be kept compact.

  Furthermore, since the upper plate discharge channel 452 and the lower plate discharge channel 454 can be brought close to each other, the upper plate discharge channel 452 and the lower plate discharge channel 454 are configured as an integral member (one member). It is also possible to form an upper dish discharge channel 452 and a lower dish discharge channel 454 by forming two channels therein. Thereby, the number of parts of the ball game machine 10 can be reduced to simplify the device configuration.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is guided in the direction of the recoil plate 600 by the inclined surface 480s. However, it is not always necessary to use the inclined surface, and any game ball can be guided in the direction of the recoil plate 600. A method may be used. For example, an elastic member may be provided, and the game ball may be guided by an elastic force when the game ball collides with the elastic member. However, if the game ball is guided to the recoil plate 600 using the inclined surface, it is not necessary to provide such an elastic member or the like, so that the apparatus configuration can be kept simple, which is more preferable. Furthermore, if the inclined surface is used, there is no possibility of preventing the game ball from falling in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to give the game ball a horizontal speed, while ensuring that the game ball is placed in the lower flow path 440. It is possible to flow downward.

  Further, the recoil plate 600 may be provided at any angle, but it is more preferable that the recoil plate 600 is provided to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction. That is, although the game ball is given a speed in the horizontal direction, the game ball flows down in the lower flow path 440 while receiving the gravity, so that the vertical speed increases, and as a result, the horizontal movement amount decreases. Cases can happen. Therefore, if the recoil plate 600 is provided so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the game ball can be reliably collided by the recoil plate 600 even if the amount of movement in the horizontal direction is reduced. As a result, the game ball It is possible to change the lateral speed of the vehicle more reliably.

  Further, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the recoil plate 600 constitutes a part of the side wall of the second flow channel 450, and the second flow channel 450 is sandwiched between the recoil plate 600. Opposing side walls (opposing surface 560) are formed substantially parallel to the recoil plate 600 (see FIG. 57). In this way, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lower plate 16 is full, the buffer on the upstream side of the lever member 510 in the second flow channel 450 stores the game ball. It can be used effectively as an area. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game ball is stored in the space on the upstream side of the lever member 510 when the lower plate 16 is full. FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which game balls are stacked in the second flow path 450 and the lower plate full tank sensor 530 is in a detection state due to the lower plate 16 becoming full. Yes. Here, as described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when such a detection state continues for a certain time or more, it is determined that the lower plate 16 is full, and the payout device The payout of game balls from 420 is stopped.

  Then, even after the game balls are stacked in the second flow path 450 and the lever member 510 is rotated, the payout of the game balls continues for a certain period of time, so that the game balls are removed from the state of FIG. Further build up. For example, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball payout is stopped when the detection state of the lower plate full sensor 530 is continued for 0.5 seconds. A game ball is paid out at a pace of (60 milliseconds). Therefore, eight game balls are paid out and piled up in the second flow path 450 after the lower plate full sensor 530 is in the detection state and before the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which the game balls are stacked in the second flow path 450 after the lower tray full tank sensor 530 enters the detection state and before the game ball payout is stopped. . The game balls shown with hatching in the figure are game balls that are paid out after the lower pan full sensor 530 is in the detection state. As described above, if the payout of the game ball is stopped when the detection state of the lower plate full sensor 530 continues for a certain time, it is possible to accurately detect the full state while avoiding the influence of noise. On the other hand, on the other hand, an area for storing game balls to be paid out before the payout is stopped is necessary.

  Thus, if the recoil plate 600 and the facing surface 560 facing the recoil plate 600 are provided in parallel as described above, it is possible to store a game ball between the recoil plate 600 and the facing surface 560. In this way, it is not necessary to separately provide a space for storing game balls, and the space in the vicinity where the recoil plate 600 is provided can be used effectively. As a result, it is possible to keep the apparatus configuration compact while accurately detecting the full state of the lower plate 16 by avoiding the influence of noise and the like.

  The space for storing game balls is the product of the speed at which game balls are paid out (number of payouts per unit time) and the time from when the sensor is detected until the payout is stopped (full judgment time). It is desirable that the value is greater than or equal to the value of the integer part. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the payout speed is 1 / 0.06 (pieces / second), and the time from the sensor detection state until the payout is stopped is 0.5 seconds. “8.33”. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a space where eight or more game balls can be stored. In this way, since the game balls can be reliably stored in the storage space, the stacked game balls may reach the payout device 420 even if there is almost no space between the payout device 420 and the storage space. Can be avoided.

  Furthermore, it is more preferable that the same number of game balls as the integer part value described above can be stored. That is, in such a case, the size of the storage space can be made as compact as possible while avoiding the stacked game balls from reaching the payout device 420.

  Also, the product value of the game ball payout speed (number of payouts per unit time) and the time from when the sensor is detected until the payout is stopped (full judgment time) has a fractional part. It is more preferable to set a payout speed and a full determination time. That is, in such a case, the full determination time can be increased without increasing the space for storing game balls. For example, in this embodiment, the game ball is paid out at a pace of 0.06 seconds, and the full determination time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, even after paying out 8 game balls, 0.02 seconds, The full judgment time continues. During this time, game balls are not paid out. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the storage space for the game ball for 0.02 seconds. As described above, by increasing the fullness determination time, it is possible to improve resistance to noise, etc., thereby avoiding an increase in storage space and keeping the device configuration compact. It is possible to improve resistance to noise and the like.

  In addition, about the space which stores a game ball | bowl, it is desirable that the cross-sectional area (cross-sectional area cut | disconnected by the horizontal plane) of a space spreads toward the downward direction of a perpendicular direction, or is maintained uniformly. That is, with such a shape, when the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 16 and started to be discharged from the second flow path 450, the game ball easily flows out from the space where the game ball is stored. Become. Accordingly, it is possible to smoothly discharge the game ball when the full state of the lower plate 16 is eliminated, which is more preferable.

H. Control contents of the dispensing control device:
As described above, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the payout device 420 is driven to pay out the game ball, and when the full state of the lower plate 16 is detected, the payout of the game ball is stopped. To do. Such an operation is realized by the cooperation of the payout control device 410 and the main control device 100. In the following, details of processing performed in cooperation by the payout control device 410 and the main control device 100 will be described, but as a preparation for that, first, the device configuration around the payout control device 410 will be described.

H-1. Device configuration around the payout control device:
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the payout control device 410 and the devices electrically connected to the payout control device 410. As shown, the payout control device 410 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. These CPU, ROM, and RAM are connected to each other, and the program read from the ROM is executed by the CPU, and various data associated with the execution of the program can be read from and written to the RAM.

  The main control device 100 is connected to the payout control device 410, and the payout control device 410 can receive various commands (such as prize ball commands described later) from the main control device 100. These commands are transmitted and received in the form of serial data, and the serial data is transmitted from the serial signal output buffer provided in the main control device 100 to the serial signal input buffer provided in the payout control device 410, so that the command Delivery takes place. It is also possible to transmit various commands from the payout control device 410 to the main control device 100, and serially output from the serial signal output buffer of the payout control device 410 toward the serial signal reception buffer of the main control device 100. By transmitting the data, a command is transferred from the payout control device 410 to the main control device 100.

  Also, a lending device 490 is connected to the payout control device 410. As described above, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a player can borrow a game ball from the rental ball machine 4, but not only in the ball ball machine 4 but also in the ball ball game machine 10. It is also possible to borrow a game ball from the lending device 490 provided. The payout control device 410 is connected to such a lending device 490, and by passing various signals to and from the lending device 490, it is possible to pay out the game ball from the payout device 420 and lend the game ball to the player. It is. The process of lending game balls will be described later.

  The payout control device 410 is also connected with a state return switch 412, a tank ball detection switch 408, and a payout count switch 424. The state return switch 412 is a switch that is pressed when an abnormality such as a ball clogging has occurred and the maintenance operator has cleared the abnormal state by discharging the game ball or the like. As will be described later, by pressing the state return switch 412, the dispensing device 420 can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state.

  The tank ball detection switch 408 is a sensor switch provided in a passage through which game balls are supplied from the game ball storage tank 400 to the payout device 420, and detects whether or not the game ball storage tank 400 is in a ball-free state. Take on the function. Based on the signal from the tank ball detection switch 408, the payout control device 410 can grasp the state of the game ball storage tank 400 (whether it is a ball-free state).

  The payout count switch 424 is a sensor switch that is provided in the payout device 420 and detects a game ball paid out by the payout device 420. The payout control device 410 can grasp the number of game balls actually paid out from the payout device 420 based on the signal from the payout count switch 424.

  Further, the lower pan full sensor 530 described above is also connected to the dispensing control device 410. The payout control device 410 can grasp the detection state (the above-mentioned “sensor detection state” and “sensor non-detection state”) of the lower plate full tank sensor 530 by acquiring the output signal of the lower plate full sensor 530. is there. Using such a device configuration, the payout control device 410 executes the following processing.

H-2. Discharge control device processing:
H-2-1. Discharge control main process:
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the flow of the “payout control main process” executed by the payout control apparatus 410. This process is a process executed by the CPU in the payout control device 410 when the payout control device 410 is powered on.

  As shown in the drawing, in the payout control main process, first, the CPU of the payout control device 410 is initialized (step S4000). That is, by confirming that the CPU has started normally and confirming that the program counter indicates a normal value, it is confirmed that the CPU operates normally without performing an illegal operation. At the same time, an initial value is set in the stack pointer, so that the CPU can use the stack memory correctly.

  Next, a process of initializing display contents of the display device provided in the payout control device 410 is performed (step S4002). That is, the payout control device 410 of the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with a display device composed of 7-segment LEDs, and information on the state of the payout control device 410 and the payout device 420 is displayed on this display device. Is possible. Accordingly, the display content of the display device is set to the display content corresponding to the initial state in response to the dispensing control device 410 starting the process. In this embodiment, the numeral “0” is displayed on the display device.

  In a succeeding step S4004, the access permission setting to the RAM is set to a permission state. Thereby, the CPU and peripheral devices of the payout control device 410 can access the RAM. In step S4006, an interrupt vector is set. As will be described later, in the payout control device 410 of this embodiment, various processes are performed using the interrupt function of the CPU. Therefore, an interrupt vector is set to enable the interrupt function.

  After the interrupt vector is set, a process for initializing the RAM value is performed (step S4008). In such processing, the values of all storage areas of the RAM are once set to “0”, and then predetermined initial values are set in the respective storage areas of the RAM. As described above, once all the storage areas are set to “0” and values are set in the respective storage areas, even if an illegal act of writing an invalid value in the storage area of the RAM is performed, the payout controller 410 Since the value can be erased at the time of activation, it becomes possible to increase the resistance against fraud.

  Once the interrupt vector and RAM initial values are set, the peripheral device is initialized (step S4010). That is, it is confirmed that the peripheral devices of the CPU of the dispensing control device 410 have been activated, and the peripheral devices are set in an initial state by setting the peripheral devices to the initial state.

When the initialization of the CPU and peripheral devices of the payout control device 410 is completed by the above processing, the interruption to the CPU of the payout control device 410 is permitted and set (step S4012). As a result, an interrupt process can actually be executed. After making the interrupt process executable in this way, the CPU of the payout control device 410 waits until an interrupt actually occurs while repeatedly executing the process for permitting and setting the interrupt (step S4012). If the process for setting the interrupt permission state in this way is repeated, even if the interrupt permission setting becomes unpermitted due to the influence of noise, etc. It is possible to reset it to the permitted state. As a result, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the prize ball cannot be paid out correctly due to noise, or the possibility that the prize ball is unjustly paid out due to fraud.

  As described above, in the payout control main process, after initializing the CPU and peripheral devices of the payout control apparatus 410, the interrupt permission setting is repeatedly executed to maintain a state in which the interrupt process can be performed. When a command is transmitted from the main control device 100 while maintaining a state in which interrupt processing is possible in this way, the payout control device 410 generates an interrupt, and “command interrupt processing” to be described below. Execute.

H-2-2. Command interrupt processing:
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the flow of the “command interrupt process”. As described above, when the payout control apparatus 410 receives a command from the main control apparatus 100, the CPU of the payout control apparatus 410 interrupts and executes the “payout control main process”. As shown in the figure, in the command interruption process, first, a command received from the main control device 100 is acquired (step S4050). As described above, since the command from the main controller 100 is stored in the serial signal input buffer (see FIG. 58) of the payout controller 410, it is read out and acquired.

  Here, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the commands transmitted from the main control device 100 include a plurality of types of commands. Therefore, in the command interrupt process of FIG. 60, the process corresponding to each command type is executed while specifying the acquired command type. First, it is determined whether or not the received command is an “initial command” (step S4052).

  The “initial command” is a command that is transmitted from the main control device 100 when the main control device 100 is activated and a command can be transmitted / received to / from the payout control device 410. The payout control device 410 can grasp that the main control device 100 is in a state where the command can be transmitted and received by receiving such a command. Therefore, when the received command is an initial command (step S4052: Yes), an initial display cancellation process is performed (step S4060). That is, in order to reflect that the initial command has been received in the display contents of the display device of the payout control device 410, the above-described initial display (display of the numeral “0” in this embodiment) displayed on the display device is stopped. Perform the process. By doing so, the display device can grasp that a command has been transmitted from the main control device 100 to the payout control device 410.

  Note that a “command not received flag” is provided in the RAM of the payout control device 410, and this flag is set to ON when the payout control device 410 is activated (for example, set to ON in the above-mentioned “payout control main process”). The command not received flag may be turned OFF when an initial command is received. If such a command non-reception flag is provided, it is preferable that the communication state with the main control device 100 can be easily grasped based on the command non-reception flag.

If the command is not an initial command (step S4052: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a “prize ball command” (step S4054). The “prize ball command” is a command transmitted by the main control device 100 to cause the payout control device 410 to pay out a prize ball. Here, the prize ball commands include a plurality of types of prize ball commands (“1 prize ball command” to “15 prize ball commands”) according to the number of prize balls (number of prize balls). It is possible to specify the number of prize balls based on the command. Therefore, if the acquired command is a prize ball command (step S4054: Yes), the acquired prize ball command is stored in the command storage area on the RAM of the payout control device 410 as preparation for the prize ball payout. As will be described in detail later, the payout control device 410 specifies the number of prize balls by reading the prize ball command from the command storage area when actually paying out the prize balls (see “Prize ball setting process” described later). ).

  If the acquired command is not a prize ball command (step S4054: No), it is determined whether or not the command is a “front door frame opening command” (step S4056). Here, the “front door frame opening command” is a command transmitted from the main control device 100 to the payout control device 410 when the front panel 15 of the ball game machine 10 is opened. Accordingly, when the dispensing control device 410 receives the front door frame opening command (step S4056: Yes), the “front door frame opening flag” is set in the RAM (ON) in order to store that the front door frame opening command has been received. (Step S4064). The payout control device 410 can execute processing according to opening / closing of the front panel 15 by referring to the “front door frame opening flag” in “timer interrupt processing” described later. This point will be described later.

  If the acquired command is not a front door frame opening command (step S4056: No), it is then determined whether or not the command is a “front door frame closing command” (step S4058). The “front door frame closing command” is a command transmitted from the main control device 100 to the payout control device 410 when the front panel 15 of the ball game machine 10 is closed. Therefore, when the dispensing control device 410 receives the front door frame closing command (step S4058: Yes), it resets the aforementioned “front door frame opening flag” (step S4066). As described above, the front door frame opening flag is a flag that is set when the front panel 15 is opened and a front door frame opening command is received. Therefore, if the front door frame opening flag is set to “OFF” when the front panel 15 is closed, it is possible to make the opening / closing state of the front panel 15 correspond to the state of the front door frame opening flag. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the open / closed state of the front panel 15 based on the front door frame opening flag.

  As described above, in the command interrupt process, a command from the main control device 100 is acquired, and various flags are set and a prize ball command is stored in the RAM according to the command. The payout control device 410 executes such a command interrupt process, while executing a “timer interrupt process” described below by periodically generating an interrupt using the timer interrupt function of the CPU. As a result, processing corresponding to each flag and prize ball command set in the command interrupt processing can be immediately executed.

H-2-3. Timer interrupt processing:
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a process flow of “timer interrupt process” executed by the payout control apparatus 410. This process is a process executed by the CPU of the payout control device 410 at a constant time period (in this embodiment, a period of 2 milliseconds) using the timer interrupt function. As shown in the figure, when the timer interrupt process is executed, first, a return process from the abnormal state to the normal state (state return process) is performed based on the output signal of the state return switch 412 (step S4080). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the state return switch 412 is pressed for 20 msec (20 milliseconds) or longer, the state return operation is started and the abnormal state is released. When the state return switch 412 is pressed for 1000 msec or longer, the game balls in the payout device 420 and in the passage from the game ball storage tank 400 to the payout device 420 (upper game ball passage 402) are moved downward. Discharge towards 440.

After the state returning process is performed, a “lower dish full check process” is executed to determine whether the lower dish 16 is full based on the output signal of the lower dish full sensor 530.

  62 to 64 are flowcharts showing the flow of the “bottom pan full check process”. As shown in the drawing, in the lower pan full tank check process, first, a process of reading the value of the “lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer” is performed (step S4200). Here, the “lower pan full sensor monitoring timer” is a counter used for monitoring the state of the lower pan full sensor 530, and periodically changes the value of this lower pan full sensor monitoring timer as will be described later. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4200, as a preparation for each process described later, the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is acquired. The lower tray full sensor monitoring timer may be realized using a memory in the CPU of the payout control device 410 or may be realized using the RAM of the payout control device 410. Alternatively, a dedicated memory may be used.

  After reading the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer, the level value of the signal from the lower pan full sensor 530 is acquired (step S4202). That is, as described above, the lower pan full sensor 530 is constituted by a photosensor, but the output signal of the photosensor changes according to the detected light intensity. Therefore, in order to determine the detection state and the non-detection state based on the signal from the lower plate full sensor 530, the magnitude (level value) of the signal from the lower plate full sensor 530 is acquired. As described above, since the lower pan full sensor 530 is connected to the payout control device 410, a signal from the lower pan full sensor 530 may be received by the payout control device 410 to obtain a signal level value. The signal level value can be acquired by various methods. For example, an ADC (analog / digital converter) is provided in the dispensing control device 410, and the signal from the lower pan full sensor 530 is converted into a digital value. What is necessary is just to acquire the digital value after conversion.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the output level value increases as the detected light amount of the photo sensor of the lower pan full sensor 530 decreases, and the output level value decreases as the detected light amount increases. Of course, conversely, the output level value increases as the detected light amount increases, and the output level value decreases as the detected light amount decreases. For example, if the polarity of the input signal to the above-described ADC (analog / digital converter) is inverted, such a change can be easily performed.

  If the lower pan full sensor signal level value is acquired, it is then determined whether or not the acquired signal level value exceeds a threshold value (step S4204). That is, as described above, the signal level value of the lower pan full sensor 530 reflects the amount of light detected by the photo sensor of the lower pan full sensor 530. However, in the ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, the detection of the photo sensor The amount of light reflects the position of the lever member 510 (see FIG. 54). Therefore, based on the signal level value of the lower pan full sensor 530, it is determined whether or not the lever member 510 is rotated to enter the sensor detection state.

If the signal level value exceeds the threshold value (FIG. 62: Step S4204: Yes), it is considered that the lever member 510 is rotating from the initial position. Therefore, in this case, “1” is added to the value of the “bottom pan full sensor monitoring timer” (step S4206). In this way, the length of time that the lever member 510 was in the position rotated from the initial position can be reflected in the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer. That is, as described above, the timer interrupt process is executed at a constant time interval (2 msec interval in the present embodiment). The process of adding “1” to the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer to be performed) is also executed at regular time intervals. Therefore, “1” is added to the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer at regular intervals, and as a result, the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is the position where the lever member 510 is rotated from the initial position. Reflects the length of time

  If “1” is added to the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer, then “lower pan full sensor monitoring time” is set to “250” (step S4208). Here, the “bottom pan full tank sensor monitoring time” is a value used for comparison with the value of the above “bottom pan full tank sensor monitoring timer”, and as will be described later, the value of the “bottom pan full tank sensor monitoring timer”. Is compared with the “bottom pan full sensor monitoring time” to determine whether or not the lower pan full sensor 530 has been in a detection state (or a non-detection state) for a predetermined time. In step S4208, as a preparation for such comparison, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to “250”. When setting the lower pan full sensor monitoring time, a storage area is secured in the RAM of the payout control device 410 or the memory in the CPU, and a value may be set there.

  If the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set, the lower pan full sensor 530 is in a detection state for a certain time by comparing the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer value with the lower pan full sensor monitoring time. Can be determined. For example, in this embodiment, “250” is set as the lower pan full sensor monitoring time (step 4208), but as described above, the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is incremented by “1” at intervals of 2 msec. When about 500 msec (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is exceeded. Therefore, it can be determined that the lower pan full sensor 530 has been in the detection state for 0.5 seconds or more based on the lower pan full sensor monitoring time and the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer.

  Here, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, such a lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time can be changed as follows. That is, it is determined whether or not the dispensing control device 410 has received a command from the main control device 100 (step S4210). If no command has been received (step S4210: No), the set lower pan full sensor monitoring time Is changed to “1000” (corresponding to 2 seconds). In this way, it is determined whether or not the payout control device 410 has received a command from the main control device 100. If not, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is changed to a longer time. In the ball game machine 10 of the example, it is possible to keep the apparatus configuration compact while accurately detecting the full state of the lower plate 16. This point will be described in detail later.

  If the command from the main control device 100 has been received (step S4210: Yes), skip the step S4212, and if the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is not received from the main control device 100 A value shorter than “1000” in this embodiment (“250” in this embodiment) is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to keep the device configuration of the ball game machine 10 compact. This point will also be described in detail later.

  After the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set, the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer and the lower pan full sensor monitoring time are actually compared, and the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is set to the lower pan full sensor monitoring time. It is determined whether or not the time has been exceeded (FIG. 63: step S4214). If the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer has not yet exceeded the lower pan full sensor monitoring time (step S4214: No), the lower pan full tank check process is terminated as it is (see FIG. 62), and the timer interrupts. What is necessary is just to return to a process (refer FIG. 61).

On the other hand, as described above, since the timer interrupt process is executed at a constant time cycle, the lower pan full tank check process executed within the timer interrupt process is also executed at a constant time cycle. Therefore, when the lower pan full tank check process is executed, if the signal level value from the lower pan full sensor 530 exceeds a predetermined threshold value (if the lever member 510 is rotated by a predetermined amount or more), The value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer gradually increases (see step S4204 and step S4206 in FIG. 62). Then, if the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer exceeds the lower pan full sensor monitoring time, it is now determined as “Yes” in step S4214 of FIG.

  Thus, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output signal from the lower pan full sensor 530 is repeatedly checked at a predetermined time period, and if the output signal exceeds a predetermined level, the counter In this embodiment, the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer is increased. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter (the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer in this embodiment) exceeds a predetermined threshold (the lower pan full sensor monitoring time in the present embodiment). In this case, when the sensor (in this embodiment, the lower pan full sensor 530) has been in the detection state for a certain time or more, the threshold (in this embodiment, the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time) is exceeded. It is possible to determine whether or not the lever member 510 has been in a position that has been rotated by a predetermined amount or more over a certain period of time.

  In this way, as described above, even if the game ball collides with the lever member 510 and the lower pan full sensor 530 enters the detection state, or is erroneously determined to be in the detection state due to the influence of electrical noise. Since these influences usually last only for a short time, it is possible to accurately detect the full state of the lower plate 16 by eliminating those influences. In this embodiment, when the detection state continues for a predetermined time or more in this way, determining that the lower plate 16 is full is referred to as “lower plate full tank on detection”. A state that is determined to be full will be referred to as a “bottom pan full tank on detection state”.

  If it is detected that the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer exceeds the lower pan full sensor monitoring time (step S4214: Yes), the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is set to “1000” (2 in this embodiment). (Corresponding to second)) (step S4216). That is, since it is detected that the lower plate 16 is full, this time, in order to detect that the full state of the lower plate 16 has been canceled, the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer is used to detect the cancellation of the full state. Set the value to use. As will be described later, in the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is detected that the full state of the lower plate 16 has been canceled based on the value of the lower plate full sensor monitoring timer.

  After the value is set in the lower tray full sensor monitoring timer, it is then determined whether or not the “payout error flag” is “OFF” (step S4218). If it is “OFF”, the payout error flag is set (“ON”). (Step S4220). Here, the “payout error flag” is a flag that is set in order to memorize that the lower pan full-tan-on detection state is received in response to detecting that the lower pan 16 is full. By setting the payout error flag in this way, it can be easily determined based on the flag whether or not the lower pan full tank on state is detected. If the payout error flag is not OFF (step S4218: No), the setting of the payout error flag has already been completed, so the lower plate full tank check process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. .

  If the payout error flag is set, then the “bottom pan full signal ON command” is set in the transmission register (step S4222). Here, the “lower pan full signal ON command” is a command for notifying the main control device 100 that the lower pan full tank ON has been detected. The payout control device 410 sets the “bottom pan full signal ON command” in the transmission register in the payout control device 410, and sends the “bottom pan full signal ON command” from the transmission register via the serial signal output buffer. By transmitting to the control device 100, it is possible to notify the main control device 100 that the lower pan full-tan-on detection state is present.

When the main control device 100 receives the lower pan full signal on command, the main control device 100 stops transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control device 410 and transmits an error notification command to the sub control device 200. When the sub control device 200 receives the error notification command, the sub control device 200 notifies the player that the lower plate 16 is full via the speaker 14 and the effect display device 30. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to discharge the game ball from the lower plate 16.

  As described above, in the lower plate full check process, when the full state of the lower plate 16 is detected, preparation for detecting the cancellation of the full state is made (step S4126), and the payout error flag is set. The fact that the full state of the dish 16 has been detected is stored (step S4128). In addition, the lower pan full signal on command is set in the transmission register to notify the main controller 100 (step S4222). When the processing corresponding to the full state of the lower plate 16 is performed in this way, the payout state setting process is executed in order to actually change the operation of the payout device 420 (step S4224). In the payout state setting process, the operation of the payout device 420 is controlled by transmitting a control signal to the payout device 420. The payout state setting process will be described in detail later.

  In step S4204 of FIG. 62, if the signal level value of the lower pan full sensor 530 exceeds the threshold value (FIG. 62: step S4204: Yes), corresponding to the lever member 510 rotating from the initial position, Each process described above is executed. On the other hand, if the signal level value of the lower pan full sensor 530 does not exceed the threshold value (if the sensor is not detected), even if the lever member 510 is in the initial position or is rotated, the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, it can be determined that the lower plate 16 is not full. Therefore, in this case, each process of FIG. 64 is executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer is “0” (FIG. 64: step S4226). If not “0”, “1” is subtracted from the value of the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer. (Step S4228). That is, as described above, a value is set in the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer when the lower pan full tank on is detected (see FIG. 63: step S4216). Therefore, when the lower pan full sensor 530 is in a non-detection state (step S4204: No in FIG. 62), “1” is subtracted from the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer (step S4228). Thus, as described above, the lower pan full tank check process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period. Therefore, if the sensor non-detection state continues for the predetermined time, the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer value will eventually be It becomes “0”. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the sensor non-detection state has continued for a predetermined time by determining whether or not the value of the lower tray full sensor monitoring timer is “0”. By doing so, it is possible to avoid erroneous determination due to the influence of noise or the like described above, so that it is possible to accurately detect that the full state of the lower plate 16 has been eliminated.

  In the present embodiment, the determination that the full state of the lower plate 16 has been resolved as a result of the sensor non-detection state continuing for a predetermined time or more is referred to as “lower plate full tank off detection”.

Further, in the lower pan full tank check process of this embodiment, the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer is not unilaterally decreased as described above, but may be increased in the middle. For example, when the lower pan full sensor 530 is in the non-detection state, the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is decreased (FIG. 64: step S4228). The value of the tongue sensor 530 is increased (FIG. 62: Step S4206). Then, when the lower pan full sensor 530 is again in the non-detection state, the increased value of the lower pan full sensor 530 is decreased again (FIG. 64: step S4228). Thus, even if the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer is increased halfway, if the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer becomes “0”, the lower pan full tank off detection can be performed (see step S4230). For this reason, detection is possible not only when the sensor non-detection state continues for a predetermined time or more as described above, but also when the sensor non-detection state is interrupted halfway.

  In this way, not only when the sensor non-detection state continues, but also when a case where the sensor non-detection state is interrupted is detected, it is assumed that the sensor non-detection state is interrupted due to electrical noise, etc. It is possible to accurately detect the dish full tank off. Further, in this embodiment, “1” is subtracted from the counter value in the sensor non-detection state, and “1” is added to the counter value in the sensor detection state. The majority is determined by the number of non-detection states (corresponding to the length of time in the sensor non-detection state) and the number of sensor detection states (corresponding to the length of time in the sensor detection state). By doing so, the effect of noise or the like is appropriately reduced, and the lower tray full tank off can be detected more accurately. The same applies to the case where the lower pan full tan-on is detected.

  When “1” is subtracted from the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer (step S4228), it is checked again whether the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is “0” (step S4230). If the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer is “0” (step S4230: Yes), it is the timing when the value of the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer is just “0”. It corresponds to. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not the payout error flag is “ON” (step S 4232). If “ON”, the payout error flag is reset in response to detecting that the lower pan is full (see FIG. (Set to OFF) (step S4234). Next, in order to notify the main controller 100 that the full state of the lower plate 16 has been resolved, a “lower plate full signal OFF command” is set in the transmission register (step S4236).

  In this way, when each process corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank off is performed, the payout state setting process is executed in order to actually change the operation state of the payout device 420 as in the case of the lower pan full tank on detection (step S4238). ).

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout state setting process. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, it is first determined whether or not a payout error state is present (step S4260). Here, the payout error state is a state in which it is determined that there is a problem in paying out the game balls from the payout device 420. As described above, the lower tray full-tan-on detection state corresponds to such a payout error state because the lower plate 16 is full and it is considered that the payout is hindered. Therefore, based on the above-described payout error flag, it is determined whether or not the payout error state is present. That is, since the payout error flag is set in the lower pan full tank on detection state (FIG. 63: step S4220), it is determined whether or not the payout error flag is set based on the payout error flag.

  In addition, it is good also as what is handled as a payout error state, if it is in the state which has had trouble in paying out of the game ball from the payout apparatus 420 not only when the lower tray 16 is a full state. For example, even when the game ball storage tank 400 becomes empty and the game balls cannot be supplied to the payout device 420, or the upper game ball passage 402 or the nozzle flow path 422 is clogged and the payout is hindered. It may be handled as a payout error state.

  When it is determined that the payout error state has occurred (step S4260: Yes), the payout from the payout device 420 is actually stopped by transmitting a control signal to the payout motor 426 of the payout device 420 (step S4268). By doing this, it is possible to avoid the possibility of driving the payout device 420 and causing the payout device 420 or the like to malfunction even in the payout error state. In this embodiment, a state where the payout motor 426 of the payout device 420 is stopped is referred to as a stopped state of the payout device 420. After shifting the dispensing device 420 to the stopped state in this way, the process returns to the above-described lower pan full tank check process (see FIGS. 62 to 64).

  On the other hand, if it is not in the payout error state (step S4260: No in FIG. 65), it is then determined whether or not the value of the payout number counter is “0” (step S4262). Here, as described later, the “payout number counter” is a counter that stores the remaining number of game balls to be paid out from the payout device 420. If the value of the payout number counter is “0” (step S4262: Yes), since there is no game ball to be paid out, the payout device 420 is shifted to a stopped state (step S4268).

  If the value of the payout number counter is not “0” (step S4262: No), it is then determined whether or not the low speed flag is set (whether or not it is set to “ON”) (step S4264). . Here, the “low speed flag” is a flag for controlling the speed (payout speed) of paying out game balls from the payout device 420. Such a low speed flag is set in a prize ball setting process (see FIGS. 66 and 67) executed in the timer interrupt process. This point will be described later.

  When the low speed flag is set to “ON” (step S4264: Yes), in response to this, the dispensing device 420 is shifted to the “low speed state” (step S4270). In the low speed state, the rotation speed of the payout motor 426 in the payout device 420 is lower than in the normal state, so that the payout speed of the game balls (the number of payout balls per unit time) becomes low. On the other hand, if the low speed flag is not “ON”, the payout device 420 shifts to the “normal state” in which the payout speed is higher than the low speed state (step S4266). In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the payout speed of the game ball as described above, and it is possible to make the device configuration of the payout mechanism more compact by using this fact. . This point will be described later.

  As described above, in the payout state setting process, the operating state of the payout device 420 is changed based on the control flags such as the payout error flag and the low speed flag. When the operating state of the dispensing device 420 is changed in this way, the process returns to the above-described bottom pan full check process (see FIG. 63: Step S4224 and FIG. 64: Step S4238), and further returns to the timer interrupt process ( (See FIG. 61: Step S4082).

  In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 61), following the above-described lower pan full tank check process, this time, a ball-free process is executed (step S4084). In such no-ball processing, based on the tank ball detection switch 408, the no-ball state of the game ball storage tank 400 is detected, and when no-ball state is detected, the “no-ball flag” is set. Further, when the no-ball state of the game ball storage tank 400 continues for a predetermined time or more, the “ball no low speed flag” is set. Such a ball no-low speed flag is a kind of the above-described low-speed flag. In the payout state setting process (see FIG. 65), when the ball no-low speed flag is set, the payout device 420 is shifted to the low speed state (FIG. 65). : Step S4264, Step S4270).

  In this case, since the frequency with which the payout motor 426 stops can be reduced, the life of the payout motor 426 can be improved or the power consumption can be suppressed. That is, when the ball-free state continues for a certain time or more, not only when the game ball storage tank 400 is actually empty, but there is a game ball in the game ball storage tank 400, a part of the passage In some cases, the tank ball detection switch 408 may not temporarily detect the game ball due to a delay in the flow of the game ball. In such a case, the flow of the game ball may recover after a little time has passed.

Therefore, if the payout speed of the game ball is reduced, the flow of the game ball may be recovered while the game ball is being paid out. In such a case, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 426. When the payout motor 426 is stopped, when the payout motor 426 is driven again, power consumption increases due to so-called inrush current, and further, the electromagnet of the payout motor 426 is reexcited. Electric power is also required. In this regard, if it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 426, it is possible to suppress the inrush current, and it is not necessary to re-energize the electromagnet of the payout motor 426, so that the power consumption can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the service life of the dispensing motor 426 is reduced due to the inrush current or the current at the time of excitation. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to re-energize the payout motor 426, the time required for excitation can be reduced, and as a result, the payout of the game ball can be completed quickly.

  In the timer interruption process (see FIG. 61), after the no ball process, a “prize ball setting process” for preparing for payout of a prize ball is executed (step S4088).

  66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the flow of the winning ball setting process. As shown in the figure, when the winning ball setting process is started, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning ball command in the command storage area (step S4300). That is, as described above, when the payout control device 410 receives a prize ball command storing information on the number of prize balls from the main control device 100, it stores the prize ball command in the command storage area (FIG. 60: Step S4062). reference). Therefore, in order to grasp the number of winning balls, the winning ball command stored in the command storage area is acquired. If there is no prize ball command in the command storage area, preparation for prize ball payout is unnecessary, and the process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the timer interruption process (step S4300: No).

  If there is a prize ball command in the command storage area (step S4300: Yes), then a check calculation is executed for the prize ball command (step S4302). Here, the check operation is an operation for confirming whether or not the prize ball command in the command storage area is valid. Such calculation can be performed by various methods. For example, a prize ball command is set as 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the lower 4 bits of the 1-byte and the upper 4 bits are added. At this time, if the prize ball command is set in advance so that the calculation result is always “0xFF” (all bits are “1”) in the case of a valid prize ball command, the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the prize ball command is valid. If the correctness of the prize ball command is confirmed in this way, even if an illegal prize ball command is stored due to fraud, or even if the prize ball command changes due to electrical noise, The possibility of being paid out can be avoided.

  After executing the check operation, the winning ball command in the command storage area is erased (step S4304), and then the validity of the check operation result is actually confirmed. If the check calculation result is not valid (step S4306: No), the winning ball setting process is terminated. As a result, as described above, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the prize ball is unfairly paid out. If the result of the check calculation is valid (step S4306: YES), then the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command is specified (step S4308). As described above, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored in the prize ball command, the number of prize balls can be specified based on the prize ball command. Various methods can be used as the method for storing the information on the number of prize balls in the prize ball command. However, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of this embodiment, a 1-byte (8-bit) prize ball is used. The number of prize balls is stored in the lower 4 bits of the command. In general, since the CPU can execute an operation for extracting the lower 4 bits from 1-byte data at high speed, the number of winning balls can be quickly specified based on the winning ball command.

If the number of prize balls is specified based on the prize ball command, the value of the “number of prize balls storage area” is masked (step S4310). Here, the “prize ball number storage area” is the payout device 42.
The storage area stores the number of prize balls to be paid out from 0. As will be described later, the number of prize balls specified based on the prize ball command is added to the value of the “number of prize balls storage area”. In step S4310, a mask process is performed on the value in the prize ball number storage area in order to avoid an illegal value in the prize ball number storage area. For example, in order to avoid the value of the prize ball number storage area from exceeding the upper limit value, the logical product is calculated using the bit pattern corresponding to the value of the prize ball number storage area and the bit pattern corresponding to the upper limit value. (AND operation is performed) and the result may be stored in the award ball number storage area. In this way, even if a value exceeding the upper limit value is stored in the award ball number storage area, all bits in the portion exceeding the upper limit value are “0” after the calculation, so that the upper limit value is not exceeded. . Thereby, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit value will be unfairly paid out.

  After masking the value in the prize ball number storage area, the number of prize balls to be added is then prepared as a preparation for adding the prize ball number specified based on the prize ball command to the value in the prize ball number storage area. It is determined whether it is within a predetermined numerical range. First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls to be added is “1” or more (step S4312). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls to be added is “16” or less (step S4314). In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls is set from “1” to “16”. Thus, whether or not the number of prize balls to be added is within this range. Determine whether. If the number of prize balls to be added is not within this range (step S4312: No, or step S4314: No), there is some inconsistency, so that the prize balls are set as they are to prevent the prize balls from being illegally paid out. The process ends.

  If it is confirmed that the number of prize balls to be added is within a predetermined range, this number of prize balls is actually added to the value in the prize ball number storage area (step S4316). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the addition result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (“18” in the present embodiment) (step S4318). That is, as will be described later, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize ball command from the main control device 100 is accepted when the value of the prize ball number storage area is “3” or less. The maximum number of prize balls associated with the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, the value of the prize ball number storage area is “18” at the maximum. For this reason, when the value of the prize ball number storage area shows a value larger than “18”, it is considered that some inconsistency has occurred.

  Therefore, when the value of the winning ball number storage area is larger than “18” (step S4318: No), the value of the winning ball number storage area is set to “18” (step S4324). By doing so, even if the value in the prize ball number storage area is an incorrect value, it can be corrected to a normal value. In addition, if the corrected value is the largest value among the valid values, the number of prize balls will not be significantly reduced. Therefore, when inconsistency occurs due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the number of award balls is significantly reduced and the player is dissatisfied. Thus, it is possible to avoid both a situation in which a large number of prize balls are paid out illegally and a possibility that the prize balls are reduced and the player is dissatisfied.

  As described above, the maximum number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball command (“15” in the present embodiment) and the maximum value of the prize ball number storage area when receiving the prize ball command (“3” in this embodiment). ), It is possible to easily determine the correctness of the number of winning balls if the value after adding the number of winning balls of the winning ball command is valid. It is possible to avoid the possibility that the game ball is paid out illegally based on the value. Further, even if inconsistency occurs in the number of winning balls, it is possible to correct appropriately.

If the validity of the value in the prize ball number storage area is confirmed, it is then determined whether or not the “prize ball low speed flag” is “ON” (step S4320). Here, the “prize ball low speed flag” is a kind of the low speed flag described above (see FIG. 65: step S4264). By setting the prize ball low speed flag to ON, it is possible to shift the payout device 420 to the low speed state and pay out the game ball at a low speed (see FIG. 65: step S4270). Normally, it is not necessary to pay out the prize ball at a low speed. Therefore, if the prize ball low speed flag is ON (step S4320: Yes), the prize ball low speed flag is reset (set to “OFF”) (step S4326). ).

  If the winning ball low speed flag is reset in this way, finally, the error flag is reset (step S4322), and the winning ball setting process of FIGS. 66 and 67 is ended. As described above, in the prize ball setting process, as preparation for actually paying out the prize ball, the number of prize balls is acquired, and the operation mode of the payout apparatus 420 when paying out from the payout apparatus 420 is further set. Set various flags to set. By making preparations for payout of prize balls in this way, prize balls can be paid out appropriately by “payout control processing” described later.

  When the winning ball setting process is finished and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 61), a “ball rental setting process” for lending game balls from the lending device 490 is executed (step S4088).

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lending setting process. This process is a process executed to prepare for lending a game ball from the lending device 490. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, first, it is determined whether or not the “ball rental state flag” is ON (step S4350). Here, the “ball rental state flag” is a flag indicating that the payout control device 410 is waiting for a game ball lending request from the lending device 490. The process for setting the lending status flag will be described later.

  If the lending status flag is not ON (step S4350: No), then determination is made as to whether the “connection confirmation signal” and the “lending lending signal” are ON in order to prepare for accepting the lending request from the lending device 490. Is performed (step S4362). Here, the “connection confirmation signal” is a signal for confirming that the connection between the lending device 490 and the payout control device 410 is established. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, two signals of “BRDY signal” and “BRQ signal” can be transmitted from the lending device 490 to the payout control device 410 (see FIG. 58). The “BRDY signal” corresponds to the connection confirmation signal.

  On the other hand, the “ball lending standby signal” is a signal indicating that the lending device 490 is waiting for a game ball lending request. For example, it is a state where it is considered that the lending of game balls will eventually be requested, such as a state where a player has inserted a lending card into the lending device 490 or a state where an operation button of the lending device 490 is operated. This is a signal indicating this. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “BRQ signal” corresponds to a ball rental standby signal. If the connection confirmation signal and the lending standby signal are not “ON” (step S4362: No), it is considered that the connection with the lending device 490 is not normal or there is no lending request yet, so the processing is ended as it is.

  If the connection confirmation signal and the lending standby signal are “ON” (step S4362: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a payout error state (step S4364). That is, if the lower tray 16 is full or the like and the payout from the payout device 420 cannot be performed normally, it is considered that the game ball cannot be rented out normally. (Step S4364: Yes).

If it is not in the payout error state (step S4364: No), it is then determined whether or not a payout operation is in progress (step S4366). As described above, the payout device 420 pays out the winning balls in addition to paying out the rented balls. Therefore, when other payouts are made, it is necessary to wait until the payout is completed. Then, the process is terminated as it is (step S4366).
: Yes). If the payout operation is not in progress (step S4366: No), the ball rental permission signal is set to “ON” to notify the lending device 490 that the game ball can be lent (step S4368). In the ball ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, an “EXS signal” can be transmitted from the payout control device 410 to the lending device 490 (see FIG. 58). This corresponds to turning on the permission signal. If the ball lending permission signal is turned on in this way, it is ready to accept a game ball lending request. Therefore, the above-mentioned “ball lending state flag” is set (set to “ON”), and the lending device 490 The state shifts to a lending request standby state (FIG. 68: Step S4370).

  When the lending status flag is set to ON in this way, when the lending setting process is executed again, it is determined “Yes” in step S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4352. In step S4352, it is determined whether or not a “lending request signal” that is a lending request from lending apparatus 490 has been received. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, turning off the BRQ signal (see FIG. 58) from the lending device 490 corresponds to reception of a lending request signal.

  If a ball rental request signal is received (step S4352: Yes), then, the number of balls is added to the value of the number of rental balls storage area (step S4354). The rented number storage area is a storage area provided on the RAM of the payout control device 410 in order to store the number of game balls to be paid out as rented balls. Corresponding to the reception of the ball rental request signal, the ball rental number is added to the value of the ball rental number storage area. The number of rented balls may be determined in advance, or may be designated from the lending device 490 using a rented ball request signal. In this embodiment, the explanation will be made assuming that the number of rented balls is set to 25 balls in advance. In addition, since it is not necessary to add the number of rented balls when the renting request signal is not received, step S4354 may be skipped (step S4352: No).

  If the number of lent balls is added to the value of the number of rented balls storage area, it is then determined whether or not a rented ball request end signal is received (step S4356). The lending request end signal is a signal transmitted from the lending device 490 after the lending request signal is transmitted from the lending device 490 a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times). As described above, when the rent request signal is received, the number of rents is added to the value of the rent number storage area (step S4354). Thus, after the rent request signal is received a predetermined number of times, By receiving the ball request end signal, a predetermined number of game balls can be accurately lent out in response to one rental request.

  If a ball rental request end signal is received (step S4356: Yes), the ball rental status flag is reset in response to the completion of the game ball lending (step S4358). Thereafter, the prize ball permission signal is turned off again (step S4360), and then the lending setting process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. If the rental request end signal has not been received (step S4356: No), it is considered that the rental of the game ball is still continued, so the rental ball remains as it is without changing the rental status flag or the rental permission signal. What is necessary is just to complete | finish a setting process and to return to a timer interruption process (refer FIG. 61).

  As described above, in the lending setting process (FIG. 61: step S4088), the lending request from the lending device 490 is received, and the number of game balls to be paid out is stored in the lending number storage area. Thus, when the number of prize balls is acquired from the main control device 100 in the prize ball setting process (step S4086) and the number of balls lent is obtained from the lending apparatus 490 in the ball rental setting process, in order to actually pay out the game balls this time. Then, a payout number setting process (step S4090) is executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout number setting process. As shown in the drawing, in the payout number setting process, first, a mask process is performed on the value in the winning ball number storage area (step S4500). As described above, in the prize ball setting process, the masking process is performed on the value in the prize ball number storage area (see FIG. 66: step S4310), but there is time until the prize ball is actually paid out. Therefore, the value in the prize ball number storage area may be affected by noise or the like during that time. Therefore, if the masking process is also performed in the payout number setting process, it is possible to more reliably avoid the possibility that the value of the winning ball number storage area becomes an incorrect value.

  Once the value of the award ball number storage area is masked, it is then determined whether or not the payout control device 410 is in the ball removal operation (step S4502). Here, the ball removing operation is an operation for discharging and emptying the game balls from the game ball storage tank 400 and the upper game ball passage 402 (see FIG. 5) for maintenance work of the gaming machine and the like. In the ball and ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball removing operation can be executed as follows. First, the supply of game balls to the game ball storage tank 400 is stopped. Next, the front panel 15 is opened and a game ball is put into the entrance. Thereafter, when the front panel 15 is closed, a prize ball permission signal, which will be described later, is transmitted from the payout control device 410 to the main control device 100, and in response thereto, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 100 to the payout control device 410. . The payout control device 410 pays out a game ball from the payout device 420 in response to a prize ball command.

  When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 420, the game ball in the game ball storage tank 400 is eventually exhausted, and the tank ball detection switch 408 detects the absence of the ball. As described above, when the tank ball detection switch 408 detects the absence of a ball, the payout from the payout device 420 is stopped, so that the payout device 420 is stopped when the game ball storage tank 400 is empty. .

  However, in this state, although the game ball storage tank 400 is empty, it is considered that the game ball still remains in the path from the tank ball detection switch 408 to the payout device 420. Therefore, this time, the ball removal operation switch 416 is operated. As a result, the “ball removal operation flag” is set in the RAM of the payout control device 410, and the payout control device 410 shifts to the “ball removal operation state”. In the ball removal operation state, even if the tank ball detection switch 408 detects the absence of the ball, the payout device 420 pays out. By doing so, it is possible to discharge the game ball remaining in the passage between the tank ball detection switch 408 and the payout device 420.

  In step S4502 of FIG. 69, based on the ball removal operation flag, it is determined whether or not the ball removal operation is being performed. When the ball removal operation is in progress (step S4502: Yes), the value in the prize ball number storage area is paid out regardless of whether or not the tank ball detection switch 408 detects a no-ball state and is in a payout error state. The number counter is set (step S4512). Thereby, as described above, even when the tank ball detection switch 408 detects the absence of a ball, the game ball is paid out from the payout device 420, and the game ball storage tank 400 and the upper game ball passage 402 are discharged. Can be emptied.

  If it is not during the punching operation (step S4502: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a payout error state (step S4504). As described above, whether or not the payout error state is present can be determined based on the payout error flag. In the case of a payout error state, the payout number setting process is terminated as it is because normal payout cannot be performed as in the case where the lower plate 16 is full (step S4504: Yes). If it is not in the payout error state (step S4504: No), it is then determined whether or not a retry operation is being performed (step S4506).

Here, the retry operation refers to changing the rotation direction of the payout motor 426 of the payout device 420 when the payout device 420 cannot normally discharge the game ball, such as when a ball jam occurs in the payout device 420. For example, this is an operation of resolving the clogging and trying to return to the normal state. In the case of such a retry operation, the payout number setting process is ended as it is to wait until the normal state is restored (step S4506: Yes).

  If the retry operation is not in progress (step S4506: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball rental operation is in progress (step S4508). That is, the payout control device 410 according to the present embodiment has a case of paying out a winning ball and a case of paying out a rental ball. Therefore, when paying out a ball (in the case of a ball rental operation), the value in the number-of-balls storage area that stores the number of balls is set in the number-of-payout counter (step S4510). On the other hand, if the ball lending operation is not in progress, the value of the prize ball number storage area is stored in the payout number counter in order to pay out the prize ball (step S4512). Although it is possible to determine whether or not the renting operation is in progress by various methods, it can be easily determined based on the above-described renting status flag.

  As described above, in the payout number setting process, the number of game balls to be paid out to the payout number counter is set according to the operating state of the payout device 420 and whether to pay out a prize ball or a lending ball. When the payout number setting process is completed and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 61), the payout control process is executed to actually perform payout (FIG. 61: step S4092).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control process. As shown in the figure, when the process is started, first, a payout state setting process is executed (step S4550). As described above, in the payout state setting process, the operating state of the payout device 420 is changed based on the error flag and the low speed flag (see FIG. 65). Thereby, the game ball is actually paid out from the payout device 420. Next, it is determined whether or not the payout count switch 424 detects a game ball (payout ball) paid out from the payout device 420 (FIG. 70: step S4552). As described above, the payout count switch 424 is a sensor switch that is provided in the payout device 420 and detects the game balls paid out by the payout device 420 one by one. If the payout ball is not detected by the payout count switch 424, the game ball has not been paid out, so the payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process in order to wait for the process to be paid out. (Step S4552: No).

  On the other hand, when a payout ball is detected (step S4552: Yes), a process of subtracting the value of the counter that records the number of game balls to be paid out in response to the payout of one game ball is performed. Do. First, it is determined whether or not a ball rental operation is in progress (step S4554). That is, as described above, game balls are paid out when paying out prize balls and when paying out rental balls. Therefore, by determining whether or not the ball lending operation is in progress, the process is branched between the case of a winning ball and the case of lending. If the ball lending operation is in progress, “1” is subtracted from the value in the lending number storage area in response to paying out one ball lending (step S4566). In response to the payout of one game ball, “1” is subtracted from the value of the payout number counter (step S4568).

  On the other hand, if the ball lending operation is not in progress (step S4554: No), “1” is subtracted from the value in the prize ball number storage area corresponding to the payout of one prize ball (step S4556). In addition, “1” is subtracted from the value of the payout number counter in response to paying out one game ball (step S4558).

Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball number storage area is “2” or less (step S4560). If it is “2” or less, whether or not the prize ball low speed flag is set (“ON”) or not. (Step S4562), the prize ball low speed flag is set to “ON” (step S4564). As described above, when the award ball low speed flag is set to “ON”, it is possible to pay out the game ball from the payout device 420 at a low speed (see FIG. 65: step S4264 and step S4270). Therefore, when the value of the prize ball number storage area becomes “2” or less in this way, by setting the prize ball low speed flag, when the remaining number of prize balls to be paid out becomes 2 or less, The ball is paid out at a low speed.

  As a result, the frequency of stopping the payout motor 426 can be reduced as described above. As a result, the power consumption of the payout motor 426 can be suppressed, and the life of the payout motor 426 can be improved. In other words, if the number of remaining prize balls to be paid out decreases, the game ball can enter the first operating port 25a and the second operating port 25b while paying out by reducing the payout speed of the game ball. If the game ball enters the first operating port 25a or the second operating port 25b, the winning ball will be paid out, so that the payout motor 426 can be continuously driven without stopping. is there. Thereby, the power consumption of the payout motor 426 can be suppressed, and the life of the payout motor 426 can be improved. On the other hand, in a state where the number of remaining prize balls is large, the game balls can be paid out at a high speed, so that the game balls can be quickly paid out. This makes it possible to achieve both paying out quickly and improving the power consumption and life by reducing the frequency with which the payout motor 426 stops.

  As described above, in the payout control process, the payout state setting process (see FIG. 65) is executed to pay out the game ball from the payout device 420 and pay out whether or not the game ball is actually paid out. Detection is performed using the count switch 424. In addition, when the game ball is actually paid out, the value of the payout number counter is subtracted. In this way, the value of the payout number counter is subtracted with the payout of the game ball, and when it eventually becomes “0”, the payout device 420 shifts to the stop state in the payout state setting process, so that the payout is stopped (see FIG. 65: See steps S4262 and S4268). When the payout number setting process described above is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 61), and then the “prize ball permission signal setting process” is executed (FIG. 61: step S4094).

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of “prize ball permission signal setting process” executed in the timer interrupt process. This process is a process for notifying the main control apparatus 100 whether or not the payout control apparatus 410 can accept a prize ball payout request. Such notification is made via a “prize ball permission signal” (see FIG. 58) sent from the payout control device 410 to the main control device 100.

  When the winning ball permission signal setting process is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the winning ball number storage area is “3” or less (FIG. 71: step S4600). That is, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize ball payout request from the main controller 100 is received when the value of the prize ball number storage area is “3” or less. Therefore, if the value in the prize ball number storage area is not “3” or less (step S4600: No), the prize ball permission signal is set to a non-permitted state (prize ball non-permitted state) (step S4612). Correspondingly, the main control device 100 stops award ball payout request (award ball command transmission) to the payout control device 410 when the prize ball permission signal is in a prize ball non-permission state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball number storage area is “3” or less (step S4600: Yes), the prize ball permission signal may be set to the prize ball permission state. However, in the payout error state, the payout of the winning ball cannot be performed normally. Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is a payout error state (step S4604), and in the case of a payout error state (step S4604: Yes), a prize ball permission signal is set to a prize ball non-permission state (step S4612). When the ball removal operation is in progress (step S4602: YES), the payout is performed regardless of whether or not the payout error state is set as described above, and thus step S4604 is skipped.

  As described above, if the prize ball command is not accepted in the payout error state, it is possible to avoid the possibility of losing information on the prize ball even if the power supply is interrupted in the payout error state. It becomes possible. That is, in the case of a payout error state, the payout control device 410 does not receive information relating to the prize ball, so that even if the power of the payout control device 410 is cut off in the payout error state, the payout control device 410 receives information relating to the prize ball. Never lose. On the other hand, the main control device 100 waits without transmitting information relating to award balls to the payout control device 410. In general, however, the main control device 100 normally has a backup function, so that power is cut off. Even if it is made, information regarding the prize ball can be retained. As a result, it is possible to appropriately pay out the prize balls while avoiding loss of information relating to the prize balls. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a backup device in the payout control device 410, the device configuration of the payout control device 410 can be kept simple, and the device size of the payout control device 410 can also be made compact. It becomes.

  If it is determined in step S4604 that the payout error state is not set (step S4604: NO), it is possible to accept a payout of a winning ball, and the winning ball permission signal is shifted to a winning ball permission state (step S4610). Thereby, a prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control device 100 to the payout control apparatus 410, and a prize ball can be paid out from the payout apparatus 420 as the game progresses. When the winning ball permission signal setting process is completed as described above, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 61).

  In the timer interrupt process, the processes in steps S4080 to S4094 described above are repeatedly executed at a predetermined time period. Thereby, as described above, according to the progress of the game, the payout device 420 can be controlled to appropriately pay out the game ball.

  Here, as described above, in the lower pan full check process of this embodiment (see FIG. 62), it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main controller 100 (step S4210), and the command is received. The lower pan full sensor monitoring time (corresponding to the determination time from when the lower pan full sensor 530 is in the detection state to when it is determined that the lower pan is full) is switched between the case and the case where it has not been received. In this way, it is possible to downsize the apparatus configuration while reliably detecting the full state of the lower plate 16. This point will be described.

  As described above, until the lower pan full sensor monitoring time elapses, the payout of the game ball is not stopped even in the sensor detection state, and the payout of the game ball continues. Then, since a space for storing the game balls to be paid out during this time is required, it is desirable to make the lower pan full sensor monitoring time as short as possible from the viewpoint of downsizing the device configuration. On the other hand, it may be desirable to make the lower pan full sensor monitoring time longer from the viewpoint of reliably cooperating with the main control device 100 and appropriately paying out the game balls. In particular, this tendency becomes prominent when the power supply is restored from the interrupted state. That is, when the power is recovered from the state where the power is cut off, it may take time until the main control device 100 is activated. For example, when the main control device 100 has a so-called backup function, it takes time to restore the backed up state, or even if there is no backup function, it takes time to initialize the CPU of the main control device 100. May take time to establish a connection with the RAM or ROM, or may take time to establish a connection with the sub-control device 200.

In such a case, if the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is short, a command for notifying the full state of the lower pan 16 before the power is restored and the main control device 100 is started (in this embodiment, “lower” in step S4222 of FIG. 63). There is a risk that the dish full tank signal ON command ") will be transmitted from the dispensing device 420 to the main control device 100. For example, when the power supply recovers when the lower plate 16 is full, the payout control device 410 starts counting up the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer after the power supply is recovered, and then the value of the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer is When the full sensor monitoring time is reached, a lower pan full signal ON command is transmitted to the main controller 100. At this time, if the lower pan full sensor sensor monitoring time is short, there is a possibility that the lower pan full signal ON command may be transmitted to the main control device 100 before the start of the main control device 100 is completed. In this case, the main controller 100 cannot receive a command for notifying that the lower plate is full.

  Thus, it is preferable to lengthen the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time in order to properly cooperate with the main control device 100, and conversely, in order to make the device configuration compact, the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time is set. It is preferable to shorten it. For this reason, in general ball game machines, it is normal to set the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time to a value that balances both.

  On the other hand, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time can be changed. Can be set. For example, when power is restored, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to a long time based on the fact that a command has not yet been received from the main controller 100. This avoids the possibility of transmitting a command for notifying the main control device 100 that the lower pan is full before the main control device 100 starts up.

  In addition, since the game ball payout request is not received immediately after recovery from the power source, even if the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time is set to a long time, the game balls stacked in the second flow path 450 are not collected. There is no risk of reaching the dispensing device 420. In the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, paying attention to such points, the game ball is dispensed by setting the lower plate full sensor sensor monitoring time to a long time before receiving a command from the main control device 100. The payout control device 410 and the main control device 100 can be reliably linked while avoiding the possibility of inconvenience due to accumulation up to 420.

  On the other hand, after receiving a command from the main control device 100 (after the main control device 100 is activated and a connection with the main control device 100 is established), the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to a short time. It is set. By doing this, the number of game balls to be paid out during the period from when the lower pan full sensor 530 is in the detection state until the payout is actually stopped is reduced, and the space for storing the game balls is reduced. It is possible. Thereby, in the ball game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve both the proper cooperation with the main control device 100 and the compactness of the device configuration without compromise. ing.

  In addition, when switching the monitoring time of the lower plate full tank sensor to a short time, the payout speed of the game balls (the number of payouts per unit time) and the space for storing the game balls stacked in the second flow path 450 (storage) Based on the size of the (space), it is possible to determine the monitoring time of the lower pan full sensor after switching. In other words, based on the payout speed and the size of the storage space, it is possible to estimate the time until the game ball can no longer enter the storage space. Therefore, if the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time is set so as not to exceed this time, the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time is sufficiently long while surely avoiding the possibility of the game ball reaching the payout device 420. Thus, the influence of noise or the like can be avoided.

  In addition, since it is possible to avoid the possibility of the game balls reaching the payout device 420 in this way, it is not necessary to provide a large storage space with a sufficient margin for the number of game balls that can be stored. This makes it possible to employ a compact device configuration.

In this embodiment, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to a short time (FIG. 62:
(See step S4208), the condition whether or not to change the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is judged (step S4210), and the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to a long time (step S4212). In general, in a process using a CPU, when a fixed value determined in advance is used and when the value can be changed, the value is surely set. There is a high tendency. In this respect, in the present embodiment, by setting the value once before performing the condition judgment in this way, it is possible to change the value and set the value surely to increase the reliability of the operation. Yes.

  In addition, since the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time is first set to a short time in this embodiment, even if the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time cannot be changed due to some trouble, It is possible to reliably avoid the possibility that the ball reaches the dispensing device 420 and the device breaks down. As described above, if the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time is set to a short time and then set to a long time, various concerns caused by the fact that the lower pan full sensor monitoring time can be changed are more likely. It is also possible to avoid it reliably.

  In the present embodiment, the function of changing the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time has been described as being applied to the above-described payout mechanism (see FIGS. 51 to 57). However, the present invention is not limited to such a payout mechanism. It is possible to apply to the payout mechanism. For example, you may employ | adopt in the game machine provided with the payout mechanism in which a lever member rotates in the front back direction of a game machine like the conventional bullet ball game machine. Of course, if applied to the above-described payout mechanism of the present embodiment, it is possible to keep the apparatus configuration compact, and even with such a payout mechanism having a compact structure, it is possible to reliably detect a full state. Since it becomes possible, it is more preferable.

I. Modified example:
Below, the modification of the Example mentioned above is demonstrated. In the following description of the modified examples, the same reference numerals as those in the embodiment are assigned to the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiment, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

I-1. First modification:
In the above-described embodiment, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is switched according to whether or not the main control device 100 is activated. However, it is also possible to switch the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time according to the payout speed of the game ball.

  FIG. 72 shows a game ball for a modified ball game machine that switches the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time between when the game ball is paid out at a low speed (low speed mode) and when at a normal speed (normal mode). It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination of the payout speed | rate (the number of payout per unit time), and the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring time. As shown in the figure, in the normal mode, the game ball is paid out at a pace of 0.06 seconds (60 milliseconds), while in the low speed mode, it is slower, 0.12 seconds (120 milliseconds). Game balls are paid out at a pace of 1 second). Corresponding to this, in the low speed mode, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is set to “1 second” longer than the normal mode.

  As described above, in order to make the device configuration compact, the time from when the lower pan full sensor 530 is detected until the lower pan 16 is determined to be full (the lower pan full sensor monitoring time) is shortened. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the space for storing game balls. On the other hand, in order to appropriately detect the full state while avoiding the influence of noise or the like, or to reliably cooperate with the main control device 100, it is desirable to lengthen the lower pan full sensor monitoring time.

Therefore, the lower pan full sensor monitoring time is switched according to the game ball payout speed in this way. Since the number of game balls to be paid out before the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time elapses (that is, the size of the space required to store the game balls) depends on the payout speed of the game balls. By doing so, it is possible to set an appropriate lower pan full sensor monitoring time according to the payout speed. For example, in the example of FIG. 72, in the low-speed mode, the game ball is paid out at a slow pace, so that it is possible to set the lower pan full sensor monitoring time longer. By doing this, while keeping the space for storing game balls compact, the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time can be lengthened to more reliably avoid the effects of noise and the like, and the full state of the lower plate 16 can be detected appropriately It is said.

  Note that switching between the low-speed mode and the normal mode can be performed by various methods. For example, in the bullet ball game machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, the low speed mode and the normal mode may be switched based on the low speed flag (prize ball low speed flag, no ball low speed flag).

I-2. Second modification:
Further, the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time may be switched between when a game ball is lent from the payout device 420 and when a prize ball is paid out. That is, when renting out game balls, the player usually does not have a game ball, so it is unlikely that the lower plate 16 will be full. Therefore, it is preferable to increase resistance to noise or to ensure cooperation with the main control device 100 by increasing the lower pan full sensor monitoring time rather than shortening the lower pan full sensor monitoring time.

  Therefore, during the game ball lending operation, the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time may be changed to a longer time. This makes it possible to increase resistance to noise and the like. Further, when the lending operation is completed, the lower tray full sensor monitoring time may be changed to a time shorter than that during the lending operation. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably avoid the possibility that the game balls accumulated in the second flow path 450 reach the payout device 420 when the lower tray 16 becomes full due to payout of prize balls or the like. In addition, if the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time is shortened, the number of game balls stacked in the second flow path 450 can be reduced, so that the space for storing game balls is reduced and the device configuration is made compact. It becomes possible to keep.

I-3. Third modification:
In the bullet ball gaming machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) can be generated, and in the jackpot gaming state, the large entrance hole 60 is opened, so that a large number of prize balls are paid out. . Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the lower plate 16 tends to become full. In view of these points, in the big hit gaming state, the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time may be set to a shorter time than the normal gaming state.

  In this way, it is possible to more reliably avoid the possibility that the game balls accumulated in the second channel 450 reach the payout device 420 because the lower plate 16 is full. Further, if the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time is shortened, the number of game balls piled up in the second flow path 450 can be suppressed, so that it is possible to reduce the space for storing the stacked game balls. . Thereby, it is possible to make the apparatus configuration more compact. Further, if the lower tray full sensor monitoring time is shortened, it is possible to avoid the possibility that the game ball reaches the payout device 420 before the payout is stopped even if the payout speed of the game ball is high. For this reason, it becomes possible to pay out the winning ball quickly by increasing the paying-out speed of the game ball. As a result, by quickly paying out the prize balls, it is possible to improve the exhilaration of the big hit gaming state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time can be set to a longer time than the big hit gaming state, so that it is possible to increase resistance to noise and the like, and to reliably cooperate with the main control device 100. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately pay out the game ball as the game progresses.

I-4. Fourth modification:
In the lower tray full tank check process of the ball ball game machine 10, when the detection state of the lower tray full tank sensor 530 continues for a predetermined time, the game ball payout speed is lowered and then the game ball payout is stopped. It is good also as what to do.

  FIG. 73 to FIG. 75 are flowcharts showing the flow of the lower dish full check process of the fourth modified example in which the game ball payout is stopped after the game ball payout speed is lowered. As shown in FIG. 73, the signal level of the lower pan full sensor 530 is acquired in the lower pan full check process of the fourth modified example as well as the previous embodiment (step S4202). If the predetermined threshold is exceeded (step S4204), it is determined that the state is detected, and the value of the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer is counted up (step S4206). Then, by comparing the value of the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer with the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time, it is determined whether or not to stop paying out the game ball.

  Here, in the lower plate full tank check process of the fourth modified example, as shown in step S4250 of FIG. 74, first, the value of the lower plate full tank sensor monitoring timer is set to a constant lower plate full tank sensor monitoring time. It is determined whether or not the ratio (50% in the example of FIG. 74) is exceeded. If it exceeds (step S4250: YES), the lower pan full tank low speed flag is set (set to “ON”) (step S4252). In response to this, in the payout state setting process (see FIG. 65) for controlling the operation state of the payout device 420, when the lower pan full tank low speed flag is set, the payout device 420 is shifted to the low speed state. (Refer to step S4264 and step S4270).

  When the detection time of the lower pan full sensor 530 continues to some extent, there is a high possibility that the lower pan 16 is full. Therefore, in such a case, if the payout speed of the game ball is lowered, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls to be paid out until the lower dish full tank sensor monitoring time continues. This makes it possible to reduce the space for storing game balls to be paid out until the lower tray full tank sensor monitoring time continues, thereby making the device configuration more compact.

  Further, when the lower plate full sensor 530 is switched from the detection state to the non-detection state and the value of the lower plate full sensor monitoring timer falls below a predetermined value, the payout speed of the game ball may be returned to the normal speed. Good. For example, if it is determined in step S4204 in FIG. 73 that the lower pan full sensor 530 is in a non-detection state (step S4204: No), then, as shown in step S4256 in FIG. 75, the lower pan full sensor monitoring timer When the value falls below a predetermined threshold value (in the example of FIG. 75, a value that is 50% of the lower pan full sensor monitoring time), the lower pan full low speed flag is reset (set to “OFF”) (step S4258). In response, in the payout state control process (see FIG. 65), the payout speed from the payout device 420 is shifted to the normal speed (steps S4264 and S4266). By doing so, when the lower plate 16 is not full, the game ball can be quickly paid out.

  When the lower plate full tank low speed flag is set, the prize ball permission signal may be controlled as follows in the prize ball permission signal setting process.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a modified prize ball permission signal setting process for setting a prize ball permission signal based on the lower plate full tank low speed flag. Also in the prize ball permission signal setting process of this modified example, the prize ball permission state and the prize are determined according to whether or not the value of the prize ball number storage area is “3” or less (step S4600), as in the previous embodiment. The sphere non-permission state is switched (steps S4610 and S4612). Here, in the prize ball permission signal setting process of the modified example, when the lower plate full tank low speed flag is set (step S4606: Yes), the prize ball permission signal is shifted to the prize ball non-permitted state (step S4606). S4612).

  As described above, the lower pan full tank low speed flag is set when the lower pan full tank sensor monitoring timer exceeds a predetermined value (see FIG. 74: step S4250 and step S4252). There is a possibility that the payout of the game ball may be stopped because it is determined that it is full. Accordingly, in such a case, if the acceptance of the prize ball command from the main control device 100 is stopped, the payout is stopped in a state where a large number of prize balls are stored in the prize ball number storage area of the payout control device 410. Can be avoided. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the payout control device 410 loses information on prize balls due to, for example, the power supply being cut off in a state where the withdrawal is stopped, a large number of prize balls will not be paid out. It is possible to avoid the situation, which is more preferable.

  Although the ball ball game machine 10 and its modification examples of the present embodiment have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification examples, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the spirit thereof. Is possible.

Inventions embodied in the above-described embodiments and modifications:
In a gaming machine that uses a game ball such as a pachinko machine or an arrangement ball machine, the game ball is paid out as the game progresses. For example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a ball entrance provided on the game board surface, the game ball is paid out as a prize ball. The game ball is normally paid out from the payout device through the payout passage to the front side of the gaming machine and stored in a tray provided on the front side.

  Here, when the tray is filled with game balls, if the game balls are paid out in this state, there is a risk that the game balls will be jammed in the payout passage and the gaming machine will break down. For example, in a pachinko machine, when a so-called big hit state occurs, a large number of prize balls may be paid out in a short time. In such a case, the saucer is likely to be full. There is a possibility that inconveniences such as the ball becoming stuck and the game cannot be continued or the pachinko machine itself breaks down. Therefore, a technique for avoiding such an inconvenience is provided by providing a detection mechanism for detecting a full state in the payout passage, and stopping the payout when detecting a full state of the tray.

  However, in recent years, it has become difficult to secure a space for providing such a detection mechanism in a gaming machine. That is, in recent years, other devices mounted on gaming machines tend to be complicated or large in size, and in such cases, the space for installing the payout passage and the space for installing the detection mechanism are inevitably limited. There is. For this reason, there is a need for a compact full detection mechanism that can be installed in a limited space.

  Therefore, in order to solve at least a part of the above-described problems, the gaming machine A1 employs the following configuration. That is,

Gaming machine A1:
A gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game,
A payout device for paying out game balls;
A receiving unit for receiving a game ball paid out from the payout device;
A game ball passage provided between the payout device and the receiving portion, through which a game ball from the payout device flows;
Game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball overflowing into the game ball passage by storing the game ball in the receiving unit;
A payout stopping means for stopping payout from the payout device when the state in which the game ball is detected by the game ball detecting means continues for a predetermined determination time;
A determination time changing means for changing the determination time;
A game ball that overflows with the storage of the game ball in the receiving unit is stored, and a storage unit in which the game ball flows to the receiving unit with the cancellation of the storage,
The determination time changing means is means for changing the determination time to a time when the number of game balls paid out from the payout device during the determination time is equal to or less than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A1, the game ball paid out from the payout device flows through the game ball passage and is paid out to the receiving unit. In addition, when a game ball that cannot reach the receiving part for a reason such as the receiving part becomes full overflows into the gaming ball passage, the gaming ball is detected. Further, when the state in which such a game ball is detected continues for a predetermined determination time, the payout of the game ball from the payout device is stopped. Here, the gaming machine A1 is configured to be able to change the determination time, and the determination time is set so that the number of game balls paid out during the determination time is equal to or less than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit. To change.

  When detecting a game ball that has stopped flowing to the receiving part and trying to stop payout, confirm that the detection state has continued for a predetermined judgment time for reasons such as avoiding false detection, and then payout May stop. In such a case, a space is required to accommodate the game balls that have been paid out after the game balls are detected until the payout is stopped. Here, in order to make the apparatus configuration compact, it is desirable to make such a housing space as small as possible. However, if the accommodation space is reduced, it is impossible to accommodate the game balls, and there is a possibility that inconveniences such as the game balls that cannot be accommodated cause clogging of the balls. For this reason, there is a case where it is unavoidable to adopt a configuration in which the accommodation space has a margin.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine A1, the determination time can be changed, and the determination time is changed so that the number of game balls paid out during the determination time is equal to or less than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of game balls exceeding the accommodation space is paid out, so that it is not necessary to adopt a configuration in which the accommodation space has a margin. In addition, since it is possible to stop paying out game balls based on whether or not the detection state has continued for a determination time or longer, it is possible to appropriately detect the full state of the receiving unit while avoiding erroneous detection and the like. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately detect the full state while keeping the apparatus configuration compact.

  In addition, about an accommodating part, it is good also as what uses a part of game ball channel | path as an accommodating part, and you may provide an accommodating part separately from the game ball path. If a part of the game ball passage is used as the accommodating portion, the device configuration can be made more compact, which is more preferable.

Gaming machine A2:
A gaming machine A1,
A payout command output device that outputs a payout command for game balls as the game progresses;
A detection signal transmission means for transmitting a detection signal to the payout command output device when the detection state by the game ball detection means continues for the determination time;
The payout command output device comprises:
The device is in a state where it can receive the detection signal after a predetermined startup time has elapsed since the start of power supply.
When the detection signal is ready to be received, a receivable signal sending means for sending a receivable signal;
A payout command output stop means for stopping the output of the payout command when receiving the detection signal;
The determination time changing means is a gaming machine A2 which is means for changing the determination time longer than the required startup time after receiving the receivable signal.

  In the gaming machine A2, the payout command output device outputs a payout command, so that the game ball is paid out. Further, when the detection state by the game ball detection means continues for the determination time, a detection signal is transmitted. The payout command output device transmits a receivable signal when it enters a state in which it can receive a detection signal after starting to start receiving power. When the detection signal is received in a state where the detection signal can be received, the output of the payout command is stopped. Here, in the gaming machine A2, after receiving the receivable signal from the payout command output device, a determination time longer than the required start time of the payout command output device is set to the above-described determination time (game to be paid out during the determination time). The number of balls is changed to a determination time during which the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than the number of game balls.

  In general, a gaming machine using a game ball may employ a configuration in which a game ball is paid out in response to a command from a device that outputs a payout command. In such a configuration, when the payout of the game ball is stopped because the receiving unit is full or the like, the output of the payout command is stopped by transmitting a detection signal to a device that outputs the payout command. Here, there may be a case where the payout command output device cannot receive the detection signal in a state where the start-up of the payout command output device is not completely completed, such as immediately after returning from the power failure state. Thus, it is conceivable that the detection signal is transmitted after the start-up of the payout command output device is sufficiently completed by delaying the transmission of the detection signal by setting the determination time longer. However, if the determination time becomes long, the number of game balls to be paid out during that time increases, so that there is a possibility that a space for housing the game balls is required and the apparatus configuration is increased in size.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine A2, after receiving the receivable signal from the payout command output device, the determination time longer than the activation required time is set to the above-described determination time (the number of game balls to be paid out during the determination time is equal to the storage unit). To the number of game balls that can be accommodated in the determination time). In this way, since the detection signal is not transmitted before the payout command output device is ready to receive the detection signal, the possibility that the payout command output device cannot receive the detection signal is surely avoided. It becomes possible. In addition, since the determination time is changed to a short time after the start-up of the payout command output device, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls to be paid out during the determination time and keep the accommodating portion compact. As a result, it is possible to keep the apparatus configuration compact while appropriately detecting the full state of the receiving portion.

  The detection signal may be in any form as long as it can be notified that the detection state by the game ball detection means has continued for the determination time. For example, it may be a pulse signal or a so-called command. In any case, it can be notified that the detection state by the game ball detecting means has continued for the determination time. Similarly, the receivable signal may have any form as long as it can be notified that the detection signal can be received.

Gaming machine A3:
A gaming machine A1 or a gaming machine A2,
A payout speed changing means for changing a payout speed as the number of payouts per unit time from the payout device;
The determination time changing means is a gaming machine A3 which is means for changing the determination time to a determination time determined based on the payout speed.

  The gaming machine A3 is configured to be able to change the game ball payout speed. Here, when the determination time is switched, the changed determination time is determined based on the payout speed of the game ball.

  If the payout speed of the game ball can be changed, it is preferable that the game ball can be properly paid out according to the progress of the game. Here, the number of game balls paid out during the determination time depends on the payout speed of the game balls. Therefore, if the determination time is changed according to the payout speed, the number of game balls to be paid out during the determination time is controlled to be equal to or less than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage portion, but more appropriately according to the payout speed. It is possible to set a proper determination time. For example, if the payout speed is slow, the number of game balls to be paid out during the determination time can be controlled to be equal to or less than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage portion even if the determination time is increased accordingly. It is. Therefore, if the determination time is determined according to the payout speed, it is possible to make the determination time longer. As a result, it is possible to more reliably avoid the false detection and more accurately detect the full state of the receiving unit. Is possible.

Gaming machine B1:
A gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game,
A payout device for paying out game balls;
A receiving unit for receiving a game ball paid out from the payout device;
A flow-down passage provided between the payout device and the receiving portion, through which a game ball from the payout device flows down;
A guiding portion provided in the flow-down passage for guiding the game ball in a direction intersecting the vertical direction;
A recoil portion provided in the flow-down passage in the direction of travel of the guided game ball and rebounding the game ball;
Displaced in the direction of the horizontal speed of the guided game ball is provided vertically below the recoil portion in the flow-down passage, and when the game ball stays in the flow-down passage, the game ball is pushed and displaced. A displacement member;
A gaming machine B1 comprising: a payout stopping unit that stops payout from the payout device when detecting the displacement of the displacement member.

  In such a gaming machine B1, the game ball that has flowed into the flow-down passage from the payout device is guided in a direction that intersects the vertical direction. In addition, a recoil portion is provided at the tip of the game ball, and the game ball is bounced back. Below the recoil portion, there is provided a displacement portion that is displaced by the game ball when the game ball stays in the flow path, and the gaming machine B1 pays out the game ball when the displacement portion is displaced. Stop. Here, the recoil portion rebounds the game ball in the horizontal direction in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement portion.

  In general, in the configuration in which the full state of the receiving portion is detected by the displacement member being pushed and displaced by the game ball, it is erroneously detected that the game ball flowing down from the payout device collides with the displacement member and the displacement member is displaced. It may be a cause. For this reason, it is necessary to provide the dispensing device and the displacement member separately, and as a result, the device configuration tends to be enlarged.

  Therefore, if the game ball is guided in the direction of the recoil portion in this way and the game ball is bounced back at the recoil portion, the displacement portion is pushed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the bounced game ball bounces at least in the horizontal direction. There is nothing. Therefore, if the displacement direction of the displacement portion is provided in a direction opposite to the direction of rebound (at least in the opposite direction with respect to the horizontal direction), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the displacement portion is displaced by a flowing game ball and erroneous detection occurs. . By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the dispensing device and the displacement member separately, and as a result, the device configuration can be kept compact. In addition, it is possible to more accurately detect the full state of the receiving portion while avoiding erroneous detection.

Gaming machine B2:
A gaming machine B1,
The recoil portion is a recoil portion that causes the game ball to rebound by a surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction,
Provided with a facing surface provided substantially parallel to the recoil portion,
A gaming machine B2 that accommodates a game ball retained in the flow-down passage between the recoil portion and the facing surface.

  In such a gaming machine B2, the game ball is rebounded by a surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. In addition, an opposing surface is provided substantially parallel to this surface, and a game ball staying in the flow-down passage is accommodated between these two surfaces.

  In general, in a configuration in which payout is stopped by detecting the full state of the receiving portion by displacement of the displacement member, it may be difficult to immediately stop payout of the game ball even if the displacement member is displaced. For example, even if an attempt is made to stop the dispensing device immediately after displacement, there is a case where the dispensing cannot be stopped immediately due to the inertia of the dispensing device itself. Alternatively, in order to avoid erroneous detection, it may be necessary to stop paying out after confirming that the displacement member has been displaced for a predetermined time. For these reasons, game balls will be further paid out until the payout is stopped, and as a result, a space for accommodating these game balls may be required. In addition, when the game ball is accommodated, it is desirable that the accommodated game ball flow down and be discharged to the reception unit when the full state of the reception unit is resolved.

  Therefore, if a plane substantially parallel to the recoil portion is provided and a game ball is accommodated between the recoil portion, a space for accommodating the game ball need not be provided separately, so that the space is saved and the device configuration is reduced. It becomes possible to keep it compact. In addition, if a game ball is accommodated between two substantially parallel surfaces, the flow of the game ball will resume when the retention of the game ball is resolved, so that the game ball is appropriately discharged to the receiving part. Is possible.

Gaming machine D1:
In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 and gaming machines B1 to B2, a payout means (payout device 420) for paying out game balls in association with a game, and a first storage unit (upper) for storing game balls paid out from the payout means A tray 13), a second storage portion (lower tray 16) provided on the lower side of the first storage portion, which is a portion storing game balls surplus in the first storage portion, and the payout means A first passage portion (first flow path 448) for allowing a game ball to flow down between the first storage portion and the first passage portion is formed between the payout means and the second storage portion. And a second passage portion (second flow path 450) for causing the game ball to flow down, and a game ball paid out from the payout means to flow down to the first passage portion and the game ball is filled in the first passage portion. The game ball paid out from the payout means is caused to flow down to the second passage portion. Detection for detecting a predetermined full state formed by a common part (nozzle flow path 422, lower flow path 440) formed between the branch part and the payout means and a game ball flowing down the second passage part Means (lower pan full detection mechanism 500), and stop control means (payout control device 410) for stopping the payout of the game ball from the payout means based on the detection result of the detection means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection means is arranged at a position higher than the first storage part.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the detection means is disposed at a position higher than the first storage part, the number of game balls stored in the middle of the second storage part and the second passage part is larger than before. can do. Further, since the passage from the second storage unit to the detection means is long, it is possible to suppress the act of accessing the detection means for the purpose of fraud or the purpose of mischief due to dissatisfaction with the amusement hall, and it is difficult for fraud or failure to occur A gaming machine can be provided.

Note that the first storage portion and the second storage portion in the gaming machine D1 may be configured such that the upper part is opened so that the player can take out the game ball, and the first passage portion in the gaming machine D1 A 2nd channel | path part is good also as a site | part comprised so that the player cannot take out a game ball.

Gaming machine D2:
In the gaming machine D1,
A support member (a rectangular member or a so-called outer frame when viewed from the front of the gaming machine to which the front panel 15 is mounted) and a predetermined unlocking operation with respect to the support member are configured to be opened forward with one end as an axis. An opening and closing member (front panel 15 or so-called inner frame),
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are disposed on the one end side of the opening / closing member,
The second passage portion is disposed on the one end side of the opening / closing member from the first passage portion,
The gaming machine, wherein the detection means is disposed on the one end side of the opening / closing member with respect to the second passage portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the detection means is disposed at a position close to the opening / closing axis of the opening / closing member, so that vibration associated with opening / closing of the opening / closing member can be suppressed and failure can be prevented. Unauthorized acts aimed at the detection means can be prevented by arranging the detection means at a position far from the open end side of the opening / closing member.

Gaming machine D3:
In the gaming machine D2,
A member that is detachably attached to the opening and closing member, and includes a game member (game board) that forms a game area where a game ball flows down on the front side,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection means is disposed at a position overlapping the gaming member in a front view of the gaming machine (or at the overlapping position and above the lower end of the gaming area).
According to the gaming machine D3, the detection means is arranged on the back side of the gaming member, so that it is possible to make it difficult to execute an illegal act targeting the detection means from the front side of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine D4:
In the gaming machine D2 or D3,
A front side member (front door) having the first storage part and the second storage part, and configured to be opened forward with the one end side as an axis by a predetermined unlocking operation with respect to the opening and closing member,
A blocking means for blocking the flow of game balls in the first passage portion and the second passage portion from the opening / closing member side to the front side member side when the front side member is opened;
The payout means is provided in the opening / closing member,
The second passage portion is formed in both the front side member and the opening / closing member,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the detecting means is disposed on the opening / closing member side of the front side member and the opening / closing member.

  When the detection means is arranged on the front side member side, the payout is executed inadvertently when the full state of the second storage part is released by the ball removal operation or ball spillage with the front side member opened. End up. According to the gaming machine D4, even when the front side member is opened while increasing the amount of game balls stored in the second storage portion and the second passage portion in the full state by disposing the detection means on the upstream side. Careless payout of game balls will not be executed.

Gaming machine C1:
One of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines D1 to D4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine C1.

  Here, as the pachinko gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine having the following configuration can be adopted. That is, an operation means (for example, an operation handle) operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in a gaming area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

Game machine C2:
In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 and gaming machines B1 to B2, the gaming machine is a gaming machine C2 which is a slot machine.

  Here, as the slot machine, for example, a slot machine having the following configuration can be adopted. That is, a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, and the identification information resulting from the operation of the start operation means (for example, an operation lever or an operation handle). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A gaming machine comprising special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player on condition that the information is specific identification information. In addition, as a game medium of such a game machine, a coin, a medal, a game ball, etc. are mentioned as a representative example.

Game machine C3:
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3 and gaming machines B1 to B2, the gaming machine is a gaming machine C3 in which a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are fused.

  Here, as a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, a gaming machine having the following configuration can be adopted. That is, a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, and the identification information resulting from the operation of the start operation means (for example, an operation lever or an operation handle). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Provided that the information is specific identification information, it is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, using a game ball as a game medium, and dynamically displaying the identification information. A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of game balls at the start and to pay out a large number of game balls when a special game state occurs can be employed.

10 ... ball game machine, 11 ... launch handle, 12 ... board surface,
13 ... Upper plate, 14 ... Speaker, 15 ... Front panel,
16 ... lower plate, 17 ... key, 20 ... game board,
21 ... Rail, 22 ... Nail, 23 ... Windmill,
24 ... Through operating port, 25a ... First operating port, 25b ... Second operating port,
26 ... Small prize opening, 28 ... Game area, 30 ... Production display device,
35 ... Director, 41 ... Electric character, 50 ... Out,
60 ... Large entrance, 70 ... Segment display,
72 ... Left display section, 74 ... Center display section, 76 ... Right display section,
80 ... Segment type display device for through, 100 ... Main control device,
102 ... MPU102, 110 ... ROM, 140 ... RAM,
160 ... Latest pending storage area, 200 ... Sub-control device, 240 ... Power supply device,
300 ... Display control device, 350 ... Director driving device,
400: Game ball storage tank, 402: Upper game ball passage,
408 ... Tank ball detection switch, 410 ... Dispensing control device,
412 ... state return switch, 416 ... ball removal operation switch,
420 ... Dispensing device, 422 ... Nozzle flow path, 424 ... Dispensing count switch,
426 ... Dispensing motor, 440 ... Lower flow path, 448 ... First flow path,
450 ... 2nd flow path, 452 ... Upper plate discharge flow path, 454 ... Lower plate discharge flow path,
480 ... partitioning part, 480s ... inclined surface 490 ... lending device,
500 ... Lower plate full detection mechanism, 504 ... Spring member 510 ... Lever member,
512 ... Shaft part, 514 ... Projection part, 530 ... Bottom pan full sensor,
560 ... Opposite surface 600 ... Recoil plate 910 ... External output terminal

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game,
A payout device for paying out game balls;
A first storage unit for storing game balls paid out from the payout device;
A second storage section for storing game balls paid out from the payout device when the first storage section is filled with game balls;
A first passage portion for allowing a game ball to flow down between the payout device and the first storage portion;
Branched in a direction different from the first passage portion, provided between the payout device and the second storage portion, and paid out from the payout device in a situation where game balls are stacked in the first passage portion A second passage portion for flowing down the played game ball,
Detecting means for detecting a predetermined full state formed by a game ball flowing down the second passage portion;
Stop control means for stopping the payout of the game ball from the payout device based on the detection result of the detection means;
A portion that partitions the second passage portion and the first passage portion, and intersects the vertical direction with the game ball paid out from the payout device in a situation where game balls are stacked in the first passage portion. A guiding part that leads to
A recoil portion provided in a traveling direction of the game ball guided by the guide portion and rebounding the game ball;
A displacement member that is provided on the lower side with respect to the recoil portion, and is displaced by the game ball when the game ball stays in the second passage portion ,
Said detecting means is arranged at a position higher than the first reservoir, the gaming machine characterized that you detect the predetermined fully state by detecting the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.